User'S Manual: CP2E CPU Unit Hardware

Cat. No.
W613-E1-01
SYSMAC CP Series
CP2E-ED-
CP2E-SD-
CP2E-ND-
CP2E CPU Unit Hardware
USER’S MANUAL
NOTE
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in
any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because
OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is
subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Neverthe-
less, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages
resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
Trademarks
• Microsoft, Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
Other company names and product names in this document are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
Copyrights
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
SYSMAC CP Series
CP2E-ED-
CP2E-SD-
CP2E-ND-
CP2E CPU Unit Hardware
User’s Manual
Produced September 2019
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing a SYSMAC CP-series CP2E Programmable Controller.
This manual contains information required to use the CP2E. Read this manual completely and be sure
you understand the contents before attempting to use the CP2E.
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical sys-
tems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities
Applicable Products
z CP-series CP2E CPU Units

• Essential Model CP2E-ED-
A model of CPU Unit that supports connections to Programmable Terminals and basic control
applications using instructions such as basic, movement, arithmetic, and comparison instructions.
• Standard Model CP2E-SD-
A model of CPU Unit that supports connections to inverters and servo drives.
• Network Model CP2E-ND-
A model of CPU Unit that supports Ethernet connection and enhanced positioning functions such
as 4-axis linear interpolation and pulse.
The CP Series is centered around the CP1H, CP1L, CP1E and CP2E CPU Units and is designed
with the same basic architecture as the CS and CJ Series.
Always use CP-series Expansion Units and CP-series Expansion I/O Units when expanding I/O
capacity.
CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613) 1

CP2E CPU Unit Manuals
Information on the CP2E CPU Units is provided in the following manuals.
Refer to the appropriate manual for the information that is required.
This Manual
CP2E CPU Unit Hardware CP2E CPU Unit Software CP1E/CP2E CPU Unit Instructions
User’s Manual(Cat. No. W613) User’s Manual(Cat. No. W614) Reference Manual(Cat. No. W483)
Mounting and
1 Setting Hardware
· Names and specifications of the parts of all Units
· Basic system configuration for each CPU Unit
· Connection methods for Expansion I/O Units
and Expansion Units
2 Wiring
· Wiring methods for the power supply

· Wiring methods between external I/O devices
and Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units
Connecting
3 Online to the PLC
Connecting Cables for CX-Programmer Procedures for connecting the

Support Software CX-Programmer Support Software
4 Software Setup
Software setting methods for the CPU
Units (PLC Setup)
5 Creating the Program

· Program types and basic information Detailed information on
· CPU Unit operation programming instructions
· Internal memory
· Built-in CPU functions
· Settings
Checking and
6 Debugging Operation
· Checking I/O wiring, setting the Auxiliary Area
settings, and performing trial operation
· Monitoring and debugging with the
CX-Programmer
Maintenance and
7 Troubleshooting
Error codes and remedies if a problem occurs
2 CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613)

Manual Configuration
The CP2E CPU manuals are organized in the sections listed in the following tables. Refer to the appro-
priate section in the manuals as required.
CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual (Cat. No. W613)

(This Manual)
Section Contents
Section 1 Overview and Specifica- This section gives an overview of the CP2E, describes its features, and
tions provides its specifications.
Section 2 Basic System Configura- This section describes the basic system configuration and unit models
tion and Devices of the CP2E.
Section 3 Part Names and Functions This section describes the part names and functions of the CPU Unit,
Expansion I/O Units, and Expansion Units in a CP2E PLC .
Section 4 Programming Device This section describes the features of the CX-Programmer used for pro-
gramming and debugging PLCs, as well as how to connect the PLC with
the Programming Device by USB, Ethernet and serial port.
Section 5 Installation and Wiring This section describes how to install and wire CP2E Units.
Section 6 Troubleshooting This section describes how to troubleshoot problems that may occur
with a CP2E PLC, including the error indications provided by the CP2E
Units.
Section 7 Maintenance and Inspec- This section describes periodic inspections, the service life of the Bat-
tion tery, and how to replace the Battery.
Section 8 Using Expansion Units This section describes application methods for Expansion Units.
and Expansion I/O Units
Appendices The appendices provide information on dimensions, wiring diagrams,
wiring serial communications, network installation for the CP2E, and
comparison between CP1E and CP2E.
CP2E CPU Unit Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W614)

Section Contents
Section 1 Overview This section gives an overview of the CP2E, describes its application
procedures.
Section 2 CPU Unit Memory This section describes the types of internal memory in a CP2E CPU
Unit and the data that is stored.
Section 3 CPU Unit Operation This section describes the operation of a CP2E CPU Unit.
Section 4 Programming Concepts This section provides basic information on designing ladder programs
for a CP2E CPU Unit.
Section 5 I/O Memory This section describes the types of I/O memory areas in a CP2E CPU
Unit and the details.
Section 6 I/O Allocation This section describes I/O allocation used to exchange data between
the CP2E CPU Unit and other units.
Section 7 PLC Setup This section describes the PLC Setup, which are used to perform basic
settings for a CP2E CPU Unit.
Section 8 Overview and Allocation This section lists the built-in functions and describes the overall applica-
of Built-in Functions tion flow and the allocation of the functions.
Section 9 Quick-response Inputs This section describes the quick-response inputs that can be used to
read signals that are shorter than the cycle time.

Section Contents
Section 10 Interrupts This section describes the interrupts that can be used with CP2E PLCs,
including input interrupts and scheduled interrupts.
Section 11 High-speed Counters This section describes the high-speed counter inputs, high-speed
counter interrupts, and the frequency measurement function.
Section 12 Pulse Outputs This section describes positioning functions such as trapezoidal control,
jogging, and origin searches.
Section 13 PWM Outputs This section describes the variable-duty-factor pulse (PWM) outputs.
Section 14 Serial Communications This section describes communications with Programmable Terminals
(PTs) without using communications programming, no-protocol commu-
nications with general components, and connections with a Modbus-
RTU Easy Master, Serial PLC Link, host computer and Modbus-RTU
Slave.
Section 15 Built-in Ethernet This section gives an outline of the built-in Ethernet function, explains its
specification and how to make the settings required for operation.
Section 16 Other Functions This section describes PID temperature control, clock functions, DM
backup functions, security functions.
Section 17 Analog Option Board This section describes an overview of the Analog Option Board,
describes its installation and setting methods, memory allocations, star-
tup operation, refresh time, troubleshooting and how to use the Analog
Option Board.
Section 18 Operating the Program- This section describes basic functions of the CX-Programmer, such as
ming Device using the CX-Programmer to write ladder programs to control the CP2E
CPU Unit, to transfer the programs to the CP2E CPU Unit, and to debug
the programs.
Appendices The appendices provide lists of programming instructions, the Auxiliary
Area, cycle time response performance, PLC performance at power
interruption, memory map and Ethernet functions.
CP1E/CP2E CPU Unit Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No. W483)

Section Contents
Section 1 Summary of Instructions This section provides a summary of instructions used with a
CP1E/CP2E CPU Unit.
Section 2 Instruction This section describes the functions, operands and sample programs of
the instructions that are supported by a CP1E/CP2E CPU Unit.
Section 3 Instruction Execution This section provides the execution times for all instructions used with a
Times and Number of Steps CP1E/CP2E CPU Unit.
Section 4 Monitoring and Comput- This section describes how to monitor and calculate the cycle time of a
ing the Cycle Time CP1E/CP2E CPU Unit that can be used in the programs.
Appendices The appendices provide a list of instructions by Mnemonic and ASCII
code table for the CP1E/CP2E CPU Unit.

Manual Structure
Page Structure and Icons
The following page structure and icons are used in this manual.
5 Installation and wiring

Level 1 heading
Level 2 heading
Level 2 heading 5-2 Installation Level 3 heading
Gives the current
Level 3 heading 5-2-1 Installation Location
headings.
DIN Track Installation
Step in a procedure 1
5-2 Installation
Use a screwdriver to pull down the DIN Track mounting pins from the back of the Units to release
them, and mount the Units to the DIN Track.
Indicates a step in a
procedure.
DIN Track mounting pins
5 Page tab
Release Gives the number
5-2-1 Installation Location

2 Fit the back of the Units onto the DIN Track by catching the top of the Units on the Track and then of the section.
pressing in at the bottom of the Units, as shown below.
DIN Track
3 Press in all of the DIN Track mounting pins to securely lock the Units in place.
Special Information
(See below.)
Icons are used to indicate
precautions and
additional information. DIN Track mounting pins
Precautions for Correct Use

Tighten terminal block screws and cable screws to the following torques.
M4: 1.2 N·m
M3: 0.5 N·m
Manual name CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613) 5-3
This illustration is provided only as a sample and may not literally appear in this manual.
Special Information
Special information in this manual is classified as follows:
Precautions for Safe Use
Precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure using the product safely.

Precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure proper operation and performance.
Additional Information
Additional information to increase understanding or make operation easier.

Terminology and Notation
Term Description
E-type CPU Unit An essential model of CPU Unit that supports connections to Programmable Terminals
and basic control applications using instructions such as basic, movement, arithmetic,
and comparison instructions.
Essential models of CPU Units are called “E-type CPU Units” or “E14/20 CPU Units”
in this manual.
The models of E-type CPU Units are shown below.
CP2E-ED-
S-type CPU Unit A standard model of CPU Unit that supports connections to inverters and servo drives.
Standard models of CPU Units are called “S-type CPU Units” or “S30/40/60 CPU
Units” in this manual.
The models of S-type CPU Units are shown below.
CP2E-SD-
N-type CPU Unit A network model of CPU Unit that supports Ethernet connection and enhanced position-
ing functions such as 4-axis linear interpolation and pulse.
Network models of CPU Units are called “N-type CPU Units” or “N30/40/60 CPU
Units” in this manual.
The models of N-type CPU Units are shown below.
CP2E-ND-
CX-One A programming device that applies for programming and debugging PLCs.
CX-Programmer CP2E CPU Units are supported by CX-One version 4.51 or higher and CX-Programmer
version 9.72 or higher.

Sections in this Manual
2
1 Overview and Specifications
2 Basic System Configuration and Devices

4
3 Part Names and Functions

5
4 Programming Device 6
7
5 Installation and Wiring
8
6 Troubleshooting
A
7 Maintenance and Inspection
8 Using Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units
A Appendices

CONTENTS
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 1
CP2E CPU Unit Manuals ........................................................................................... 2
Manual Structure ....................................................................................................... 5
Terms and Conditions Agreement......................................................................... 11
Safety Precautions .................................................................................................. 13
Precautions for Safe Use........................................................................................ 17
Operating Environment Precautions ..................................................................... 21
Regulations and Standards.................................................................................... 22
Software Licenses and Copyrights ....................................................................... 23
Related Manuals ...................................................................................................... 24
Section 1 Overview and Specifications

1-1 CP2E Overview ........................................................................................................................ 1-2
1-1-1 Overview of Features .................................................................................................................. 1-2
1-1-2 Features ...................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-2 Basic Operating Procedure .................................................................................................. 1-10
1-3 Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 1-11
1-3-1 General Specifications .............................................................................................................. 1-11
1-3-2 Characteristics .......................................................................................................................... 1-12
1-3-3 Functional Specifications .......................................................................................................... 1-15
Section 2 Basic System Configuration and Devices

2-1 Basic System Configuration................................................................................................... 2-2
2-1-1 Basic System Configuration Using an E/S-type CPU Unit.................................................... 2-2
2-1-2 Basic System Configuration Using an N-type CPU Unit....................................................... 2-3
2-2 CPU Units ................................................................................................................................. 2-4
2-2-1 CPU Unit Models ........................................................................................................................ 2-4
2-2-2 Optional Products........................................................................................................................ 2-8
2-2-3 Unit Versions of CPU Units ....................................................................................................... 2-10
2-3 Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit ................................................................................. 2-11
2-3-1 Expandable CPU Units ............................................................................................................. 2-11
2-3-2 Connection Methods ................................................................................................................. 2-11
2-3-3 Maximum Number of I/O Points for an Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit ......................... 2-11
2-3-4 Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units ................................................................................ 2-12
2-3-5 Restrictions on System Configuration ....................................................................................... 2-14
2-4 Unit Current Consumption and External Power Supply Capacity .................................... 2-16
2-4-1 External Power Supply Capacity When Expansion I/O Units or
Expansion Units are Connected................................................................................................ 2-16
2-4-2 Current Consumption ................................................................................................................ 2-17

Section 3 Part Names and Functions
3-1 CPU Units ................................................................................................................................. 3-2
3-1-1 E14/20 or N14/20 CPU Units .................................................................................................... 3-2
3-1-2 E30/40/60, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Units.......................................................................... 3-6
3-1-3 Common I/O Specifications....................................................................................................... 3-12
3-1-4 Serial Communication Port ....................................................................................................... 3-17
3-1-5 Analog Option Board for N-type CPU Units........................................................................ 3-24
3-2 Expansion I/O Units............................................................................................................... 3-28
3-2-1 Expansion Input Unit ................................................................................................................. 3-28
3-2-2 Expansion Output Units ............................................................................................................ 3-29
3-2-3 Expansion I/O Units .................................................................................................................. 3-31
3-2-4 I/O Specifications ...................................................................................................................... 3-33
Section 4 Programming Device

4-1 Applicable Programming Devices for CP2E.......................................................................... 4-2
4-2 Connecting by USB ................................................................................................................. 4-4
4-3 Connection Method with an Ethernet Port ............................................................................ 4-6
4-4 Connection Method with a Serial Port ................................................................................. 4-15
Section 5 Installation and Wiring

5-1 Fail-safe Circuits ...................................................................................................................... 5-2
5-2 Installation................................................................................................................................ 5-3
5-2-1 Installation Location .................................................................................................................... 5-3
5-2-2 Unit Arrangement ........................................................................................................................ 5-6
5-2-3 Installation ................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5-2-4 Connecting Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units ............................................................. 5-12
5-3 Wiring ..................................................................................................................................... 5-14
5-3-1 Wiring Procedure ...................................................................................................................... 5-14
5-3-2 Wiring Power Supply and Ground Lines ................................................................................... 5-14
5-3-3 I/O Wiring .................................................................................................................................. 5-17
5-3-4 Wiring Safety and Noise Controls ............................................................................................. 5-21
5-3-5 Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods ................................................................................... 5-22
Section 6 Troubleshooting
6-1 Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors .......................................................................................... 6-2
6-1-1 Errors and Remedies .................................................................................................................. 6-2
6-1-2 Checking Errors .......................................................................................................................... 6-2
6-1-3 Checking Detailed Status............................................................................................................ 6-3
6-1-4 Reading Error Log Information.................................................................................................... 6-3
6-1-5 Types of Errors ............................................................................................................................ 6-5
6-1-6 Error Processing Flowchart......................................................................................................... 6-7
6-1-7 No Operation When Power is Supplied ....................................................................................... 6-7
6-1-8 Fatal Errors ................................................................................................................................. 6-8
6-1-9 CPU Errors................................................................................................................................ 6-14
6-1-10 Non-fatal Errors......................................................................................................................... 6-15
6-1-11 Other Errors .............................................................................................................................. 6-19
6-2 Troubleshooting Unit Errors ................................................................................................. 6-21
6-2-1 Inputs ........................................................................................................................................ 6-21
6-2-2 Outputs...................................................................................................................................... 6-22
6-2-3 CX-Programmer Connection..................................................................................................... 6-23

Section 7 Maintenance and Inspection
7-1 Periodic Maintenance and Inspection ................................................................................... 7-2
7-1-1 Tools Required for Inspections.................................................................................................... 7-2
7-1-2 Periodic Inspection...................................................................................................................... 7-2
7-1-3 Inspection and Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 7-3
7-1-4 Unit Replacement Precautions.................................................................................................... 7-4
7-2 Replacing the Battery in N/S-type CPU Units ................................................................. 7-5
Section 8 Using Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units

8-1 Analog Input Units................................................................................................................... 8-2
8-1-1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8-1-2 Part Names and Functions.......................................................................................................... 8-2
8-1-3 Specifications .............................................................................................................................. 8-3
8-1-4 Flow of Operation........................................................................................................................ 8-7
8-2 Analog Output Units.............................................................................................................. 8-15
8-2-1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 8-15
8-2-2 Part Names and Functions........................................................................................................ 8-15
8-2-3 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 8-16
8-2-4 Flow of Operation...................................................................................................................... 8-20
8-3 Analog I/O Units..................................................................................................................... 8-27
8-3-1 CP1W-MAD11 Analog I/O Units ............................................................................................... 8-27
8-3-2 CP1W-MAD42/CP1W-MAD44 Analog I/O Units ....................................................................... 8-40
8-4 Temperature Sensor Units .................................................................................................... 8-56
8-4-1 CP1W-TS1/TS2 Temperature Sensor Units ....................................................................... 8-56
8-4-2 CP1W-TS003 Temperature Sensor Units ................................................................................. 8-71
8-4-3 TS004 Temperature Sensor Units............................................................................................. 8-81
Section A Appendices
A-1 Dimensions .............................................................................................................................A-2
A-1-1 CPU Units ...................................................................................................................................A-2
A-1-2 Option Boards .............................................................................................................................A-5
A-1-3 Expansion I/O Units ....................................................................................................................A-8
A-1-4 Expansion Units ........................................................................................................................A-10
A-2 Wiring Diagrams ....................................................................................................................A-12
A-2-1 CPU Units .................................................................................................................................A-12
A-2-2 Expansion I/O Units ..................................................................................................................A-18
A-2-3 Expansion Units ........................................................................................................................A-25
A-2-4 Serial Communications .............................................................................................................A-36
A-3 Wiring for Serial Communications .......................................................................................A-41
A-3-1 Recommended RS-232C Wiring...............................................................................................A-41
A-3-2 Recommended RS-422A/485 Wiring ........................................................................................A-46
A-3-3 Reducing Electrical Noise for External Wiring ..........................................................................A-49
A-4 Network Installation...............................................................................................................A-50
A-5 Comparison between CP1E and CP2E ................................................................................A-53
Index .................................................................................................................................. Index-1
Revision History ................................................................................Revision-1

Terms and Conditions Agreement
Warranty, Limitations of Liability
Warranties
z Exclusive Warranty
Omron’s exclusive warranty is that the Products will be free from defects in materials and workman-
ship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron (or such other period expressed in
writing by Omron). Omron disclaims all other warranties, express or implied.
z Limitations
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF
THE PRODUCTS. BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE
PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE.
Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based
on infringement by the Products or otherwise of any intellectual property right.
z Buyer Remedy
Omron’s sole obligation hereunder shall be, at Omron’s election, to (i) replace (in the form originally
shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the non-com-
plying Product, (ii) repair the non-complying Product, or (iii) repay or credit Buyer an amount equal
to the purchase price of the non-complying Product; provided that in no event shall Omron be
responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding the Products
unless Omron’s analysis confirms that the Products were properly handled, stored, installed and
maintained and not subject to contamination, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of
any Products by Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment. Omron Companies
shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Products in combi-
nation with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, system assemblies or any other materi-
als or substances or environments. Any advice, recommendations or information given orally or in
writing, are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty.
See http://www.omron.com/global/ or contact your Omron representative for published information.
Limitation on Liability; Etc

OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CON-
SEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY
WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT,
WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY.
Further, in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on
which liability is asserted.

Application Considerations
Suitability of Use
Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes or regulations
which apply to the combination of the Product in the Buyer’s application or use of the Product. At
Buyer’s request, Omron will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings
and limitations of use which apply to the Product. This information by itself is not sufficient for a com-
plete determination of the suitability of the Product in combination with the end product, machine, sys-
tem, or other application or use. Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of
the particular Product with respect to Buyer’s application, product or system. Buyer shall take applica-
tion responsibility in all cases.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY OR IN LARGE QUANTITIES WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE
HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCT(S) IS
PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIP-
MENT OR SYSTEM.
Programmable Products
Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the user’s programming of a programmable Product, or
any consequence thereof.
Disclaimers
Performance Data
Data presented in Omron Company websites, catalogs and other materials is provided as a guide for
the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of
Omron’s test conditions, and the user must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual perfor-
mance is subject to the Omron’s Warranty and Limitations of Liability.
Change in Specifications
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons. It is our practice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or
when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the Product may be
changed without any notice. When in doubt, special part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish
key specifications for your application. Please consult with your Omron’s representative at any time to
confirm actual specifications of purchased Product.
Errors and Omissions

Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is believed to be accurate; how-
ever, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors or omissions.

Safety Precautions
Definition of Precautionary Information
The following notation is used in this manual to provide precautions required to ensure safe usage of a
CP-series PLC. The safety precautions that are provided are extremely important to safety. Always read
and heed the information provided in all safety precautions.
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which,

WARNING if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,

Caution if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
injury, or property damage.

Indicates precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure using the product safely.

Indicates precautions on what to do and what not to do to ensure proper operation
and performance.
Symbols
The triangle symbol indicates precautions (including
warnings). The specific operation is shown in the triangle
and explained in text. This example indicates a precau-
tion for electric shock.
The circle and slash symbol indicates operations that you

must not do. The specific operation is shown in the circle
and explained in text.
The filled circle symbol indicates operations that you

must do. The specific operation is shown in the circle and
explained in text. This example shows a general precau-
tion for something that you must do.

and explained in text. This example indicates a general
precaution.

and explained in text. This example indicates a precau-
tion for hot surfaces.

WARNING
Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied.
Doing so may result in electric shock.
Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied.
Doing so may result in electric shock.
Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable Con-
troller), including the following items, to ensure safety in the system if an
abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PLC or another external factor
affecting the PLC operation.
Not doing so may result in serious accidents.
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety mea-
sures must be provided in external control circuits.
• The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects any error
or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed. Unexpected opera-
tion, however, may still occur for errors in the I/O control section, errors in I/O mem-
ory, and errors that cannot be detected by the self-diagnosis function. As a
countermeasure for all these errors, external safety measures must be provided to
ensure safety in the system.
• The PLC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of the output
relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a countermeasure for such prob-
lems, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
• When the 24-VDC output (service power supply to the PLC) is overloaded or short-
circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs being turned OFF. As a
countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided to
ensure safety in the system.
Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event
of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines,
momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
Serious accidents may result from abnormal operation if proper measures are not
provided.
Do not apply the voltage/current outside the specified range to this unit.
It may cause a malfunction or fire.

Caution
Be sure to sufficiently confirm the safety at the destination when you transfer
the program or I/O memory or perform procedures to change the I/O memory.
Devices connected to PLC outputs may incorrectly operate regardless of the operat-
ing mode of the CPU Unit.
Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused
by extending the cycle time.
Otherwise, the input signals may not be readable.
Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC power supply section to the
torque specified in the user’s manual.
The loose screws may result in burning or malfunction.
Do not touch the power supply section and I/O terminal blocks when power is
being supplied or immediately after the power supply is turned OFF.
The power supply section and I/O terminal blocks will be hot and you may be burned.
Pay careful attention to the polarities (+/-) when wiring the DC power supply.
A wrong connection may cause malfunction of the system.
When connecting the PLC to a computer or other peripheral device, either

ground the 0-V side of the external power supply or do not ground the external
power supply at all.
Otherwise the external power supply may be shorted depending on the connection
methods of the peripheral device. DO NOT ground the 24 V-side of the external
power supply, as shown in the following diagram.
Non-insulated DC
24V power supply
USB cable or other
communications
cable
0V 0V 0V
FG
FG CPU Unit FG Peripheral device FG

(e.g., personal computer)

Caution
Sufficiently check safety if I/O bit status or present values are monitored in the
Ladder Section Pane or present values are monitored in the Watch Pane.
If bits are set, reset, force-set, or force-reset by inadvertently pressing a shortcut key,
devices connected to PLC outputs may operate incorrectly regardless of the operat-
ing mode.
Program so that the memory area of the start address is not exceeded when
using a word address or symbol for the offset.
For example, write the program so that processing is executed only when the indirect
specification does not cause the final address to exceed the memory area by using
an input comparison instruction or other instruction.
If an indirect specification causes the address to exceed the area of the start address,
the system will access data in other area, and unexpected operation may occur.
Set the temperature range according to the type of temperature sensor con-
nected to the Unit.
Temperature data will not be converted correctly if the temperature range does not
match the sensor.
Do not set the temperature range to any values other than those for which tem-
perature ranges are given in the following table.
An incorrect setting may cause operating errors.

Observe the following precautions when using a CP-series PLC.
z Power Supply
• Always use the power supply voltages specified in the user’s manuals. An incorrect voltage may
result in malfunction or burning.
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the rated voltage and fre-
quency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places where the power supply is unstable. An incor-
rect power supply may result in malfunction.
• Double-check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power supply. Incorrect wiring
may result in burning.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before attempting any of the following. Not turning
OFF the power supply may result in malfunction or electric shock.
• Mounting or dismounting Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units
• Mounting or dismounting Option Boards
• Setting DIP switches or rotary switches
• Connecting cables or wiring the system
• Connecting or disconnecting the connectors
z Installation
• Before touching a Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in order to discharge any
static build-up. Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage.
• Install the Unit properly as specified in the operation manual. Improper installation of the Unit may
result in malfunction.
• Be sure that the terminal blocks, connectors, Option Boards, and other items with locking devices
are properly mounted and locked into place. Improper locking may result in malfunction.
z Wiring
• Wire correctly according to specified procedures in this manual.
• Keep the wire cuttings out of the Unit when wiring.
• Always use the following size wire when connecting I/O terminals: AWG22 to AWG18 (0.32 to
0.82 mm2).
• When unpacking the Unit, check carefully for any external scratches or other damages. Also,
shake the Unit gently and check for any abnormal sound.
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring.
Insufficient safety measures against short-circuiting may result in burning.
• Always connect to a ground of 100 Ω or less when installing the Units. Not connecting to a ground
of 100 Ω or less may result in electric shock.
• Keep foreign substances, such as wiring chips, from entering into the Units. It may cause a fire,
failure or malfunction. Take protective measures especially at the time of construction.
• Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals. Connec-
tion of bare stranded wires may result in burning.
• Do not apply voltages to the input terminals in excess of the rated input voltage. Excess voltages
may result in burning.
• Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the output terminals in excess of the maximum switch-
ing capacity. Excess voltage or loads may result in burning.
• Disconnect the functional ground terminal when performing withstand voltage tests. Not discon-
necting the functional ground terminal may result in burning.

• Be sure that all the PLC terminal screws and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque
specified in the relevant manuals. The tightening torque for the terminals on the CP1W-
CIF11/CIF12-V1 terminal block is 0.23 N·m Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction.
• The NV3W-M20L Programmable Terminal can be connected to pin 6 (+5V) on the built-in RS-
232C port on the CPU Unit or the RS-232C Option Board (CP1W-CIF01) mounted to the CPU
Unit. Do not connect pin 6 to any other device.
• Use the cables that are specified in the manual for each device. External devices or the CPU Unit
may be damaged if a commercially available RS-232C computer cable is used.
• Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit. Doing either of these may
break the cables.
• Do not place objects on top of the cables or other wiring lines. Doing so may break the cables.
z Handling
• Set the Unit properly as specified in the operation manual. Improper setting of the Unit may result
in malfunction.
• Check that the DIP switches and data memory (DM) are properly set before starting operation.
• To initialize the DM Area, back up the initial contents for the DM Area to the Flash Memory using
one of the following methods.
• Set the number of words of the DM Area to be backed up starting with D0 in the Number of CH
of DM for backup Box in the Startup Data Read Area.
• Include programming to back up specified words in the DM Area to the built-in Flash Memory
by turning ON A751.15 (DM Backup Save Start Bit).
• Check the ladder program for proper execution before actually running it on the Unit. Not checking
the program may result in an unexpected operation.
• Transfer a routing table to the CPU Unit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be
caused by restarting CPU Bus Units, which is automatically done to make the new tables effec-
tive.
• The ladder program and parameter area data in the CP2E CPU Units are backed up in the built-in
Flash Memory. The BKUP indicator will light on the front of the CPU Unit when the backup opera-
tion is in progress. Do not turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit when the BKUP indicator is
lit. The data will not be backed up if power is turned OFF and a memory error will occur the next
time the power supply is turned ON.
• With a CP2E CPU Unit, data memory can be backed up to the built-in Flash Memory. The BKUP
indicator will light on the front of the CPU Unit when backup is in progress. Do not turn OFF the
power supply to the CPU Unit when the BKUP indicator is lit. If the power is turned OFF during a
backup, the data will not be backed up and will not be transferred to the DM Area in RAM the next
time the power supply is turned ON.
• Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PLC for a long time after the battery is attached. Other-
wise the battery life may be shortened.
• Install a battery (sold separately), if you are using clock data for the program. If the battery is not
installed, the clock data will be initialized when the power is turned off, and the program may
cause malfunction.
• When using a battery, set it to “Detect Low Battery” in PLC settings. If the setting is not changed,
a program that uses clock data may cause malfunction, when the battery is exhausted.
• Before replacing the battery, supply power to the CPU Unit for at least 30 minutes and then com-
plete battery replacement within 5 minutes. Clock data may be corrupted if this precaution is not
observed.
• The equipment may operate unexpectedly if inappropriate parameters are set. Even if the appro-
priate parameters are set, confirm that equipment will not be adversely affected before transfer-
ring the parameters or routing tables to the CPU Unit.
• After replacing the CPU Unit, make sure that the required data for the DM Area, Holding Area, and
other memory areas has been transferred to the new CPU Unit before restarting operation.
• Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do so may result in mal-
function, fire, or electric shock.

• Do not drop the Unit or subject the Unit to unusual vibration and shock. Do so may result in failure
or fire.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of the following. Not
doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PLC (including the setting of the startup operating mode).
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
• When replacing parts, be sure to confirm that the rating of a new part is correct. Not doing so may
result in malfunction or burning.
• Do not touch the Expansion I/O Unit Connecting Cable while the power is being supplied in order
to prevent malfunction due to static electricity.
• Do not turn OFF the power supply to the Unit while data is being transferred.
• When transporting or storing Units or Board, static electricity can destroy LSIs or ICs. Cover the
PCBs with a conductive material and maintain the specified storage temperature.
• Do not touch circuit boards or the components mounted to them with your bare hands. There are
sharp leads and other parts on the boards that may cause injury if handled improperly.
• Double-check the pin numbers when assembling and wiring the connectors.
• Never short-circuit the positive and negative terminals of a battery or charge, disassemble, heat,
or incinerate the battery. Do not subject the battery to strong shocks or deform the battery by
applying pressure. Doing any of these may result in leakage, rupture, heat generation, or ignition
of the battery. Dispose of any battery that has been dropped on the floor or otherwise subjected to
excessive shock. Batteries that have been subjected to shock may leak if they are used.
• Dispose of the product and batteries according to local ordinances as they apply.
• UL standards require that only an experienced engineer can replace the battery. Make sure that
an experienced engineer is in charge of battery replacement. Follow the procedure for battery
replacement given in this manual.
• The following precaution must be displayed on all products that contain a lithium primary battery
(containing at least 6 ppb of perchlorate) and that will be exported to or transported through the
State of California in the USA.
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
A CP2W-BAT02 lithium primary battery (containing at least 6 ppb of perchlorate) can be mounted
in a CP2E-N/SD- CPU Unit. Display the precaution given above on your product’s packag-
ing box or shipping box if the product contains a CP2W-BAT02 Battery and is exported to or
through the State of California in the USA.
• This product is EMC compliant when assembled in a complete PLC system. Refer to the applica-
ble manual for grounding, cable selection, and any other conditions for EMC compliance.
• This is a Class A product for use in industrial environments. In residential environments it may
cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures to
reduce interference.
z External Circuits
• Always configure the external circuits to turn ON power to the PLC before turning ON power to the
control system. If the PLC power supply is turned ON after the control power supply, temporary
errors may result in control system signals because the output terminals on DC Output Units and
other Units will momentarily turn ON when power is turned ON to the PLC.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event that outputs from
output terminals remain ON as a result of internal circuit failures, which can occur in relays, tran-
sistors, and other elements.

• If the I/O Hold Bit is turned ON, the outputs from the PLC will not be turned OFF and will maintain
their previous status when the PLC is switched from RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM
mode. Make sure that the external loads will not produce dangerous conditions when this occurs.
(When operation stops for a fatal error, including those produced with the FALS instruction, all out-
puts from PLC will be turned OFF and only the internal output status in the CPU Unit will be main-
tained.)

Operating Environment Precautions
z Perform installation following the instructions in this manual
Follow the instructions in this manual to correctly perform installation.
z Do not operate the control system in the following locations

• Locations subject to direct sunlight
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals
• Locations subject to shock or vibration
• Locations subject to direct rain fall
• Locations subject to direct strong UV
z Take countermeasures in the following locations

• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity
• Locations close to power supplies

Regulations and Standards
Conformance to EC Directives
Applicable Directives
• EMC Directives
• Low Voltage Directive
Concepts
z EMC Directives
OMRON devices are electrical components that are designed to be built into equipment and manu-
facturing systems. OMRON devices that comply with EMC Directives also conform to the related
EMC standards*, so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the overall machine.
Whether the products conform to the standards in the system used by the customer, however, must
be checked by the customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives will vary depend-
ing on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of the equipment or control panel on which the
OMRON devices are installed. The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that
devices and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.
* The applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standard is EN61131-2.
z Low Voltage Directive

Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 VAC and 75 to 1,500 VDC meet the
required safety standards for the PLC (EN 61131-2).
z Conformance to EC Directives
The CP2E PLCs comply with EC Directives. To ensure that the machine or device in which the
CP2E PLC is used complies with EC Directives, the PLC must be installed as follows:
• The CP-series PLC must be installed within a control panel.
• CP-series PLCs complying with EC Directives also conform to EN61131-2. Radiated emission
characteristics (10-m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the control panel
used, other devices connected to the control panel, wiring, and other conditions. You must there-
fore confirm that the overall machine or equipment complies with EC Directives.
• A SYSMAC CP-series PLC is a class A product (for an industrial environment). In residential
areas it may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures to reduce interference.
Trademarks
SYSMAC is a registered trademark for Programmable Controllers made by OMRON Corporation.
CX-One is a registered trademark for Programming Software made by OMRON Corporation.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Other system names and product names in this document are the trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective companies.

Software Licenses and Copyrights
This product incorporates certain third party software. The license and copyright information associated
with this software is shown at the following.
Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Swedish Institute of Computer Science.

All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and / or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIEDWAR-
RANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-
ITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTI-
TUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUP-
TION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAM-
AGE.

Related Manuals
The following manuals are related to the CP2E. Use them together with this manual.
Manual name Cat. No. Model numbers Application Contents
SYSMAC CP Series W613 CP2E-ED- To learn the hard- Describes the following information for CP2E
CP2E CPU Unit Hard- CP2E-SD- ware specifications PLCs.
ware User’s Manual of the CP2E PLCs • Overview and features
(this manual) CP2E-ND-
• Basic system configuration
• Part names and functions
• Installation and settings
• Troubleshooting
Use this manual together with the CP2E CPU Unit Software User’s
Manual (Cat. No. W614) and Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No.
W483).
SYSMAC CP Series W614 CP2E-ED- To learn the software Describes the following information for CP2E
CP2E CPU Unit Soft- CP2E-SD- specifications of the PLCs.
ware User’s Manual CP2E PLCs • CPU Unit operation
CP2E-ND-
• Internal memory
• Programming
• Settings
• CPU Unit built-in functions
• Interrupts
• High-speed counter inputs
• Pulse outputs
• Serial communications
• Ethernet
• Other functions
Use this manual together with the CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s
Manual (Cat. No. W613) and Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No.
W483).
SYSMAC CP Series W483 CP1E-ED- To learn program- Describes each programming instruction in
CP1E/CP2E CPU Unit CP1E-ND- ming instructions in detail.
Instructions Reference detail When programming, use this manual together
Manual CP1E-NAD-
with the CP2E CPU Unit Software User’s Man-
CP2E-ED- ual (Cat. No. W614).
CP2E-SD-
CP2E-ND-
CS/CJ/CP/NSJ Series W342 CS1G/H-CPUH To learn communica- Describes
Communications Com- CS1G/H-CPU-V1 tions commands for 1) C-mode commands and
mands Reference Man- CS/CJ/CP/NSJ- 2) FINS commands in detail.
ual CS1D-CPUH series Controllers in
CS1D-CPUS detail Read this manual for details on C-mode and
FINS commands addressed to CPU Units.
CS1W-SCU-V1
CS1W-SCB-V1 Note This manual describes commands addressed to CPU Units. It
CJ1G/H-CPUH does not cover commands addressed to other Units or ports (e.g.,
serial communications ports on CPU Units, communications ports
CJ1G-CPUP
on Serial Communications Units/Boards, and other Communica-
CJ1M-CPU tions Units).
CJ1G-CPU
CJ1W-SCU-V1
CX-One FA Integrated W463 CXONE-ALD-V4 To install the soft- Describes the overview of the CX-One FA Inte-
Tool Package Setup ware provided in the grated Tool Package, and how to install and
Manual CX-One uninstall the CX-One.
CX-Programmer W446 To learn the opera- Describes the operation procedures for the CX-
Operation Manual tion procedures for Programmer.
the CX-Program-
CX-Programmer W447 mer, the Program-
Operation Manual ming Device for
(Function Blocks/ Windows computers
Structured Text)
CX-Simulator Operation W366 To learn the opera- Describes the operation procedures for the CX-
Manual tion procedures for Simulator.
the CX-Simulator,
the Simulation
Device for Windows
computers
CX-Integrator Operation W464 To set up and moni- Describes the operation procedures for the CX-
Manual tor networks Integrator.

\
1 1
Overview and Specifications

This section gives an overview of the CP2E, describes its features, and provides its
specifications.
1-1 CP2E Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1-1-1 Overview of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-1-2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2 Basic Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-3-1 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-3-2 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-3-3 Functional Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613) 1-1

1-1 CP2E Overview
1-1-1 Overview of Features
The SYSMAC CP2E Programmable Controller is a package-type PLC made by OMRON that is designed
for easy application. The CP2E includes E-type CPU Units (essential models) that support connec-
tions to Programmable Terminals and basic control applications using basic, movement, arithmetic, and
comparison instructions, S-type CPU Units (standard models) that support connections to Inverters
and Servo Drives and N-type CPU Units (network models) that support Ethernet connection and
enhanced positioning functions such as 4-axis linear interpolation and pulse.
Essential Models Standard Models Network Models
E-type CPU Units S-type CPU Units N-type CPU Units
CPU Unit with CPU Unit with 30, CPU Unit with 30, CPU Unit with CPU Unit with 30,
14, 20 I/O Points 40 or 60 I/O Points 40 or 60 I/O Points 14, 20 I/O Points 40 or 60 I/O Points
Appearance
I/O points 14/20 30/40/60 30/40/60 14/20 30/40/60

Program capacity 4K steps 8K steps 10K steps
FB capacity 4K steps 8K steps 10K steps
DM Area capacity 4K words 8K words 16K words
Of these 1,500 words can be written Of these 7,000 Of these 15,000 words can be written
to the built-in Flash Memory. words can be to the built-in Flash Memory.
written to the
built-in Flash
Memory.
Mounting Expansion Not supported. 3 Units maximum 3 Units maximum Not supported. 3 Units maximum
I/O Units and Expan-
sion Units
Model with transis- Not supported. Available
tor outputs
Pulse outputs Not supported. 2 axes supported. 2 axes supported. 4 axes supported.
(Models with transis- (Linear (Linear
tor outputs only) interpolation interpolation
supported) supported)
Built-in serial com- RS-232C port provided. RS-232C/RS-485 Not provided. Not provided.
munications port port provided. Expand to up to Expand to up to
two ports by a three ports by
Option Board. Option Boards.
Option Board Not supported. 1 slot 2 slots
Built-in Ethernet port No provided. 1 port 2 ports
(Switch function)
Connection port for USB port Ethernet port
Programming Device
Clock Not supported. Supported
Using a Battery Not supported. Supported (CP2W-BAT02 sold separately)
Battery-free opera- Always battery-free operation.
tion Data in I/O Memory is retained even if no battery is attached.
1-2 CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613)

1-1 CP2E Overview

1-1-2 Features
z System Configuration
Network Model
CP2E CPU Unit (An N-type CPU Unit with 40 I/O Points is shown here.)
CX-Programmer
CX-One 1
Ethernet CP2W-BAT02 Battery (sold separately) Power supply and input terminals
port
1-1-2 Features
Expansion Units (Can be mounted to N30/40/60 CPU Units)
Commercially NC
COM
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
NC
COM
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
NC
COM
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
available IN CH
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
IN CH
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
IN CH
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
Ethernet cable 08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11
OUT OUT OUT

CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP CH EXP CH EXP
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 NC 00 01 02 04 05 07
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06
Ethernet port
Two Option Output terminal block

Board Slots
Option Board
One RS-232C port One RS-422A/485 port Analog Option BoardTwo RS-232C ports One RS-232C port and Two RS-485 ports
RS-232C Option RS-422A/485 Option CP1W-ADB21/DAB21V/ RS-232C&RS-232C Option one RS-485 port RS-485&RS-485 Option
Board CP1W-CIF01 Board CP1W-CIF11/ MAB221 Board CP2W-CIFD1 RS-232C&RS-485 Option Board CP2W-CIFD3
CIF12-V1 Board CP2W-CIFD2
Note 1. Maximum one Analog Option Board can be mounted on an N-type CPU Unit.
2. CP2W-CIFD1/2/3 can only be mounted on option slot 1.
3. The following Option Boards cannot be used.
· CP1W-DAM01 LCD Option Board
· CP1W-CIF41 Ethernet Option Board
Essential/Standard Model
CP2E CPU Unit (An S-type CPU Unit with 40 I/O Points is shown here.)
CX-Programmer
CX-One
CP2W-BAT02 Battery (sold separately) Power supply and input terminals

USB port (Can be mounted only to S-type CPU
Units.) Expansion Units (Can be mounted to E30/40/60 or S30/40/60 CPU Units)
Commercially NC
COM
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
NC
COM
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
NC
COM
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
available USB IN CH
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
IN CH
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
IN CH
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
cable 08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11
Peripheral USB port OUT

CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
OUT
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
OUT
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP CH EXP CH EXP
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 NC 00 01 02 04 05 07
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06
Built-in RS-232C port
Built-in RS-485 port Output terminal block

Programming, Setting, and Monitoring with the CX-Programmer

The CX-Programmer is used as the Programming Device for the CP2E.
Easy Connection with Computers Using Commercially Available

USB/Ethernet Cables
The CX-Programmer is connected using a commercially available USB/Ethernet cable between the
computer’s USB/Ethernet port and the built-in USB/Ethernet port of the CP2E.
With E30/40/60, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Units, Add I/O by

Connecting Expansion I/O Units
A total of up to three of the following Expansion I/O Units can be connected to an E30/40/60, S30/40/60
or N30/40/60 CPU Unit. (The total of three Units must also include Expansion Units.)
24-input/16-output Unit, 32-output Unit, 12-input/8-output Unit, 16-output Unit, 8-input Unit, or 8-out-
put Unit
With E30/40/60, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Units, Add Analog I/O or

Temperature Inputs by Connecting Expansion Units
With an E30/40/60, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Unit, a total of up to three of the following Expansion
Units can be connected. (The total of three Units must also include Expansion I/O Units.)
Analog I/O Unit, Analog Input Unit, Analog Output Unit, Temperature Sensor Units
Batteryless Data Backup

Data Memory Area (D), Holding Area (H), Counter Area (C) and Auxiliary Area (A) will be retained even
if power is turned OFF with no battery installed.

1-1 CP2E Overview

Quick-response Inputs
By setting a built-in input to quick-response input operation, inputs with signal widths as small as 50 µs
can be read with certainty regardless of the cycle time.
Up to eight quick-response inputs can be used.
Quick-response signal to
photomicrosensor or other device
1
1-1-2 Features
Built-in input I/O refresh
Cycle time
Input bit
Input bit
ON for one scan
in the next cycle
Cycle time
Can read ON signals
shorter than this time.
Note The user setting in the PLC Setup determines if each input is a quick-response input, normal input, interrupt
input, or high-speed counter input.
Input Interrupts
An interrupt task can be started when a built-in input turns ON or turns OFF .
Up to eight interrupt inputs can be used.
Interrupt input
Built-in input
Interrupt task
Ladder program
Interrupt occurs
END

Complete High-speed Counter Functionality

A high-speed counter input can be used by connecting a rotary encoder to a built-in input. A CP2E CPU
Unit is equipped with more than one high-speed counter input, making it possible to control devices for
multiple axes with a single PLC.
Built-in Inputs
(Functions can be assigned.)
High-speed Counter Inputs
E/S-type CPU Units:

Increment pulse inputs: 10kHz × 4 counters, 100kHz × 2 counters
Up/down pulse inputs: 10kHz × 1 counter, 100kHz × 1 counter
Pulse + direction inputs: 100kHz × 2 counters
Differential phase inputs : 5kHz × 1 counter, 50kHz × 1 counter
N14/20 CPU Units:

Up/down pulse inputs: 10kHz × 1 counter, 100kHz × 1 counter
Pulse + direction inputs: 100kHz × 2 counters
Differential phase inputs : 5kHz × 1 counter, 50kHz × 1 counter
N30/40/60 CPU Units:

Up/down pulse inputs: 100kHz × 2 counters
Encoder Pulse + direction inputs: 100kHz × 2 counters
Differential phase inputs : 50kHz × 2 counters
• High-speed counters can be used for high-speed processing, using either target value comparison or
range comparison with the counter’s PV to create interrupts.
An interrupt task can be started when the count reaches a specified value or falls within a specified
range.
• High-speed counter input frequency (speed) can be measured.
The input pulse frequency can be measured using the PRV instruction (counter 0 only).

1-1 CP2E Overview

Versatile Pulse Control for Transistor Output CPU Units
Fixed duty ratio pulse outputs can be output from the CPU Unit’s built-in outputs and used to perform
positioning or speed control with a servomotor or a stepping motor that accepts pulse inputs.
Up to four pulse outputs at 100 kHz are provided as standard features.
1-1-2 Features
Stepping Motor
Servomotor
16 Built-in Outputs
(Functions can be assigned.) (See note.)
Four pulse outputs

100 kHz
Note The instruction used to control each output determines whether it is used as a normal output, pulse output,
or PWM output.
z Positioning is possible with Trapezoidal Acceleration and Deceleration

Trapezoidal acceleration and deceleration can be used for positioning using the PULSE OUTPUT
(PLS2) instruction.
z Jogging can be Performed

Jogging can be performed by executing the SPED or ACC instruction.
z Origin Searches and Origin Returns can be Performed Using the ORIGIN
SEARCH Instruction
An accurate origin search combining all I/O signals can be executed with a single instruction. It is
also possible to move directly to an established origin using the ORIGIN SEARCH (ORG) instruc-
tion.
z Linear Interpolation Operation

Up to one linear interpolation can be used for an N14/20 CPU Unit, and up to two linear interpola-
tions can be used for an N30/40/60 CPU Unit. Linear interpolation operation can be performed by
executing the LINEAR INTERPOLATION (ITPL) instruction.
z Easy Interrupt Feeding

An interrupt input can be used as a trigger to switch from speed control to position control and out-
put the specified number of pulses, then decelerate to a stop using the INTERRUPT FEEDING
(IFEED) instruction.
PWM Outputs for Transistor Output CPU Units

Lighting and power control can be performed by outputting variable duty ratio pulse (PWM) output sig-
nals from the CPU Unit’s built-in outputs.

Built-in RS-232C Port for E/S-type CPU Units

The E/S-type CPU Units have one built-in RS-232C port as a standard feature.
Built-in RS-485 Port for S-type CPU Units

The S-type CPU Units have one built-in RS-485 port as a standard feature.
Mounting Serial Option Boards to N-type CPU Units

UP to two Serial Communications Option Boards can be added to an N-type CPU Unit. With the
serial communications port, it is easy to connect to general components, such as barcode readers, and
other components such as PTs, other CP-series PLCs, and Inverters.
Note Serial Option Boards cannot be mounted to the E/S-type CPU Unit.
NB-series PT, Barcode Reader, etc.
RS-232C
RS-422A/485 Option Board
RS-422A
RS-232C Option Board Modbus-RTU Easy Master Function
Example: Inverter
Serial PLC Links
CP2E, CP1E, CP1H

CP1L, CJ2M

1-1 CP2E Overview

Built-in Ethernet Port for Various Ethernet Application for N-type
CPU Units
With the built-in Ethernet port, it is possible to connect the CX-Programmer to PLCs and exchange data
between OMRON PLCs using Ethernet. It can also create an original communication procedure using
TCP/IP or UDP/IP for the host application or communicate with PLCs from another manufacturer.
(1) Connecting the CX-Programmer to the PLCs online via Ethernet 1

CX-Programmer
1-1-2 Features
FINS
Internet
IP router (3) Configuring an independent communications protocol
for the host application using TCP/IP (UDP/IP)
Intranet
Firewall
Server Room Office Floor
DNS server CX-Programmer Independent user

SNTP server application
FINS UDP/TCP socket

Ethernet Ethernet
Router
Router
(Factory line)
CX-Programmer
NB-series PT
Writing
commands FINS FINS
Ethernet
(1) Connecting the CX-Programmer to

PLCs online via Ethernet
FINS message
(4) Automatically adjusting the communications (5) Auto IP
PLC's internal clock
periodically
CP2E-NƶƶDƶ-ƶ FINS message CP2E-NƶƶDƶ-ƶ

communications
(2) Sending and receiving data via Ethernet

between OMRON PLCs

1-2 Basic Operating Procedure

In general, use the following procedure.
1. Setting Devices and Hardware

Connect the CPU Unit, Expansion I/O Units, and Expansion Units.
Set the DIP switches on the Option Board and Expansion Units as required.
Refer to Section 3 Part Names and Functions and Section 5 Installation and Wiring in the CP2E CPU Unit
Hardware User’s Manual (Cat. No. W613).
2. Wiring
Wire the power supply, I/O, and communications.
Refer to Section 5 Installation and Wiring in the CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual (Cat. No. W613).
3. Connecting Online to the PLC

Connect the personal computer online to the PLC.
Refer to Section 4 Programming Device in the CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual (Cat. No. W613).
4. I/O Allocations
Allocations for built-in I/O on the CPU Unit are predetermined and memory is allocated automatically
to Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units, so the user does not have to do anything.
Refer to Section 6 I/O Allocation in the CP2E CPU Unit Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W614).
5. Software Setup
Make the PLC settings using the CX-Programmer.
Refer to Section 7 PLC Setup in the CP2E CPU Unit Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W614).
6. Writing the Programs

Write the programs using the CX-Programmer.
Refer to Section 4 Programming Concepts in the CP2E CPU Unit Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W614).
7. Checking Operation
Check the I/O wiring and the Auxiliary Area settings, and perform trial operation.
The CX-Programmer can be used for monitoring and debugging.
Refer to Section 8 Overview and Allocation of Built-in Functions in the CP2E CPU Unit Software User’s
Manual (Cat. No. W614).
8. Basic Program Operation

Set the operating mode to RUN mode to start operation.

1-3 Specifications
1-3 Specifications
1-3-1 General Specifications
The following table lists the general specifications of CP2E CPU Units.
Item AC power supply DC power supply
Model CP2E-D-A CP2E-D-D
1
Enclosure Mounted in a panel
Dimensions (H × D × W) CPU Unit with 14 or 20 I/O points (CP2E-14/20D-): 90mm*1 ×80mm*2 × 86mm
1-3-1 General Specifications

CPU Unit with 30 I/O points (CP2E-30D-): 90mm*1 × 80mm*2 × 130mm
Weight CPU Unit with 14 I/O points (CP2E-14D-): 335g max.
CPU Unit with 20 I/O points (CP2E-20D-): 340g max.
Electri- Supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz 24 VDC
cal spec-
ifications Operating voltage range 85 to 264 VAC 20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Power consumption 15 VA/100 VAC max. (CP2E-14/20D-A) 13W max. (CP2E-14/20D-D)
25 VA/240 VAC max.
50 VA/100 VAC max.
70 VA/240 VAC max.
(CP2E-30/40/60D-A) 20W max. (CP2E-30/40/60D-D) *4
Inrush current 120 VAC, 20 A for 8 ms max. for cold start at room 24 VDC, 30A for 20 ms max. for cold start at room
temperature temperature
240 VAC, 40 A for 8 ms max. for cold start at room
temperature
External power supply *3 Not provided. (CP2E-14/20D-A) Not provided.
24 VDC, 300 mA (CP2E-30/40/60D-A)
Insulation resistance 20 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) between the external AC ter- No insulation between primary and secondary DC
minals and GR terminals power supplies
Dielectric strength 2,300 VAC 50/60Hz for 1 min between AC external and No insulation between primary and secondary DC
GR terminals power supplies
Leakage current: 5 mA max.
Power interrupt time 10 ms min. 2 ms min.
Applica- Ambient operating temper- -20 to 60°C
tion envi- ature
ronment Ambient humidity 10% to 90%
Atmosphere No corrosive gas.
Ambient storage temperature -20 to 75°C (excluding battery)
Altitude 2,000 m max.
Pollution degree 2 or less: Conforms to IEC61010-2-201.
Noise resistance 2 kV on power supply line (Conforms to IEC61000-4-4.)
Overvoltage category Category II: Conforms to IEC61010-2-201.
EMC immunity level Zone B
Vibration resistance Conforms to JIS 60068-2-6.
5 to 8.4 Hz with 3.5-mm amplitude, 8.4 to 150 Hz
Acceleration of 9.8 m/s2 for 100 min in X, Y, and Z directions (10 sweeps of 10 min each = 100 min total)
Shock resistance Conforms to JIS 60068-2-27.
147 m/s2, 3 times in X, Y, and Z directions
Terminal block Fixed (not removable)
Terminal screw size M3
Applicable standards Conforms to EC Directives.
Grounding method Ground to 100Ω or less.
*1 Total of 110 mm with mounting brackets.

*2 Excluding cables.
*3 Use the external power supply to power input devices. Do not use it to drive output devices.
*4 This is the rated value for the maximum system configuration. Use the following formula to calculate power consumption for CPU Units with DC power.
Formula: DC power consumption = (5V current consumption × 5 V/70% (internal power efficiency) + 24V current consumption) × 1.1(current fluctuation factor)
The above calculation results show that a DC power supply with a greater capacity is required.
*5 The Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units work under the same conditions as the CPU Units unless otherwise specified.

1-3-2 Characteristics
The following table gives the characteristics of CP2E CPU Units.
Item CP2E-ED- CP2E-SD- CP2E-ND-
Program capacity 4K steps 8K steps 10K steps
FB capacity 4K steps 8K steps 10K steps
Control method Stored program method
I/O control method Cyclic scan with immediate refreshing
Program language Ladder diagram
Function blocks Maximum number of function block definitions: 64
Maximum number of instances: 128
Languages usable in function block definitions: Ladder diagrams, structured text (ST)
Instructions Approximately 220
Processing Overhead processing time 0.1ms 0.15ms 0.2ms
speed Instruction execution times LD 0.23µs
MOV 1.76µs
Number of CP1W-series Expansion I/O CP2E-14/20D-: None
Units and Expansion Units connected CP2E-30/40/60D-: 3units
Maximum number of I/O points CP2E-14D-: 14
CP2E-20D-: 20
CP2E-30D-: 150 (30 built in, 40 × 3 expansion)
Built-in input High-speed High-speed Incremental Pulse Inputs N14/20D-
function counters counter 100 kHz: 2 counters Incremental Pulse Inputs
mode/maximum 10 kHz: 4 counters 100 kHz: 2 counters
frequency Up/Down Inputs 10 kHz: 4 counters
100 kHz: 1 counter Up/Down Inputs
10 kHz: 1 counter 100 kHz: 1 counter
Pulse + Direction Inputs 10 kHz: 1 counter
100 kHz: 2 counters Pulse + Direction Inputs
Differential Phase Inputs (4x) 100 kHz: 2 counters
50 kHz: 1 counter Differential Phase Inputs
5 kHz: 1 counter 50 kHz: 1 counter
5 kHz: 1 counter
N30/40/60D-
Incremental Pulse Inputs
100 kHz: 3 counters
10 kHz: 3 counters
Up/Down Inputs
100 kHz: 2 counters,
Pulse + Direction Inputs
100 kHz: 2 counters
Differential Phase Inputs
50 kHz: 2 counters
Counting mode • Linear mode
• Ring mode
Count value 32 bits
Counter reset • Phase Z and software reset(excluding increment pulse input)
modes • Software reset
Control method • Target matching
• Range comparison
Input interrupts 6 inputs 8 inputs
(6 inputs only for 14 I/O points)
Interrupt input pulse width: 50 µs min.
Quick-response inputs 6 inputs 8 inputs
(6 inputs only for 14 I/O points)
Input pulse width: 50 µs min.
Normal input Input constants Delays can be set in the PLC setup (0 to 32 ms, default: 8 ms).
Set values: 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 ms
Built-in output Pulse outputs Pulse output Pulse output function not Pulse+Direction Mode
function (Models with Frequency included 1 Hz to 100kHz : 2 outputs N14/20D-
transistor out- 1 Hz to 100kHz: 2 outputs
puts only) N30/40/60D-
1 Hz to 100kHz: 4 outputs
Output mode • Continuous mode (for speed control)
• Independent mode (for position control)
Number of out- • Relative coordinates: 0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
put pulses (0 to 2147483647)
• Absolute coordinates: 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
(-2147483647 to 2147483647)
Acceleration/ Trapezoidal acceleration and deceleration (Cannot perform S-
deceleration curve acceleration and deceleration).
curves
Changing SVs Only target position can be changed.
during instruc-
tion execution
Origin searches Included
Linear interpo- None N14/20D-
lation 2 axes max.
N30/40/60D-
4 axes max.


Built-in output PWM outputs Frequency PWM output function not 2.0 to 6,553.5 Hz (in increments of 0.1 Hz) with 1 output or 2 Hz
1-3 Specifications
function (Models with included to 32,000 Hz (in increments of 1 Hz) with 1 output
transistor out- Duty factor 0.0% to 100.0% (in increments of 0.1%)
puts only) Accuracy: +1%/-0% at 2 Hz to 10,000 Hz and +5%/-0% at 10,000
Hz to 32,000 kHz
Output mode Continuous Mode
Communica- Peripheral USB port Conforming to USB 2.0 B-type conntor None
tions Transmission 5m max.
distance
Built-in RS232C port Interface: Conforming to EIA RS-232C None
Transmission 15m max.
distance
Communica- Half duplex
1
tions method
Synchronization Start-stop
1-3-2 Characteristics
Baud rate 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6, or 115.2 kbps
Supported pro- • Host Link
tocol • 1:N NT Link
• No-protocol mode
• Serial PLC Links (master, slave)
• Modbus-RTU Easy Master
• Modbus-RTU Slave
Built-in RS485 port None Interface: Conforming to EIA None
(not isolated) RS-485
Transmission 50m max.
distance
Communica- Half duplex
tions method
Synchronization Start-stop
Baud rate 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4,
57.6, or 115.2 kbps
Supported pro- • Host Link
tocol • 1:N NT Link
• Serial PLC Links (master,
slave)
Serial Option Number of None N14/20D-
port Option Boards 1 Option Board
N30/40/60D-
2 Option Boards
Number of N14/20D-
serial communi- 2 ports max.
cations N30/40/60D-
3 ports max.
Communica- Depends on Option Board
tions method
Synchronization Depends on Option Board
Baud rate 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4,
57.6, or 115.2 kbps
Mountable Serial Communication Option
Option Boards Board with one port
• One RS-232C port:
CP1W-CIF01 (Start-stop)
• One RS-422A/485 port (not
isolated):
CP1W-CIF11 (Start-stop)
• One RS-422A/485 port (iso-
lated):
CP1W-CIF12-V1 (Start-stop)
Serial Communication Option
Board with two ports*1
• Two RS-232C ports:
CP2W-CIFD1 (Start-stop)
• One RS-232C port and one
RS-485 port (isolated):
• Two RS-485 ports (isolated):
Analog Option Board*2
CP1W-MAB221/ADB21/DAB21V
*1 CP2W-CIFD can only be
mounted on option slot 1.
*2 Maximum one Analog Option
Board can be mounted on an
N-type CPU Unit.
Compatible pro- • Host Link*
tocols • 1:N NT Link*
• Serial PLC Links (master,
slave)
* PORT1(EX) is not supported.


Communica- Ethernet Physical layer None 100/10BASE-TX (Auto-MDIX)
tions Media access CSMA/CD
methiod
Modulation Baseband
Baud rate 100BASE-TX: 100Mbit/s
10BASE-T: 10Mbit/s
• Half/full auto-negotiation for
each port
• Link speed auto-sensing for
each port
Transmission 100BASE-TX
media • Unshielded twisted-pair
(UDP) cable Categories: 5,
5e
• Shielded twisted-pair (STP)
cable Categories: 100Ω at 5,
5e
10BASE-T
• Unshielded twisted-pair
(UDP) cable Categories: 3, 4,
5, 5e
• Shielded twisted-pair (STP)
cable Categories: 100Ω at 3,
4, 5, 5e
Transmission 100 m (distance between
distance switch and node)
Protocol TCP, UDP, ARP, ICMP (ping
only), SNTP, DNS
Applications FINS, Socket, SNTP, DNS (Cli-
ent)
Switching hub Layer 2 switch
function * N14/20 is not supported.
Number of tasks 17
• 1 cyclic task
• 16 interrupt tasks
Scheduled interrupt task: Interrupt task 1 (fixed)
Built-in input interrupt task: Interrupt task 2 to 9 (IN8 and IN9 can only be used in N20/30/40/60
CPU Units)
High-speed counter interrupt task: Interrupt task 1 to 16
Maximum subroutine number 128
Maximum jump number 128
Scheduled interrupt tasks 1 interrupt task
Battery service life Battery cannot be mounted. CP2W-BAT02 can be mounted.
*With CP2W-BAT02 Battery (optional) Maximum battery service life: 5 years
Guaranteed Lifetime
Ambient temperature is 60°C: 13,000 hours (approx. 1.5 years)
Ambient temperature is 25°C: 43,000 hours (approx. 5 years)
Clock None Supported.
Accuracy (monthly deviation):
-4.5 min to -0.5 min (ambient temperature: 60°C),
-2.0 min to +2.0 min (ambient temperature: 25°C),
-2.5 min to +1.5 min (ambient temperature: -20°C)
Memory backup Built-in Flash Memory Ladder programs and parameters are automatically saved to built-in Flash Memory.
A section of the Data Memory Area can be saved to the built-in Flash Memory.
Built-in non-volatile memory Data Memory Area (D), Holding Area (H), Counter Area (C) and Auxiliary Area (A) are
automatically saved to the built-in non-volatile memory.
CIO Area Input Bits 1,600 bits (100 words): CIO 0.00 to CIO 99.15 (CIO 00 to CIO 99)
Output Bits 1,600 bits (100 words): CIO 100.00 to CIO 199.15 (CIO 100 to CIO 199)
Serial PLC Link Words 1,440 bits (90 words): CIO 200.00 to CIO 289.15 (CIO 200 to CIO 289)
Work Area (W) 2,048 bits (128 words): W0.00 to W127.15 (W0 to W127)
Holding Area (H) 2,048 bits (128 words): H0.00 to H127.15 (H0 to 127)
Words H512 to H1535: These words can be used only for function blocks.
Auxiliary Area (A) Read-only: 7,168 bits (448 words): A0.00 to A447.15 (A0 to A447)
Read/write: 8,192 bits (512 words): A448.00 to A959.15 (A448 to A959)
Temporary Area (TR) 16 bits: TR0 to TR15
Timer Area (T) 256 timer numbers (T0 to T255 (separate from counters))
Words T256 to T511: These words can be used only for function blocks.
Counter Area (C) 256 counter numbers (C0 to C255 (separate from timers))
Words C256 to C511: These words can be used only for function blocks.
Data Memory Area (D) 4 K words: D0 to D4095 8 K words: D0 to D8191 16 K words: D0 to D16383
DM backup: 1,500 words (D0 DM backup : 7,000 words (D0 DM backup : 15,000 words (D0
to D1499) to D6999) to D14999)
Index Registers (IR) 16 registers: IR0 to IR15
Data Registers (DR) 16 registers: DR0 to DR15
Operating modes PROGRAM Mode:Program execution is stopped.
Preparations can be executed prior to program execution in this mode.
MONITOR Mode: Programs are executed.
Some operations, such as online editing, and changes to present values in I/O
memory, are enabled in this mode.
RUN Mode: Programs are executed.
This is the normal operating mode.

1-3-3 Functional Specifications
1-3 Specifications
The following table gives the functional specifications of CP2E CPU Units.
Function Description
Cycle time Minimum cycle time Makes the cycle time consistent.
manage- Cycle time monitoring Monitors the cycle time.
ment
CPU Unit Inputs High- High-speed pulse High-speed pulses from devices such as a rotary encoder are counted. The
built-in speed inputs counted values are stored in the Auxiliary Area.Interrupt tasks can be executed 1
functions counters when target is reached or by range comparison.
inputs Input pulse fre- The frequency of pulses input by the PRV instruction is measured.
quency measurement
Interrupt inputs Relevant interrupt tasks are executed during the cycle when the CPU Unit
built-in inputs turn ON or turn OFF.
Quick-response inputs Inputs can be read without being affected by cycle time.
Use the quick-response inputs to read signals shorter than the cycle time.
Normal I/O Cyclic The CPU Unit’s built-in I/O are cyclically refreshed.
inputs refres refreshing
hing Immediate I/O refreshing by immediate refreshing instructions.
refreshing
Input response times Input constants can be set for built-in CPU inputs.
The response time can be increased to reduce the effects of chattering and
noise at input contacts. The response time can be decreased to enable detect-
ing shorter input pulses.
Outputs Pulse out- Pulse control A pulse signal is output and positioning or speed control is performed with a
puts (Mod- servo driver that accepts a pulse input.
els with Continuous mode for speed control or independent mode for position control
transistor can be used. There are functions for changing to positioning during speed con-
outputs trol and for changing the target value during positioning.
only ) Linear interpolation Up to 2 linear interpolations can be executed by the ITPL instrnction.
Origin positioning Origin searches and origin returns.
PWM outputs (Models with transis- Pulses for which the duty ratio (ratio between ON time and OFF time during
tor outputs only ) one pulse cycle) can be set are output.
Normal Load OFF function All of the outputs on the CPU Unit’s I/O are turned OFF when an error occurs
outputs in RUN or MONITOR mode.
Expansion Functions sup- I/O refresh- Cyclic refreshing The Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units are cyclically refreshed.
I/O Units ported by both ing Refreshing by IORF I/O refreshing by IORF instruction.
and Expansion I/O Unit
Expansion and Expansion Unit Load OFF function All of the outputs on Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units are turned OFF
Units (0000 hex) when an error occurs in RUN or MONITOR mode.
Expansion I/O Units Input response times The response time can be increased to reduce the effects of chattering and
noise at input contacts.
The response time can be decreased to enable detecting shorter input pulses.
Expansion Units Unit error detection Errors in Expansion Units are detected.
The CPU Unit is notified that the Expansion Unit stopped due to an error.
Memory Holding I/O memory when changing operating modes The status of I/O memory can be held when the operating mode is changed.
manage- The forced-set/reset status can be held when the operating mode is changed .
ment func- Automatic backup to the backup memory Automatic backup of ladder programs and parameter area to the backup mem-
tions (built-in Flash Memory) ory (built-in Flash Memory).
Batteryless I/O Memory backup Data Memory Area (D), Holding Area (H), Counter Area (C) and Auxiliary Area
(A) be retained when the power is interrupted.
Communi- Peripheral USB port Peripheral bus (toolbus) For communications with programming device (CX-Programmer).
cations Ethernet port For communications with programming device (CX-Programmer).
Data can be transferred with devices such as PTs, computers or PLCs via
Ethernet port.
Serial port Host Link (SYSWAY) communica- Host Link commands can be sent from a PT or a computer to read/write I/O
tions memory, and perform other operations for PLC.
No-protocol communications I/O instructions for communications ports (TXD/RXD instructions) can be used
for data transfer with peripheral devices such as bar code readers.
NT Link communications I/O memory in the PLC can be allocated and directly linked to various PT func-
tions, including status control areas, status notification areas, touch switches,
lamps, memory tables, and other objects.
Serial PLC Links Up to 10 words of data per Unit can be shared between up to nine CPU Units
(one polling unit and eight polled units).
* A PT cannot be connected.
Modbus-RTU Easy Master function Modbus-RTU commands are sent by the Modbus-RTU Master function. Mod-
bus slaves, such as inverters, can be easily controlled with serial communica-
tions.
Modbus-RTU Slave function Communications with Modbus-RTU Master.
Data can be transferred by commands from Modbus-RTU Master.
Interrupt Scheduled interrupts Tasks can be executed at a specified interval (1.0 ms min., Unit: 0.1 ms).
Input interrupts Interrupt tasks are processed when the built-in input turns ON or OFF.
High-speed counter interrupts This function counts input pulses with the CPU Unit’s built-in high-speed
counter and executes an interrupt task when the count reaches the preset
value or falls within a preset range (target value or zone comparison).

Function Description
Power sup- Memory protection Holding Area data, DM Area data, Counter Completion Flags, Counter Present
ply man- Values and Auxiliary Area data are held even when power is turned OFF.
agement Data is retained without battery even if the power supply is interrupted.
Number of power interruptions counter The number of times power has been interrupted is counted.
Debugging Online editing The program can be changed during operation in MONITOR mode or PRO-
GRAM mode.
Force-set/reset Specified bits can be set or reset.
Differentiate monitoring ON/OFF changes in specified bits can be monitored.
Storing the stop position at errors The location and task number where execution stopped for a program error is
recorded.
Program check The programs can be checked for items such as no END instruction and
FALS/FAL errors at startup.
Self-diag- Error Log Details and the time of occurance of error codes predefined by the CPU Unit
nosis and are stored.
restoration CPU error detection CPU Unit WDT errors are detected.
User-defined failure diagnosis Errors can be generated for user-specified conditions:Non-fatal errors (FAL)
and fatal errors (FALS).
Load OFF function The built-in outputs, Expansion I/O Unit outputs, and Expansion Unit outputs
are turned OFF.
Non-fatal error System FAL error detection This function generates a non-fatal (FAL) error when the user-defined condi-
detection (User-defined non-fatal error) tions are met in program.
Backup memory error detection This function detects when data in the backup memory that stores the ladder
program is corrupted.
PLC Setup error detection This function detects setting errors in the PLC Setup.
Option Board errors This function detects when the Option Board is malfunctioning or discon-
nected.
Battery error detection This function detects when the battery voltage is low or the battery is discon-
(N/S-type CPU Units only) nected.
* This function is valid only when a battery is mounted and the Do not detect
battery error Check Box is cleared in the PLC Setup.
Built-in Ethernet error This function detects errors in Ethernet connection and setup.
(N-type CPU Units only)
Ethernet setting table error This function detects logic errors that occur in routing tables or Ethernet
(N-type CPU Units only) address tables.
Fatal Error Detec- Memory error detection This function detects errors that occur in memory of the CPU Unit.
tion I/O bus error detection This function detects errors that occur during data transfer between the CPU
Unit and another Unit.
Detection of too many I/O points This function detects when more than the maximum number of CP1W Expan-
sion I/O Units and Expansion Units are connected to the PLC.
Built-in Ethernet stop error This function detects that Ethernet stops working because of sum value of
(N-type CPU Units only) MAC address error or controller error.
Program error detection This function detects when there is an error in the program.
See the following for details.
Instruction processing error This function detects an error when the given data value is invalid when exe-
detection cuting an instruction, or execution of instruction between tasks was attempted.
Indirect DM addressing BCD This function detects an error when an indirect DM/EM address in BCD mode
error is not BCD.
Illegal area access error detec- This function detects an error when an attempt is made to access an illegal
tion area with an instruction operand.
No END error detection This function detects an error when there is no END instruction at the end of
the program.
Task error detection The execution condition for an interrupt task was met but there is no interrupt
task with the specified number.
Differentiation overflow error This function detects an error when too many differentiated instructions are
detection entered or deleted during online editing (131,072 times or more).
Invalid instruction error detec- This function detects an error when an attempt is made to execute an instruc-
tion tion that is not defined in the system.
User program area overflow This function detects an error when instruction data is stored after the last
error detection address in user program area.
Cycle time exceeded error detec- This function monitors the cycle time (10 to 1,000 ms) and stops the operation
tion when the set value is exceeded.
System FALS error detection This function generates a fatal (FALS) error when the user-defined conditions
(user-defined fatal error) are met in program.
Mainte- Automatic online connection via network This function enables automatically connecting to the PLC online when the
nance CX-Programmer is directly connected by a communication port (peripheral
USB port or Ethernet port).
Security Read protection using password This function protects reading and displaying programs using passwords.
functions Read protection: Set a password using the CX-Programmer.
* Overwrite protection function not included.

Ü
2
Basic System Configuration and 2
Devices
This section describes the basic system configuration and device models of the CP2E.
2-1 Basic System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2-1-1 Basic System Configuration Using an E(S)-type CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-1-2 Basic System Configuration Using an N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-2-1 CPU Unit Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-2-2 Optional Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-2-3 Unit Versions of CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-3 Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-3-1 Expandable CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-3-2 Connection Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-3-3 Maximum Number of I/O Points for an Expansion I/O Unit or
Expansion Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-3-4 Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-3-5 Restrictions on System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-4 Unit Current Consumption and External Power Supply Capacity . . . . . . 2-16
Expansion Units are Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2-4-2 Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

2-1 Basic System Configuration

This section describes the system configurations using CP2E CPU Units.
2-1-1 Basic System Configuration Using an E/S-type CPU Unit

The system configuration when using a CP2E E/S-type CPU Unit is shown below.
Battery
CP2W-BAT02
(S-type only)
CP2E CPU Unit Expansion I/O Units Expansion Units DIN Track
CP2E-E30DR-A
20 or 40 I/O Points Analog I/O
RS-232C port CP2E-E40DR-A
Support Software Personal computer CP2E-E60DR-A
CX-One RS-485 port CP2E-S30D- 8 inputs Analog inputs
CP2E-S40D-
CP2E-S60D-
8 outputs Analog outputs
Serial port
16 outputs Temperature sensors
Programmable
Terminal (PT)
32 outputs
(NT Link/Host Link)
Up to 3 Units can be connected

General component Inverter
When a two level layout is created by expansion and distance is required
Expansion Units and I/O Connecting Cable

CP2E CPU Unit Expansion I/O Units
(No-protocol mode)
(Modbus-RTU)
CP1W-CN811
CP-series PLC or
CJ2M PLC Host computer
(Host Link)
(Serial PLC Link)
CP2E-E14DR-A
CP2E-E20DR-A

2-1 Basic System Configuration

2-1-2 Basic System Configuration Using an N-type CPU Unit
The system configuration when using a CP2E N-type CPU Unit is shown below.
Battery
CP2W-BAT02
CP2E CPU Unit Expansion I/O Units Expansion Units DIN Track
2-1-2 Basic System Configuration Using an N/NA(S)-type CPU Unit

CP2E-N30D- 20 or 40 I/O Points Analog I/O
CP2E-N40D-
Support Software CP2E-N60D-
8 inputs Analog inputs
CX-One Personal computer
8 outputs Analog outputs
16 outputs Temperature sensors
Serial port
32 outputs
Programmable
Terminal (PT)
Up to 3 Units can be connected

(NT Link/Host Link)
General component Inverter

RS-232C RS-422A/485 Analog
LINK/ACT
Option Board Option Board Option Board
CP1W-CIF01 Or CP1W-CIF11 Or CP1W-ADB21

CP1W-CIF12-V1 CP1W-DAB21V
(No-protocol mode) CP1W-MAB221
(Modbus-RTU)
CP2E-N14D- COMM COMM
CP2E-N20D-
CP-series PLC or
CJ2M PLC Host computer
RS-232C & RS-232C RS-232C & RS-485 RS-485 & RS-485
CP2W-CIFD1 Or CP2W-CIFD2 Or CP2W-CIFD3
(Host Link)
(Serial PLC Link)
Note 1. Maximum one Analog Option Board can be mounted on an N-type

CPU Unit.
2. CP2W-CIFD can only be mounted on option slot 1.
When a two level layout is created by expansion and distance is required

Expansion Units and
CP2E CPU Unit Expansion I/O Units I/O Connecting Cable
CP1W-CN811

2-2 CPU Units

This section describes the models of CP2E CPU Units.
2-2-1 CPU Unit Models

The CP2E CPU Unit model numbers are configured as shown below.
Power supply
A: AC power supply
CP2E-D- D: DC power supply
Output type
R: Relay outputs
T: Transistor outputs, sinking
T1: Transistor outputs, sourcing
Input type
D: DC inputs
I/O capacity
14: 14 I/O points (8 inputs, 6 outputs)
Unit type
E: Essential model
S: Standard model
N: Network model

The following is a list of available CP2E CPU Unit models.
E-type CPU Units

Number of built-in I/O Current
Power
points consumption
2-2 CPU Units

supply Program DM Area
Name and appearance Model number Number Number Output type Weight
specifica- capacity capacity
Total of of 5 VDC 24 VDC
tions
inputs outputs
CPU Unit with 14 I/O Points CP2E-E14DR-A 14 8 6 AC power Relays 4K steps 4K words 0.06A 0.04A 320g max.
supply 100 (FB
to 240 VAC capacity:
4K steps)

CPU Unit with 20 I/O Points CP2E-E20DR-A 20 12 8 0.08A 0.06A 325g max.
Note A battery cannot be mounted to an E-type CPU Unit.

S-type CPU Units

points Power consumption
Total of of tions 5 VDC 24 VDC
inputs outputs
CPU Unit with 30 I/O Points CP2E-S30DR-A 30 18 12 AC power Relays 8K steps 8K words 0.12A 0.07A 560g max.
supply (FB
100 to capacity:
240 VAC 8K steps)
CP2E-S30DT-D DC power Sinking 0.28A 0.02A 430g max.
transistor
supply
CP2E-S30DT1-D 24VDC Sourcing
transistor
CPU Unit with 40 I/O Points CP2E-S40DR-A 40 24 16 AC power Relays 0.13A 0.09A 610g max.
supply
100 to
240 VAC
transistor
supply
CP2E-S40DT1-D Sourcing
24VDC
transistor
CPU Unit with 60 I/O Points CP2E-S60DR-A 60 36 24 AC power Relays 0.16A 0.13A 760g max.
supply
100 to
240 VAC
transistor
supply
CP2E-S60DT1-D Sourcing
24VDC
transistor

N-type CPU Units

points Power consumption
2-2 CPU Units

Total of of tions 5 VDC 24 VDC
inputs outputs
CPU Unit with 14 I/O Points CP2E-N14DR-A 14 8 6 AC power Relays 10K 16K 0.15A 0.05A 335g max.
CP2E-N14DT-A supply 100 Sinking steps words 0.21A 0.02A 320g max.
to 240 VAC (FB
transistor
capacity:
CP2E-N14DR-D DC power Relays 10K 0.15A 0.05A 325g max.
CP2E-N14DT-D supply Sinking steps) 0.21A 0.02A 305g max.
24VDC
transistor 2
CP2E-N14DT1-D Sourcing 0.22A 0.02A 305g max.
transistor

CPU Unit with 20 I/O Points CP2E-N20DR-A 20 12 8 AC power Relays 0.17A 0.06A 340g max.
supply 100
CP2E-N20DT-A Sinking 0.27A 0.02A 330g max.
to 240 VAC transistors
CP2E-N20DR-D DC power Relays 0.17A 0.06A 320g max.

CP2E-N20DT-D supply Sinking 0.27A 0.02A 310g max.
24VDC transistors
transistors
CP2E-N30DT-A supply 100 Sinking 0.52A 0.03A 550g max.
to 240 VAC
transistors
24VDC transistors
transistors
CP2E-N40DT-A supply 100 Sinking 0.59A 0.03A 600g max.
to 240 VAC
transistors
24VDC transistors
transistors
supply 100
CP2E-N60DT-A Sinking 0.71A 0.03A 720g max.
to 240 VAC
transistor
supply
CP2E-N60DT-D Sinking 0.71A 0.03A 620g max.
24VDC transistor
transistor

2-2-2 Optional Products
Optional Products for CPU Units

Current
Name and appearance Model number Applications consumption Weight
5 VDC 24 VDC
RS-232C Option Board CP1W-CIF01 Mounted in the option slot of an N-type 0.04A − 20g
CPU Unit and can be used as an RS-232C
COMM
port.
Maximum transmission distance: 15 m
Non-isolated RS-422A/485 CP1W-CIF11 Mounted in the option slot of an N-type 0.04A − 15g
Option Board CPU Unit and can be used as an RS-
422A/485 port.
COMM
Isolated RS-422A/485 Option CP1W-CIF12- Mounted in the option slot of an N-type 0.04A − 15g
Board V1 CPU Unit and can be used as an RS-
COMM
422A/485 port.
RS-232C&RS-232C Option CP2W-CIFD1 Mounted in the option slot 1 of an N-type 0.04A − 25g
Board CPU Unit and can be used as two RS-232C
ports.
RS-232C&RS-485 Option CP2W-CIFD2 Mounted in the option slot 1 of an N-type 0.06A − 25g
Board CPU Unit and can be used as one RS-232C
port and one isolated RS-485 port.
Maximum transmission distance:
15 m (RS-232C)
500 m (RS-485)
RS-485&RS-485 Option CP2W-CIFD3 Mounted in the option slot 1 of an N-type 0.08A − 25g
Board CPU Unit and can be used as two isolated
RS-485 ports.
Analog Input Option Board CP1W-ADB21 Mounted in the option slot of an N-type 0.02A − 25g
CPU Unit and can be used as an analog input
module.
• 2 analog inputs
0 to 10 V (Resolution: 1/4000)
0 to 20 mA (Resolution: 1/2000)
Analog Output Option Board CP1W-DAB21V Mounted in the option slot of an N-type 0.06A − 25g
CPU Unit and can be used as an analog out-
put module.
• 2 analog outputs
Analog Input/Output Option CP1W-MAB221 Mounted in the option slot of an N-type 0.08A − 25g
Board CPU Unit and can be used as an analog
input/output module.
• 2 analog inputs
0 to 20 mA (Resolution: 1/2000)
• 2 analog outputs

Current
Name and appearance Model number Applications consumption Weight
5 VDC 24 VDC
Battery CP2W-BAT02 Mounted in an N/S-type CPU Unit. − − −
Mount the Battery when using the clock
function.
2-2 CPU Units

A Battery cannot be mounted to an E-type
CPU Unit.
Note 1 Maximum one Analog Option Board can be mounted on an N-type CPU Unit.
2 The CP1W-ME05M Memory Cassette, CP1W-DAM01 LCD Option Board, and CP1W-CIF41 Ethernet Option Board
cannot be used with the CP2E CPU Unit.
3 Serial Option Boards cannot be used with the E/S-type CPU Unit.
2
Installation and Wiring Products
2-2-2 Optional Products

Name and appearance Model number Specifications and application
DIN Track PFP-50N Track length: 50 cm, Height: 7.3 mm
PFP-100N Track length: 1 m, Height: 7.3 mm
PFP-100N2 Track length: 1 m, Height: 16 mm
End Plate PFP-M Stopper to prevent Units from moving on the DIN Track.
I/O Connecting Cable CP1W-CN811 Length: 800 mm

This cable is used if the connecting cable for the Expansion I/O
Unit or Expansion Unit is not long enough or for a vertical configu-
ration.
Only one I/O Connecting Cable can be used in each PLC.

2-2-3 Unit Versions of CPU Units
Unit Versions
A “unit version” has been introduced to manage CPU Units in the CP Series according to differences in
functionality accompanying Unit upgrades.
z Notation of Unit Versions on Products

The unit version is given to the right of the lot number on the nameplate of the products for which
unit versions are being managed, as shown below.
CP2E CPU Unit

Product nameplate
CP2E-N40DR-A
CPU UNIT
Lot No. 01819M Ver.1.0
OMRON Corporation MADE IN CHINA
Lot No.
Unit version
(example for unit version 1.0)
z Confirming Unit Versions with Support Software

CX-Programmer can be used to confirm the unit version of the CP2E CPU Units.
Refer to 4-1 Applicable Programming Devices for CP2E for details on the CX-Programmer.
The CX-Programmer can be used to confirm the unit version using one of the following methods.
• Using the PLC Information
• Using the Unit Manufacturing Information
z Unit Versions
Type Model numbers Unit version
CP2E CPU Units CP2E-ED- Unit version 1.
CP2E-SD-
CP2E-ND-

2-3 Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit

This section describes the connection of Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units to a CP2E CPU Unit.
2-3-1 Expandable CPU Units

• Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units cannot be connected to E14/20 or N14/20 CPU Units.
• A total of up to three Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units can be connected to an E30/40/60,
S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Unit.
z CP2E E14/20 or N14/20 CPU Unit 2
2-3-1 Expandable CPU Units

CP-series Expansion Units and Expansion I/O
Units cannot be connected.
z CP2E E30/40/60, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Unit
A total of up to three CP-series Expansion I/O Units

and Expansion Units can be connected.
NC NC COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 NC NC COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 NC NC COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11

NC NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10 NC NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10 NC NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
CH CH CH CH CH CH
CH CH CH
IN 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 IN 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 IN 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11
CH CH CH
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11
CH CH CH
OUT 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 OUT 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 OUT 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 40EDR CH
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 40EDR CH
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 40EDR
CH CH EXP CH CH EXP CH CH EXP

NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06
2-3-2 Connection Methods

Connection cables for the Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units are used to connect the Units.
The length can be extended by using a CP1W-CN811 I/O Connecting Cable (length: 800 mm).
Leave approximately 10mm of space between the CPU Unit and the Exapansion I/O Units or Expan-
sion Units.
2-3-3 Maximum Number of I/O Points for an Expansion I/O Unit or

Expansion Unit
Number of inputs: 24
Number of outputs: 16
Built-in I/O on CPU Unit Total number of Expansion Total number of I/O points when
I/O Units and Expansion three CP1W-40ED Expansion
CPU Unit
Units that can be con- I/O Units are connected
nected
Number Number Number Number
Total Total
of inputs of outputs of inputs of outputs
CP2E-14D- 14 8 6 Not possible. 14 8 6
CP2E-20D- 20 12 8 20 12 8
CP2E-30D- 30 18 12 3 Units maximum 150 90 60
CP2E-40D- 40 24 16 160 96 64
CP2E-60D- 60 36 24 180 108 72

2-3-4 Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units
Expansion I/O Units

Current
Specifications
Name and appearance Model number consumption Weight
Outputs Inputs 5V 24V
8-point Input Unit CP1W-8ED Not provided. 8 inputs, 24 VDC 0.018A − 200g
8-point Output Unit CP1W-8ER 8 relay outputs Not provided. 0.026A 0.044A 250g
CP1W-8ET 8 transistor outputs, 0.075A − 250g

sinking
CP1W-8ET1 8 transistor outputs, 0.075A − 250g

sourcing
NC
OUT
NC
00
CH
COM
01
COM
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
02
COM
03
04
05
06
07
COM

OUT
16ER
sinking
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP
NC 00 02 04 05 07 NC
NC COM 01 03 COM 06 NC

sourcing
20-point I/O Unit CP1W-20EDR1 8 relay outputs 12 inputs, 24 VDC 0.103A 0.044A 300g
CP1W-20EDT 8 transistor outputs, 0.130A − 300g

sinking
CP1W-20EDT1 8 transistor outputs, 0.130A − 300g

sourcing

sinking

sourcing
40-point I/O Unit CP1W-40EDR 16 relay outputs 24 inputs, 24 VDC 0.080A 0.090A 380g
CP1W-40EDT 16 transistor outputs, 0.160A − 320g

sinking
CP1W-40EDT1 16 transistor outputs, 0.160A − 320g

sourcing


Expansion Units
Current
Name and appearance Model number Specifications consumption Weight
5V 24V
Analog I/O Unit CP1W-MAD11 2 analog inputs 0.083A 0.110A 250g
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to
20 mA, and 4 to 20 mA
1 analog output
NC NC
1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4
to 20 mA
Resolution: 1/6,000
2
CP1W-MAD42 4 analog inputs 0.120A 0.120A 260g
2-3-4 Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units

0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to
2 analog outputs
1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4
to 20 mA
Resolution: 1/12,000
CP1W-MAD44 4 analog inputs 0.120A 0.170A 260g
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to
4 analog outputs
1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4
to 20 mA
Analog Input Unit CP1W-AD041 4 analog inputs 0.100A 0.090A 200g
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to
Resolution: 1/6,000
IN CH
I IN1 VIN2 COM2 I IN3 VIN4 COM4 AG
VIN1 COM1 I IN2 VIN3 COM3 I IN4 NC
CP1W-AD042 4 analog inputs 0.100A 0.050A 200g
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to
Analog Output Unit CP1W-DA021 2 analog outputs 0.040A 0.095A 200g
1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA,
and 4 to 20 mA
Resolution: 1/6,000
CP1W-DA041 4 analog outputs 0.080A 0.124A 200g
OUT CH
1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA,
I OUT1 VOUT2 COM2 I OUT3 VOUT4 COM4 AG
VOUT1 COM1 I OUT2 VOUT3 COM3 I OUT4 NC
and 4 to 20 mA
Resolution: 1/6,000
CP1W-DA042 4 analog outputs 0.070A 0.160A 200g
1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA,
and 4 to 20 mA
Temperature Sensor Unit CP1W-TS001 Thermocouple inputs K or J, 2 inputs 0.040A 0.059A 250g
CP1W-TS002 Thermocouple inputs K or J, 4 inputs 0.040A 0.059A 250g
CP1W-TS003 Thermocouple inputs K or J, 4 inputs 0.070A 0.030A 225g
or 2 analog inputs
0 to 10 V, 1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA
CP1W-TS101 Platinum resistance thermometer inputs 0.054A 0.073A 250g
Pt100 or JPt100, 2 inputs
CP1W-TS102 Platinum resistance thermometer inputs 0.054A 0.073A 250g
Pt100 or JPt100, 4 inputs

Current
Name and appearance Model number Specifications consumption Weight
5V 24V
Temperature Sensor Unit CP1W-TS004 Thermocouple inputs K or J, 12 inputs 0.080A 0.050A 380g
2-3-5 Restrictions on System Configuration

The following restrictions apply to the CP-series Expansion Units and CP-series Expansion I/O Units
that can be connected to CP2E CPU Units.
Restriction on the Number of Connected Units

A total of up to three Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units can be connected to an E30/40/60,
S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Unit. Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units cannot be connected to
E14/20 or N14/20 CPU Units.
Refer to 2-4-1 External Power Supply Capacity When Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units are
Connected for power consumption calculation method to ensure it is sufficient when Expansion Units,
Expansion I/O Units and Option Board Units are connected.
Each N-type CPU Unit can connect one device to pin 6 (+5V power supply) of the CP1W-CIF01.
Restrictions on External Power Supply Capacity

The following restrictions apply when using the CPU Unit’s external power supply.
z AC-power-supply E30/40/60, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Unit

The power supply capacity is restricted for AC-power-supply E30/40/60, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60
CPU Units. It may not be possible to use the full 300 mA of the external power supply, though a CPU
Unit can connect any CP-series Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit.
The entire 300 mA from the external power supply can be used if Expansion Units and Expansion
I/O Units are not connected.
Refer to 2-4-1 External Power Supply Capacity When Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units are
Connected for details.
z AC-power-supply E14/20, N14/20 CPU Unit or DC-power-supply CPU Unit

There is no external power supply.


Restrictions by ambient temperature
According to the ambient temperature, there are restrictions on power supply voltage and output
load current for the DC-power-supply CPU Units.
Refer to Output Specifications for Relay Outputs in 3-2-4 I/O Specifications for details.
Restrictions on the Number of Simultaneously ON Points

Use CP1W-32ER/ET/ET1 32-point Output Units with the number of simultaneously ON less than 24
points (75%). 2
2-3-5 Restrictions on System Configuration

Mounting Restriction
When connecting CP-series Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units to a CPU Unit with AC power,
provide a space of approximately 10 mm between the CPU Unit and the first Expansion Unit or
Expansion I/O Unit.
CP2E CPU Unit Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units
10 mm
If sufficient space cannot be provided between the CPU Unit and the first Expansion Unit or Expan-
sion I/O Unit, use the PLC in an ambient temperature of -20 to 50°C.

2-4 Unit Current Consumption and

External Power Supply Capacity
This section describes the current consumption and external power supply capacity of units used by the
CP2E.

Expansion Units are Connected
When connecting Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units to an E30/40/60, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60
CPU Unit, or when using the external power supply, ensure the power supply capacity is satisfied as the
following calculation examples.
z Power Supply Capacity

Current consumption
CPU Unit Power consumption
5 VDC 24 VDC
CP2E-30D-
CP2E-40D- 1.2 A max. 0.7 A max. 18.5 W max.
CP2E-60D-
Calculation Example of the AC-Power-Supply CPU Units

CPU Unit Expansion (I/O) Units Other Total Limit
devices
using PLC
1st unit 2nd unit 3rd unit internal
power supply
NV3W-
CP2E- CP1W- CP1W- CP1W- MR20L-V1
N40DR-A DA041 DA041 DA041 +
CP1W-CIF01
5V 0.39A 0.08A 0.08A 0.08A 0.24A 0.87A ≤1.2A
24V 0.09A 0.124A 0.124A 0.124A − 0.462A ≤0.7A
Power 5 V×0.87 A=4.35 W 15.438 W ≤18.5 W
consumption 24 V×0.462 A=11.088 W
Usable capacity 18.5 W (Total of usable power consumption) − 15.438 W= 3.062 W 0.127A ≤0.3A
of external 3.062 W/24 V=0.127 A
power supply

2-4 Unit Current Consumption and External

Calculation Example of the DC-Power-Supply CPU Units
Power Supply Capacity

CPU Unit Expansion (I/O) Units Other Total Limit
devices
using PLC
1st unit 2nd unit 3rd unit internal
power supply
CP2E- CP1W- CP1W- CP1W- CP1W-CIF01
N60DT-D 40EDT TS003 DA041
5V 0.71A 0.16A 0.07A 0.12A 0.08A 1.14A ≤1.2A
24V 0.03A − 0.03A 0.17A − 0.23A ≤0.7A 2
Power 5 V×1.14 A=5.7 W 11.22 W ≤18.5 W
consumption 24 V×0.23 A=5.52 W
2-4-2 Current Consumption

Note DC-Power-Supply CPU Units have no external power supply.

z CPU Units
E-type CPU Units
Current consumption
I/O capacity Model number
5 VDC 24 VDC
14 I/O points CP2E-E14DR-A 0.06A 0.04A
S-type CPU Units

Current consumption
5 VDC 24 VDC
30 I/O points CP2E-S30DR-A 0.12A 0.07A
CP2E-S30DT-D 0.28A 0.02A
CP2E-S30DT1-D
CP2E-S40DT-D 0.34A 0.02A
CP2E-S40DT1-D
CP2E-S60DT-D 0.48A 0.02A
CP2E-S60DT1-D

N-type CPU Units

Current consumption
5 VDC 24 VDC
14 I/O points CP2E-N14DR-A 0.15A 0.05A
CP2E-N14DT-A 0.21A 0.02A
CP2E-N14DR-D 0.15A 0.05A
CP2E-N14DT-D 0.21A 0.02A
CP2E-N14DT1-D 0.22A 0.02A
CP2E-N20DT-A 0.27A 0.02A
CP2E-N20DR-D 0.17A 0.06A
CP2E-N20DT-D 0.27A 0.02A
CP2E-N20DT1-D 0.26A 0.02A
CP2E-N30DT-A 0.52A 0.03A
CP2E-N30DR-D 0.37A 0.07A
CP2E-N30DT-D 0.51A 0.03A
CP2E-N30DT1-D 0.51A 0.03A
CP2E-N40DT-A 0.59A 0.03A
CP2E-N40DR-D 0.39A 0.09A
CP2E-N40DT-D 0.59A 0.03A
CP2E-N40DT1-D 0.59A 0.03A
CP2E-N60DT-A 0.71A 0.03A
CP2E-N60DR-D 0.41A 0.13A
CP2E-N60DT-D 0.71A 0.03A
CP2E-N60DT1-D 0.71A 0.03A
Note The current consumptions given in the following table must be added to the current consumption of the CPU
Unit if an Expansion Unit, Expansion I/O Unit or Option Board Unit is connected.

2-4 Unit Current Consumption and External

z Expansion I/O Units, Expansion Units and Option Board Units
Current consumption
Unit name Model number
5 VDC 24 VDC
Power Supply Capacity

Expansion I/O Units 8 inputs CP1W-8ED 0.018A −
8 outputs CP1W-8ER 0.026A 0.044A
CP1W-8ET 0.075A −
CP1W-8ET1
CP1W-16ET 0.076A −
CP1W-16ET1
20 I/O points CP1W-20EDR1 0.103A 0.044A
12 inputs CP1W-20EDT 0.130A −
8 outputs CP1W-20EDT1
2
CP1W-32ET 0.113A −

CP1W-32ET1
40 I/O points CP1W-40EDR 0.080A 0.090A
24 inputs CP1W-40EDT 0.160A −
16 outputs CP1W-40EDT1
Expa- Analog Input 4 inputs CP1W-AD041 0.100A 0.090A
nsion Unit CP1W-AD042 0.100A 0.050A
Units
2 outputs CP1W-DA021 0.040A 0.095A
Analog Output
4 outputs CP1W-DA041 0.080A 0.124A
Unit
CP1W-DA042 0.070A 0.160A
Analog I/O Unit Analog inputs: 2 CP1W-MAD11 0.083A 0.110A
Analog outputs: 1
Analog inputs: 4 CP1W-MAD42 0.120A 0.120A
Analog outputs: 2
Analog inputs: 4 CP1W-MAD44 0.120A 0.170A
Analog outputs: 4
Temperature K or J thermocouples CP1W-TS001 0.040A 0.059A
Sensor Units CP1W-TS002
CP1W-TS004 0.080A 0.050A
K, J thermocouples or analog CP1W-TS003 0.070A 0.030A
inputs
Pt or JPt platinum resistance CP1W-TS101 0.054A 0.073A
thermometers CP1W-TS102
Option Board Units One RS-232C port CP1W-CIF01 0.04A −
One RS-422A/485 port CP1W-CIF11 0.04A −
CP1W-CIF12-V1 0.04A −
Two RS-232C ports CP2W-CIFD1 0.04A −
One RS-232C port and One CP2W-CIFD2 0.06A −
RS-485 port
Two RS-485 ports CP2W-CIFD3 0.08A −
Analog input CP1W-ADB21 0.02A −
Analog output CP1W-DAB21V 0.06A −
Analog I/O CP1W-MAB221 0.08A −
z Other Devices Using PLC Internal Power Supply

Current consumption
Unit name Model number
5 VDC 24 VDC
Programmable Backlight Green/Orange/Red NV3W-MG20L-V1 0.2A −
Terminal Backlight White/Pink/Red NV3W-MR20L-V1 0.2A −


3
Part Names and Functions
3
This section describes the part names, function specifications and terminal arrange-
ments of the CP2E CPU Unit and other Units.
3-1 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

3-1-1 E14/20 or N14/20 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-1-2 E30/40/60, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-1-3 Common I/O Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-1-4 Serial Communication Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3-1-5 Analog Option Board for N-type CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-2 Expansion I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-2-1 Expansion Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-2-2 Expansion Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3-2-3 Expansion I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3-2-4 I/O Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

3-1 CPU Units

This section describes the names of the CPU Unit parts and provides the I/O specifications and termi-
nal arrangements. Refer to A-1 Dimensions for the dimensions, A-2 Wiring Diagrams for the wiring dia-
grams.
3-1-1 E14/20 or N14/20 CPU Units

E-type CPU Unit N-type CPU Unit
CP2E-E14/20DR-A CP2E-N14/20D-
(6) Power supply input terminals (12) Battery holder
(7) Ground terminal

(1) Input terminal block
(8) Input terminals
(2) Input indicators
(4) Option Board

slot
(3) Peripheral USB port
(5) Operation indicators

(9) Output indicators
(13) Built-in RS-232C (10) Output terminal

port block
(11) Output terminals

(14) Built-in Ethernet port

Number Name Function

(1) Input terminal block This is the terminal block for inputs such as the power supply input and 24
(not removable) VDC inputs.
(2) Input indicators (yellow) Input status is displayed. An indicator will be ON when the input is ON.
(3) Peripheral USB port Used to connect to a personal computer for programming and monitoring
by the CX-Programmer for CP2E.
(4) Option Board slot for An Option Board can be connected to the slot.
N-type CPU Units • CP1W-CIF01 RS-232C Option Board
3-1 CPU Units

• CP1W-CIF11 RS-422A/485 Option Board (Maximum transmission dis-
tance: 50 m)
• CP1W-CIF12-V1 RS-422A/485 Option Board (Maximum transmission
distance: 500 m)
• CP1W-MAB221/ADB21/DAB21V Analog Option Board
• CP2W-CIFD1 Option Board with two RS-232C ports
• CP2W-CIFD2 Option Board with one RS-232C port and one RS-485 3
port (isolated)
• CP2W-CIFD3 Option Board with two RS-485 ports (isolated)
3-1-1 E14/20 or N14/20 CPU Units

(5) Operation indicators The CPU Unit’s operating status can be confirmed with this indicator.
Refer to CPU Unit Status Indicators (Page 3-4).
(6) Power supply input Power of 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VDC can be supplied.
terminals
(7) Ground terminal
Protective ground ( ): To prevent electric shock, ground to 100 Ω or less.
(8) Input terminals Input devices such as switches and sensors can be connected.
(9) Output indicators (yellow) Output status is displayed. An indicator will be ON when the output is ON.
(10) Output terminal block This is the terminal block for outputs such as relay outputs and transistor
(not removable) outputs.
(11) Output terminals Loads such as lamps, contactors, and solenoid valves can be connected.
(12) Battery holder for N- A Battery can be installed by opening the cover. (The Battery is optional.)
type CPU Units
(13) Built-in RS-232C port for By connecting a PT, the controlled system can be monitored and data can
E-type CPU Units be collected.
(14) Built-in Ethernet port for Used to connect to a personal computer for programming and monitoring
N-type CPU Units by the CX-Programmer for CP2E, or connect to other OMRON PLCs for
data exchange.

CPU Unit Status Indicators

: Not lit : Flashing : Lit
Name Color Function Description
E-type POWER Green When PLC power is ON.

Lit
POWER
When PLC power is OFF.
RUN Not lit
ERR/ALM RUN Green When PLC is executing a program under RUN or MONITOR mode.
INH Lit
PRPHL Operation is stopped in PROGRAM mode or due to a fatal error.

Not lit
BKUP
ERR/ALM Red A fatal error (including FALS execution) or a hardware error (WDT
RS-232C Lit error) has occurred. PLC operation will stop and all outputs will be
turned OFF.
A non-fatal error has occurred (including FAL execution).
N-type
Flashing PLC operation will continue.
POWER
Operation is normal.
RUN Not lit
ERR/ALM INH Yellow All outputs has been turned OFF.
INH Lit Output OFF bit (A500.15) has been turned OFF.
BKUP Operation is normal.

Not lit
LINK/ACT
PRPHL Yellow Communications (either sending or receiving) are in progress
(E- Flashing through the peripheral USB port.
type only)
Other than the above.
Not lit
BKUP Yellow A user program, parameters, or Data Memory is being written to
Lit the built-in Flash Memory.
Not lit
RS-232C Yellow Communications (either sending or receiving) are in progress
(E- Flashing through the RS-232C port.
type only)
Not lit
LINK/ACT Yellow A valid link is detected.
(N- Lit
type only)
Communications (either sending or receiving) are in progress
Flashing through the Ethernet port.
Not lit

Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PLC when the BKUP indicator is lit. It indicates that
data is being written to the built-in Flash Memory.
If the power is turned OFF during backup, the data will not be backed up and transferred to the
DM Area in RAM next time the power supply is turned ON.

Terminal Arrangements
z Input Arrangement
AC Power Supply
CP2E-14D-A
CIO 0
3-1 CPU Units

L1,L2/N : Power supply terminal
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 NC NC
: Protective ground terminal
NC 00 02 04 06 NC NC COM : Common terminal
00 to 07 : Input terminal
NC : No connection
CP2E-20D-A
CIO 0
3
L1,L2/N : Power supply terminal
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11
3-1-1 E14/20 or N14/20 CPU Units

NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 COM : Common terminal
NC : No connection
DC Power Supply
CP2E-N14D-D
CIO 0
+,- : Power supply terminal
+ - COM 01 03 05 07 NC NC
NC 00 02 04 06 NC NC COM : Common terminal
NC : No connection
CP2E-N20D-D
CIO 0
+,- : Power supply terminal
+ - COM 01 03 05 07 09 11
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 COM : Common terminal
NC : No connection
z Output Arrangement
AC Power Supply and DC Power Supply

CP2E-14D-
00 01 02 03 04 05 NC COM : Common terminal

00 to 05 : Output terminal
COM COM NC COM NC COM NC NC : No connection
CIO 100
CP2E-20D-
00 01 02 03 04 05 07 COM : Common terminal

COM COM NC COM NC COM 06 NC : No connection
CIO 100

3-1-2 E30/40/60, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Units

E/S-type CPU Unit
N-type CPU Unit
CP2E-E30/40/60DR-A
CP2E-N30/40/60D-
CP2E-S30/40/60D-
(6) Power supply (14) Battery holder
input terminals (7) Input terminals
(1) Input
terminal block
(8) Ground
(2) Input terminal L1 L2/N
indicators
(9) Expansion I/O
(4) Option
(3) Peripheral Unit connector
Board slots
USB port
(5) Operation (10) Output
indicators indicators (18) External
(16) Built-in (11) Output supply
RS-232C port terminal block terminals
(12) Output
(17) Built-in (15) Built-in Ethernet port
(13) External power supply terminals
RS-485 port
input terminals
PORT1A PORT1B
(Bottom View)


(1) Input terminal block This is the terminal block for inputs such as the power supply input and 24
(not removable) VDC inputs.
(2) Input indicators (yellow) Input status is displayed. An indicator will be ON when the input is ON.
(3) Peripheral USB port Used to connect to a personal computer for programming and monitoring
by the CX-Programmer for CP2E.
(4) Option Board slots for Option Boards can be connected to the slots.
N-type CPU Units • CP1W-CIF01 RS-232C Option Board
• CP1W-CIF11 RS-422A/485 Option Board (Maximum transmission dis-
3-1 CPU Units

tance: 50 m)
• CP1W-CIF12-V1 RS-422A/485 Option Board (Maximum transmission
distance: 500 m)
• CP1W-MAB221/ADB21/DAB21V Analog Option Board
• CP2W-CIFD1 Option Board with two RS-232C ports
• CP2W-CIFD2 Option Board with one RS-232C port and one RS-485
port (isolated) 3
• CP2W-CIFD3 Option Board with two RS-485 ports (isolated)
(5) Operation indicators The CPU Unit’s operating status can be confirmed with this indicator.
3-1-2 E30/40/60, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Units

Refer to CPU Unit Status Indicators (Page 3-8).
(6) Power supply input termi- Power of 100 to 240 VAC or 24 VDC can be supplied.
nals
(7) Input terminals Input devices such as switches and sensors can be connected.
(8) Ground terminal
Protective ground ( ): To prevent electric shock, ground to 100 Ω or
less.
Functional ground ( ): If noise is a significant source of errors or if
electrical shock is a problem, connect to the protective ground terminal
and ground both with a ground of 100Ω or less (AC power supply only).
(9) Expansion I/O Unit CP-series Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units such as Analog I/O
connector Units, and Temperature Sensors can be connected.
Refer to 5-2-4 Connecting Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units.
(10) Output indicators (yellow) Output status is displayed. An indicator will be ON when the output is ON.
(11) Output terminal block This is the terminal block for outputs such as relay outputs, transistor out-
(not removable) puts, and the external power supply output.
(12) Output terminals Loads such as lamps, contactors, and solenoid valves can be connected.
(13) External power supply Power of 20.4V to 26.4 VDC can be supplied to CIO 100.00 and CIO
input terminals for S- 100.01.
type CPU Units
(14) Battery holder for A Battery can be installed by opening the cover. (Battery is optional.)
N/S-type CPU Units
(15) Built-in Ethernet port for Used to connect to a personal computer for programming and monitoring
N-type CPU Units by the CX-Programmer for CP2E, or connect to other OMRON PLCs for
data exchange.
(16) Built-in RS-232C port for By connecting a PT, the controlled system can be monitored and data can
E/S-type CPU Units be collected.
(17) Built-in RS-485 port for Communications are possible between an inverter and a PLC by using
S-type CPU Units Modbus-RTU and Serial PLC Links.
(18) External supply The external supply terminals output up to 300 mA max at 24 VDC.
terminals They can be used as a service power supply for input devices (AC power
supply only).

CPU Unit Status Indicators

Name Color Function Description
E/S-type POWER Green When PLC power is ON.

Lit
POWER
When PLC power is OFF.
RUN Not lit
ERR/ALM RUN Green When PLC is executing a program under RUN or MONITOR mode.
Lit
INH Operation is stopped in PROGRAM mode or due to a fatal error.
PRPHL Not lit
ERR/ALM Red A fatal error (including FALS execution) or a hardware error (WDT
BKUP
Lit error) has occurred. PLC operation will stop and all outputs will be
RS-232C turned OFF.
RS-485 A non-fatal error has occurred (including FAL execution).PLC operation

Flashing will continue.
N-type
Not lit
POWER INH Yellow All outputs has been turned OFF.
RUN Lit Output OFF bit (A500.15) has been turned OFF.
ERR/ALM
Not lit
INH PRPHL Yellow Communications (either sending or receiving) are in progress through
BKUP (E/S- Flashing the peripheral USB port.
type only)
PORT1A
Not lit
LINK/ACT
BKUP Yellow A user program, parameters, or Data Memory is being written to the
PORT1B Lit bulit-in Flash Memory.
LINK/ACT
Not lit
RS232C Yellow Communications (either sending or receiving) are in progress through
(E/S- Flashing the RS-232C port.
type only)
Not lit
RS485 Yellow Communications (either sending or receiving) are in progress through
(S- Flashing the RS-485 port.
type only)
Not lit
PORT1A Yellow A valid link is detected.
LINK/ACT Lit
(N-
Communications (either sending or receiving) are in progress through
type only)
Flashing the Ethernet port (Left: PORT1A).
Not lit
PORT1B Yellow A valid link is detected.
LINK/ACT Lit
(N-
Communications (either sending or receiving) are in progress through
type only)
Flashing the Ethernet port (Right: PORT1B).
Not lit


Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PLC when the BKUP indicator is lit. It indicates that
data is being written to the built-in Flash Memory.
If the power is turned OFF during backup, the data will not be backed up and transferred to the
DM Area in RAM next time the power supply is turned ON.
3-1 CPU Units

z Input Arrangement
AC Power Supply
CP2E-30D-A
3
CIO 0 CIO 1
L1, L2/N : Power supply terminal
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 COM : Common terminal
3-1-2 E30/40/60(S), N30/40/60(S) or NA20 CPU Units

00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 NC 00 to 11 : Input terminal
: Functional ground terminal
CP2E-40D-A : Protective ground terminal
NC : No connection
CIO 0 CIO 1
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
CP2E-60D-A
CIO 0 CIO 1 CIO 2
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
DC Power Supply
CP2E-30D-D
+, - : Power supply terminal
+ - COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 COM : Common terminal
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 NC 00 to 11 : Input terminal
CIO 0 CIO 1 NC : No connection
CP2E-40D-D
+ - COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
CIO 0 CIO 1
CP2E-60D-D
+ - COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
CIO 0 CIO 1 CIO 2

z Output Arrangement
AC Power Supply
CP2E-30D-A
+,- : External supply terminal
+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02
COM : Common terminal
- COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 00 to 07 : Output terminal
CIO 100 CIO 101
CP2E-40D-A
+ 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
- COM COM COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07

CIO 100 CIO 101
CP2E-60D-A
+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
− COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102
DC Power Supply
CP2E-N30D-D
NC : No connection
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 COM : Common terminal
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 00 to 07 : Output terminal
CIO 100 CIO 101
CP2E-N40D-D
NC 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
NC COM COM COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07

CIO 100 CIO 101
CP2E-N60D-D
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06

CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102

CP2E-S30DT-D
COM ：Common terminal
V+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 00~07 ：Output terminal
V- COM(V-) COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 V+ ：External power supply input terminal
CIO 100 CIO 101 for CIO 100.00/01 (DC24V)
V- ：External power supply input terminal
Note COM(V-) has been connected with V- in an inner circuit.
for CIO 100.00/01 (0V)
CP2E-S30DT1-D
3-1 CPU Units

V+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02
V- COM(V+) COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03

CIO 100 CIO 101
Note COM(V+) has been connected with V+ in an inner circuit.
CP2E-S40DT-D
3
V+ 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
V- COM(V-) COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07
3-1-2 E30/40/60(S), N30/40/60(S) or NA20 CPU Units

CIO 100 CIO 101
CP2E-S40DT1-D
V+ 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
V- COM(V+) COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07

CIO 100 CIO 101
CP2E-S60DT-D
V+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
V- COM(V-) COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102
CP2E-S60DT1-D
V+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
V- COM(V+) COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06

CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102

3-1-3 Common I/O Specifications

The following table gives the specifications that apply to the built-in I/O on a CP2E CPU Unit.
Specifications
Item Specification
High-speed counter
High-speed counter inputs, interrupt inputs,
Input type inputs or normal inputs quick-response inputs or Normal inputs
normal inputs
E/S-type CIO 0.08 to CIO 0.11,
and N14 CIO 0.00 and CIO 0.01 CIO 0.02 to CIO 0.07 CIO 1.00 to CIO 1.11 and
CPU Units CIO 2.00 to CIO 2.11 *1
Input bits N20 CPU CIO 0.00 and CIO 0.01 CIO 0.02 to CIO 0.09 CIO 0.10 to CIO 0.11
Units
CIO 0.10, CIO 0.11,
N30/40/60 CIO 0.00 to CIO 0.03 CIO 0.04 to CIO 0.09 CIO 1.00 to CIO 1.11 and
CPU Units
CIO 2.00 to CIO 2.11 *1
Applicable inputs 2-wire and 3-wire sensors
Input voltage 24 VDC, +10% / -15%
Input impedance 3.3 kΩ 3.3 kΩ 4.8 kΩ
Input current 7.5 mA (typical) 7.5 mA (typical) 5 mA (typical)
ON voltage/current 17.0 VDC min. / 3 mA min. 17.0 VDC min. / 3 mA min. 14.4 VDC min. / 3 mA min.
OFF voltage/current 5.0 VDC max. / 1 mA max. 5.0 VDC max. / 1 mA max. 5.0 VDC max. / 1 mA max.
ON response time*2 2.5 μs min. 50 μs max. 1 ms max.
OFF response time*2 2.5 μs min. 50 μs max. 1 ms max.
Circuit configuration
IN
Input indicator
Isolation Internal
IN
circuits circuits
COM
*1 The bits that can be used depend on the model of CPU Unit.
*2 The response time is the delay caused by hardware. The delay set in the PLC Setup (0 to 32 ms, default: 8 ms)
for a normal input must be added to this value.

Interrupt input mode

Pulse plus direction input mode
Increment mode
Up/down input mode Differential phase mode
E/S-type: 0.00/0.01 E/S-type: 0.00/0.01
N14/20-type: 0.00/0.01 N14/20-type: 0.00/0.01
N30/40/60-type: 0.00 to 0.02 N30/40/60-type: 0.00 to 0.03
10.0µs min. 20.0µs min.
ON 90%
ON 90% 50%
50% OFF 10%
OFF 10%
3-1 CPU Units

2.5µs 2.5µs ON 90%
min. min. 50%
OFF 10%
T1 T2 T3 T4
T1, T2, T3, T4: 2.5 µs min.
E/S-type: 0.02 to 0.07 E/S-type: 0.02/0.03

N14-type: 0.02 to 0.07 N14/20-type: 0.02/0.03
N20-type: 0.02 to 0.09
N30/40/60-type: 0.04 to 0.09
100µs min. 200µs min.
3
ON 90%
ON 90% 50%
OFF 10%

50%
OFF 10%
50µs 50µs ON 90%
min. min. 50%
OFF 10%
T1 T2 T3 T4
T1, T2, T3, T4: 50 µs min.
Output Specifications for Relay Outputs

CP2E-DR-
Item Specification
Maximum switching capacity 2 A 250 VAC (cosφ= 1)
2 A 24 VDC (4 A/common)
Minimum switching capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Service life of Electrical Resistive 200,000 operations (24 VDC)
relay load
Inductive 70,000 operations (250 VAC, cosφ = 0.4)
load
Mechanical 20,000,000 operations
ON response time 15 ms max.
OFF response time 15 ms max.
Output indicator OUT
Internal OUT
circuits
COM 250 VAC, 2A,
24 VDC, 2 A
max.

z Estimating the Service Life of Relays

Under normal conditions, the service life of output contacts is as shown above. The service life of
relays is as shown in the following diagram as a guideline.
CP2E-DR-
1000
700 125-VAC resistive load
500
300
200 30-VDC/250-VAC
resistive load
100
70
50
Life (x 10 )
4
30
20
125 VAC cosφ= 0.4
10
7
5 250 VAC cosφ= 0.4/
3 30 VDC, τ = 7ms
2
1
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2 3 5 7 10
Contact current (A)

Output Specifications for Transistor Outputs (Sinking or Sourcing)

CP2E- N14/20/30/40/60DT(1)-, CP2E-S30/40/60DT(1)-
z Normal Outputs
Specification
Item S-type: CIO 100.00 and CIO 100.01 S-type: CIO 100.02 to CIO 102.07 *2
N-type: CIO 100.00, CIO 100.01, N-type: CIO 100.02 to CIO 100.07,
CIO 101.00 and CIO 101.01
3-1 CPU Units

CIO 101.02 to CIO 102.07 *2
Maximum 0.3 A/output, 0.9 A/common*1
switching 4.5 to 30 VDC
capacity CP2E-N14D-: 1.5 A/Unit CP2E-S/N40D-: 3.6 A/Unit
CP2E-N20D-: 1.8 A/Unit CP2E-S/N60D-: 5.4 A/Unit
CP2E-S/N30D-: 2.7 A/Unit
Minimum 1 mA 4.5 to 30 VDC
switching
capacity
3
Leakage 0.1mA max.
current

Residual 0.6 V max. 1.5V max.
voltage
ON response 0.1 ms max. 0.1 ms max.
time
OFF response 0.1 ms max. 1 ms max.
time
Fuse Not provided.
External 20.4 to 26.4VDC 30mA max. Not needed
power supply (N-type is not needed)
Circuit • S-type CPU Unit Sinking output model
configuration Sinking output model
V+
OUT
20.4 to 26.4 L
~
V- VDC OUT
L
Internal 24 VDC,
OUT circuits 4.5 to 30
L
VDC
~
OUT
L
COM(–)
Internal Internal 4.5 to 30
circuits circuits VDC
Sourcing output model
COM(V-)

COM(+)
V+
Internal 24 VDC,
20.4 to 26.4
circuits 4.5 to 30
V- VDC
OUT VDC
L
COM(V+)
~
OUT
L
Internal Internal 4.5 to 30
circuits circuits VDC
OUT
L
~
OUT
L
• N-type CPU Unit

Sinking output model
OUT
L
~
OUT
L
Internal Internal 24 VDC,
circuits circuits 4.5 to 30
VDC
COM(–)
COM(+)
Internal Internal 24 VDC,

circuits circuits 4.5 to 30
OUT VDC
L
~
OUT
L
*1 Also do not exceed 0.9 A for the total of CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.03, which are different common.

*2 The bits that can be used depend on the model of CPU Unit.

Do not connect a load to an output terminal or apply a voltage in excess of the maximum switch-
ing capacity.
z Pulse Outputs
Specification
Item S-type: CIO 100.00 and CIO 100.01
N-type: CIO 100.00, CIO 100.01, CIO 101.00 and CIO 101.01
Maximum switching capacity 100 mA 4.5 to 26.4 VDC
Minimum switching capacity 7 mA 4.5 to 26.4 VDC
Maximum output frequency 100 kHz
Output waveform
OFF 90%
ON 10%
4μs min. 2μs min.
The OFF and ON refer to the output transistor. The output transistor is ON at
level “L”.
• The load for the above values is assumed to be the resistive load, and does not take into
account the impedance for the connecting cable to the load.
• Due to distortions in pulse waveforms resulting from connecting cable impedance, the pulse
widths in actual operation may be smaller than the values shown above.
z PWM Output (CIO 100.01)

Item Specification
Maximum switching capacity 30 mA 4.5 to 26.4 VDC
Maximum output frequency 32 kHz
PWM output accuracy For ON duty +1%, -0%:10 kHz output
For ON duty +5%, -0%: 0 to 32 kHz output
Output waveform OFF
ON
tON
tON
T ON duty= × 100%
T
The OFF and ON refer to the output transistor. The output transistor is ON at
level “L”.

3-1-4 Serial Communication Port

The Serial Communication Port can be used for a CP2E CPU Unit.
E/S-type CPU Units
3-1 CPU Units

CP2E S30/40/60
CPU Unit
Built-in RS-232C port
3
Built-in RS-485 port
3-1-4 Serial Communication Port

(S-type CPU Unit only)
Built-in RS-232C Port for E/S-type CPU Units
Pin Abbr. Signal Name Signal direction

SD RDRS CS SG FG
1 SD(TXD) Send data Output
2 RD(RXD) Receive data Input
3 RS(RTS) Request to send Output
4 CS(CTS) Clear to send Input
5 SG(0V) Signal ground −
6 FG Frame ground −
Built-in RS-485 Port (2-wire) for S-type CPU Units
z RS-485 Terminal Block

Pin Abbr. Signal Name Signal direction
A- B+ FG
1 A- Send/Receive data - −
2 B+ Send/Receive data + −
z DIP Switch for Terminating Resistance Settings

Setting
ON ON ON (both ends) Terminating resistance selection
Resistance value: 220Ω typical
OFF OFF

N-type CPU Units
CP2E N-type
CPU Unit
Slot 2
CP1W-CIF01 CP1W-CIF11/12-V1
RS-232C RS-422A/485
Option Board Option Board
Slot 1
CP1W-CIF01 CP1W-CIF11/12-V1 CP2W-CIFD1 CP2W-CIFD2 CP2W-CIFD3

RS-232C RS-422A/485 RS-232C&RS-232C RS-232C&RS-485 RS-485&RS-485
Option Board Option Board Option Board Option Board Option Board
Note CP2W-CIFD can only be mounted on option slot 1.
Serial Communication Option Board

Maximum
Model numbers Port transmission Connection method
distance
CP1W-CIF01 One RS-232C port 15m Connector (D-sub, 9 pin female)
CP1W-CIF11 One RS-422A/485 port (not isolated) 50m Terminal block (using ferrules)
CP1W-CIF12-V1 One RS-422A/485 port (isolated) 500m Terminal block (using ferrules)
CP2W-CIFD1 Two RS-232C Ports 15m Terminal block (using ferrules)
One RS-232C port and one RS-485 15m (RS-232C) Terminal block (using ferrules)
CP2W-CIFD2 port (isolated) 500m (RS-485)
CP2W-CIFD3 Two RS-485 ports (isolated) 500m Terminal block (using ferrules)
z How to Mount a Serial Option Board

When mounting an Option Board, first remove the slot cover.
Press the up/down lock-levers on both sides of the Option Board slot cover at the same time to
unlock the cover, and then pull the cover out.
Check the alignment to make the corner cut of the Option Board fit in the Option Board slot, and
firmly press the Option Board in until it snaps into place.

Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before mounting or removing an Option Board.

CP1W-CIF01 RS-232C Option Board

Front Rear
Communications
status indicator
CPU Unit connector

COMM
3-1 CPU Units

RS-232C connector
z RS-232C Connector 3
Pin Abbr. Signal Signal direction
5 1
3-1-4 Optional Serial Communications Port for N/NA(S)-type CPU Units

2 SD(TXD) Send data Output
9 6
4 RS(RTS) Request to send Output
5 CS(CTS) Clear to send Input
6 5V Power −
7 DR(DSR) Data set ready Input
8 ER(DTR) Data terminal ready Output
Connector hood FG Frame ground −
Note The NV3W-M20L-V1 Programmable Terminal can be connected to pin 6 (+5V) on the RS-232C Option
Board (CP1W-CIF01) mounted to the CPU Unit. Do not connect pin 6 to any other device.

CP1W-CIF11 or CP1W-CIF12-V1 RS-422A/485 Option Board

Front Rear
Communications
status indicator
CPU Unit connector
COMM
RDA- RDB+ SDA- SDB+ FG

DIP switch for operation
settings
RS-422A/485 terminal block
z RS-422A/485 Terminal Block
Tighten screws on the terminal

block to 0.28 N.m.
RDA- FG
RDB+ SDA- SDB+
z DIP Switch for Operation Settings

CP1W-CIF11 CP1W-CIF12-V1
Setting
Pin Pin
SW 1 SW1 1 ON ON (both ends) Terminating resistance selection
O
OFF OFF
N
2 2 ON 2-wire connections 2-wire or 4-wire selection*1

1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
OFF 4-wire connections

3 3 ON 2-wire connections 2-wire or 4-wire selection*1
OFF 4-wire connections
4 4 − − Not used.
5 SW2 1 ON RS control enabled RS control selection for RD*2
O
OFF RS control disabled

N
(Data always received.)

6 2 ON RS control enabled RS control selection for SD*3
1
2
OFF RS control disabled

(Data always sent.)
*1 Set both pins 2 and 3 to either ON (2-wire) or OFF (4-wire).
*2 To disable the echo-back function, set pin 5 to ON (RS control enabled).
*3 When connecting to a device on the N side in a 1: N connection with the 4-wire method, set pin 6 to ON (RS
control enabled).
Also, when connecting by the 2-wire method, set pin 6 to ON (RS control enabled).

CP2W-CIFD1 RS-232C&RS-232C Option Board

Front Rear
Communications
status indicator
CPU Unit connector
3-1 CPU Units

RS-232C&RS-232C terminal block
3
z RS-232C&RS-232C Terminal Block
Port Pin Abbr. Signal Name Signal direction

PORT 1 SD(TXD) Send data Output
PORT(EX) 5 SD(TXD) Send data Output
Note CP2W-CIFD1 can only be mounted on option slot 1.
PORT is supported by serial port 1 and PORT(EX) is supported by serial port
1(EX).

CP2W-CIFD2 RS-232C&RS-485 Option Board

Front Rear
Communications
status indicator
CPU Unit connector
RS-232C&RS-485
terminal block
DIP switch
z RS-232C&RS-485 Terminal Block

PORT 1 SD(TXD) Send data Output
PORT(EX) 5 A- Send/Receive data - −
8 NC NC −
1(EX).

Setting
ON ON (both ends) Terminating resistance selection
OFF OFF

CP2W-CIFD3 RS-485&RS-485 Option Board

Front Rear
Communications
status indicator
CPU Unit connector
3-1 CPU Units

RS-485&RS-485
terminal block
DIP switch
3
z RS-485&RS-485 Terminal Block

PORT 1 A- Send/Receive data - −
4 NC NC −
PORT(EX) 5 A- Send/Receive data - −
8 NC NC −
1(EX).

Pin Setting
1
OFF OFF Resistance value: 220Ω typical
2 − − Not used.
3 − − Not used.
4
OFF OFF Resistance value: 220Ω typical

3-1-5 Analog Option Board for N-type CPU Units

The Analog Option Board can be used for a CP2E N-type CPU Unit.
N-type CPU Units
CP2E N-type
CPU Unit
CP1W-ADB21 CP1W-DAB21V CP1W-MAB221

Analog Input Analog Output Analog Input/Output
Note Maximum one Analog Option Board can be mounted on an N-type CPU Unit.
If two Analog Option Boards are mounted, an option board error will occur and both Analog Option Boards
do not work.
Analog Option Board

Analog option board units are non-isolated analog units which allow you to easily realize analog
input/output function for CP2E N-type CPU Unit.
Voltage Input Current Input Voltage Output
0V~10V 0mA~20mA 0V~10V
Analog Option Board
(Resolution: (Resolution: (Resolution:
1/4000) 1/2000) 1/4000)
Analog I/O Option Board CP1W-MAB221 2CH 2CH
Analog Input Option Board CP1W-ADB21 2CH ---
Analog Output Option Board CP1W-DAB21V --- 2CH
z How to Mount an Analog Option Board

When mounting an Option Board, first remove the slot cover.
Press the up/down lock-levers on both sides of the Option Board slot cover at the same time to
unlock the cover, and then pull the cover out.
Check the alignment to make the corner cut of the Option Board fit in the Option Board slot, and
firmly press the Option Board in until it snaps into place.

Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before mounting or removing an Option Board.
Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.

Analog Input Option Board
z Analog Input Terminal Arrangement
VI1 Voltage Input 1

II1 Current Input 1
VI2 Voltage Input 2
3-1 CPU Units

II2 Current Input 2
COM Input Common
Note When using current inputs, voltage input terminals must be short-circuited with current input terminals.
z Main Specifications 3
Specifications
Item

Voltage Input Current Input
Input signal range 0 V to 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA
Max. rated input 0 V to 15 V 0 mA to 30 mA
External input impedance 200 kΩ min. Approx. 250 Ω
Resolution 1/4000 (full scale) 1/2000 (full scale)
Overall accuracy 25°C ±0.5% (full scale) ±0.6% (full scale)
0 to 60°C ±1.0% (full scale) ±1.2% (full scale)
-20 to 0°C ±1.3% (full scale) ±1.5% (full scale)
A/D conversion data 0000 to 0FA0 hex 0000 to 07D0 hex
Averaging function Not supported
Conversion time Inner sample time 2ms/point
Refresh time refers to 17-9 Analog Option Board Refresh Time in the
CP2E CPU Unit Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W614)
Isolation method None
Current consumption 5 VDC: 20 mA max.

Analog Output Option Board
z Analog Output Terminal Arrangement
VO1 Voltage Output 1

COM Output Common
z Main Specifications
Specifications
Item
Voltage Output Current Output
Output signal range 0 V to 10 V ---
External output allowable load resistance 2 kΩ min. ---
External output impedance 0.5 Ω max. ---
Resolution 1/4,000 (full scale) ---
Overall accuracy 25°C ±0.5% (full scale) ---
0 to 60°C ±1.0% (full scale) ---
-20 to 0°C ±1.3% (full scale) ---
D/A conversion data 0000 to 0FA0 hex ---
Conversion time Inner conversion time 2ms/point
Refresh time refers to 17-9 Analog Option Board Refresh Time in
the CP2E CPU Unit Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W614)

Analog I/O Option Board
z Analog I/O Terminal Arrangement
VI1 Voltage Input 1

II1 Current Input 1
VI2 Voltage Input 2
3-1 CPU Units

II2 Current Input 2
COM Analog I/O Common
COM Analog I/O Common
3
z Main Specifications

Specifications
Item
Voltage I/O Current I/O
Analog Input Input signal range 0 V to 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA
Section Max. rated input 0 V to 15 V 0 mA to 30 mA
External input impedance 200 kΩ min. Approx. 250 Ω
Resolution 1/4,000 (full scale) 1/2,000 (full scale)
Overall accuracy 25°C ±0.5% (full scale) ±0.6% (full scale)
0 to 60°C ±1.0% (full scale) ±1.2% (full scale)
-20 to 0°C ±1.3% (full scale) ±1.5% (full scale)
A/D conversion data 0000 to 0FA0 hex 0000 to 07D0 hex
Averaging function Not supported
Analog Output Output signal range 0 V to 10 V ---
Section External output allowable load 2 kΩ min. ---
resistance
External output impedance 0.5 Ω max. ---
Resolution 1/4,000 (full scale) ---
Overall accuracy 25°C ±0.5% (full scale) ---
0 to 60°C ±1.0% (full scale) ---
-20 to 0°C ±1.3% (full scale) ---
D/A conversion data 0000 to 0FA0 hex ---
Conversion time Inner conversion time 6ms (4CH total)
Refresh time refers to 17-9 Analog Option Board Refresh
Time in the CP2E CPU Unit Software User’s Manual (Cat.
No. W614)

3-2 Expansion I/O Units

This section describes the names of the Expansion I/O Unit parts and provides the input specifications
and terminal arrangement. Refer to A-1 Dimensions for the dimensions, A-2 Wiring Diagrams for the
wiring diagrams.
3-2-1 Expansion Input Unit

8-point Input Units (CP1W-8ED)
(1) Input terminals

(2) Expansion I/O
connecting cable
(4) Expansion connector

(1) Input terminals

(1) Input terminals Used to connect input devices.
(not removable)
(2) Expansion I/O connecting This is a connection cable to connect the adjacent CPU Unit, Expansion
cable I/O Unit, or Expansion Unit. For extended connections or vertical arrange-
ments, use the CP1W-CN811 I/O Connecting Cable (length: 800 mm).
(3) Input indicators Input status is displayed. An indicator will be ON when the input is ON.
(4) Expansion connector CP-series Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units can be connected.
The first word of input words allocated to the Expansion Input Unit is indicated by CIO m.
z Input Terminal Arrangement
Unit Upper Terminal Block Unit Lower Terminal Block
COM 01 03 04 06
00 02 COM 05 07
CIO m
Note COM terminals are connected inside.

3-2-2 Expansion Output Units

8-point Output Units

CP1W-8ER/8ET/8ET1 CP1W-16ER/ET/ET1

(2) Expansion I/O
(2) Expansion I/O NC COM COM COM 04 06 COM
connecting cable (3) Output indicators connecting cable

NC
OUT
00
CH
01 02 03 05 07
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
(4) Expansion connector 16ER
OUT
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP (3) Output indicators
3
NC 00 02 04 05 07 NC
(3) Output indicators NC COM 01 03 COM 06 NC

3-2-2 Expansion Output Units

CP1W-32ER/ET/ET1

(2) Expansion I/O
connecting cable

(1) Output terminals Used to connect output devices.
(not removable)
(2) Expansion I/O con- This is a connection cable to connect the adjacent CPU Unit, Expansion I/O
necting cable Unit, or Expansion Unit. For extended connections or vertical arrangements,
use the CP1W-CN811 I/O Connecting Cable (length: 800 mm).
(3) Output indicators Output status is displayed. An indicator will be ON when output is ON.

The first word of output words allocated to the Expansion Output Unit is indicated by CIO n.
z 8-point Output Units (CP1W-8E)

COM 01 03 04 06
00 02 COM 05 07
CIO n
z 16-point Output Units (CP1W-16E)
NC COM COM COM 04 06 COM NC 00 02 04 05 07 NC
NC 00 01 02 03 05 07 NC COM 01 03 COM 06 NC
CIO n CIO n+1

NC : No connection
z Units with 32 Output Points (CP1W-32E)
Unit Upper Terminal Block
CIO n CIO n+1
NC COM COM COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07 NC NC NC
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 NC NC NC
CIO n CIO n+1
Unit Lower Terminal Block
CIO n+2 CIO n+3
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 NC
CIO n+2 CIO n+3

NC : No connection

3-2-3 Expansion I/O Units

Units with 20 I/O Points Units with 40 I/O Points

CP1W-20EDR1/EDT/EDT1 CP1W-40 EDR/EDT/EDT1

(1) Input terminals
(2) Expansion I/O (1) Input terminals
connecting cable (2) Expansion I/O
connecting cable
(5) Expansion
connector (5) Expansion
connector

3
3-2-3 Expansion I/O Units


(1) Input terminals Used to connect input devices.
(not removable)
(2) Expansion I/O This is a connection cable to connect the adjacent CPU Unit, Expansion I/O
connecting cable Unit, or Expansion Unit. For extended connections or vertical arrangements,
use the CP1W-CN811 I/O Connecting Cable (length: 800 mm).
(3) Output terminals Used to connect output devices.
(not removable)
(4) Input indicators Input status is displayed. An indicator will be ON when the input is ON.
(6) Output indicators Output status is displayed. An indicator will be ON when the output is ON.

The first word of input words allocated to the Expansion I/O Unit is indicated by CIO m and the first word
of the output words by CIO n.
z 20-point I/O Units (CP1W-20ED)

• Input (Unit Upper Terminal Block)

COM 01 03 05 07 09 11
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 NC : No connection
CIO m
• Output (Unit Lower Terminal Block)

00 01 02 04 05 07
COM COM COM 03 COM 06
CIO n
z 40-point I/O Units (CP1W-40ED)

• Input (Unit Upper Terminal Block)
CIO m CIO m+1
NC NC COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
NC NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
CIO m CIO m+1

NC : No connection
• Output (Unit Lower Terminal Block)
CIO n CIO n+1
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06
CIO n CIO n+1

NC : No connection

3-2-4 I/O Specifications

This section describes the I/O specifications common to all Expansion I/O Units.

I/O Specifications
z Input Specifications
(CP1W-8ED/20EDR1/20EDT/20EDT1/40EDR/40EDT/40EDT1)
Item Specification
Input voltage 24 VDC, +10% / -15%
Input impedance 4.7 kΩ
Input current 5 mA typical 3
ON voltage / current 14.4 VDC min. / 3mA min.
OFF voltage / current 5.0 VDC max. / 1mA max.

ON response time 1 ms max.*
OFF response time 1 ms max.*
IN
Input indicator
Isolation Internal
IN
circuits circuits
COM
* The response time is the delay caused by hardware. The delay set in the PLC Setup (0 to 32 ms, default: 8 ms)
must be added to this value. For the CP1W-40EDR/EDT/EDT1, a fixed value of 16 ms must be added.

Do not apply voltage in excess of the rated voltage to the input terminal.

z Output Specifications for Relay Outputs

(CP1W-8ER/16ER/20EDR1/32ER/40EDR)
Item Specification
Maximum switching capacity 2 A 250 VAC (cosφ = 1), 2 A 24 VDC (4 A/common)
Minimum switching capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Service Electrical Resistive 150,000 operations (24 VDC)
life of load
relay Inductive 100,000 operations (240 VAC, cosφ = 0.4)
load
Mechanical 20,000,000 operations
ON response time 15 ms max.
OFF response time 15 ms max.
OUT
Output indicator
Internal OUT
circuits
COM 250 VAC, 2A,

24 VDC, 2 A
max.
• Estimating the Service Life of Relays

The service life of output contacts is as shown in the following diagram.
120-VAC resistive load

300
24 VDC, τ = 7 ms
200
120 VAC COSφ = 0.4
240 VAC COSφ = 0.4
100
24-VDC/240-VAC resistive load
50
Life (× 104)
30
20
10
5
3
2
Switching frequency: 1,800 operations/hour
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2 3 5
Contact current (A)
• Restrictions of CP1W-16ER/32ER
Limit the output load current to satisfy the following derating curve.
CP1W-16ER/32ER
Output load current(%)

100
Power
voltage:
21.6 VDC
50
Power
voltage:
20.4 VDC
43 55 60
Ambient temperature (˚C)

• CP1W-32ER’s maximum number of simultaneously ON output points is 24 (75%).
Relation between Number of ON Outputs and

Ambient Temperature (CP1W-32ER)
Number of inputs ON
simultaneously (%)

75
0
60
Ambient temperature (˚C)
According to the ambient temperature, there are restrictions on power supply voltage and output load 3
current for the CPU Units connected with the Expansion I/O Units (CP1W-8ER/16ER/20EDR1/
32ER/40EDR). Use the PLC in the range of the power supply voltage and output load current as show

below.
• The ambient temperature is restricted for the CPU Units.
Derating curve of the output load current for Expansion I/O Units (CP1W-8ER/16ER/20EDR1/
32ER/40EDR).
Connected to Connected to Connected to Connected to
CP2E-N30DR-D CP2E-N40DR-D CP2E-30DT-D CP2E-40DT-D
100% 100% 100% 100%

Power
Power voltage:
Power voltage: voltage: Power voltage:
21.6 VDC 21.6 VDC
21.6 VDC 21.6 VDC
50% 50% 50% 50%
Power
Power voltage:
Power voltage: Power voltage:
voltage: 20.4 VDC
20.4 VDC 20.4 VDC
20.4 VDC
0% 0%
0% 0% 35 45 60°C 35 45 60°C
35 45 60°C 30 45 60°C Ambient temperature
Ambient temperature Ambient temperature
Ambient temperature
Connected to
CP2E-N60DR-D
CP2E-60DT-D
100%
Power voltage:
21.6VDC
50%
Power voltage:
20.4VDC
0%
40 45 60˚C
Ambient temperature

z Output Specifications for Transistor Outputs (Sinking or Sourcing)

Specification
Item CP1W-40EDT CP1W-32ET CP1W-20EDT CP1W-16ET CP1W-8ET
CP1W-40EDT1 CP1W-32ET1 CP1W-20EDT1 CP1W-16ET1 CP1W-8ET1
Maximum 4.5 to 30 VDC 4.5 to 30 VDC 24 VDC +10%/-5% 4.5 to 30 VDC 4.5 to 30 VDC
switching 0.3 A/output 0.3 A/output 0.3 A/output 0.3 A/output 0.3 A/output
capacity*1 0.9 A/common 0.9 A/common 0.9 A/common 0.9 A/common 0.9 A/common
3.6 A/Unit 7.2 A/Unit 1.8 A/Unit 3.6 A/Unit 1.8 A/Unit
Leakage 0.1 mA max. 0.1 mA max. 0.1 mA max. 0.1 mA max. 0.1 mA max.
current
Residual 1.5 V max. 1.5 V max. 1.5 V max. 1.5 V max. 1.5 V max.
voltage
ON response 0.1 ms max. 0.1 ms max. 0.1 ms 0.1 ms max. 0.1 ms max.
time
OFF response 1 ms max. 1 ms max. 1 ms max. 1 ms max. 1 ms max.
time At 24 VDC +10%/ At 24 VDC +10%/ At 24 VDC +10%/ At 24 VDC +10%/ At 24 VDC +10%/
-5%, 5 to 300 mA -5%, 5 to 300 mA -5%, 5 to 300 mA -5%, 5 to 300 mA -5%, 5 to 300 mA
Maximum 16 points 24 points 8 points 16 points 8 points
number of (100% load) (100% load) (100% load) (100% load) (100% load)
simultaneously
ON outputs
Fuse*2 1 fuse/common
Circuit Sinking Sourcing
configuration
Output indicator Output indicator
OUT
L
COM(+)
L Internal 24 VDC/
Internal OUT 24 VDC/ circuits 4.5 to 30 VDC
circuits 4.5 to 30 VDC
OUT
L
COM(–) L
OUT
*1 If the ambient temperature is maintained below 50ºC, up to 0.9 A/common can be used.
(A)
0.9
Total current per common
0.7
0 50 60 (°C)
Ambient temperature
*2 The fuse cannot be replaced by the user. Replace the Unit if the fuse breaks due to an short-circuit or overcur-
rent.

Do not connect a load to an output terminal or apply a voltage in excess of the maximum switch-
ing capacity.

4
Programming Device
This section describes the features of the CX-Programmer used for programming and
debugging PLCs, as well as how to connect the PLC with the Programming Device.
4
4-1 Applicable Programming Devices for CP2E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4-2 Connecting by USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-3 Connection Method with an Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-4 Connection Method with a Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

4 Programming Device
4-1 Applicable Programming Devices for

CP2E
A programming device is a software application for initializing, programming, monitoring, and debug-
ging PLCs. This section describes the programming device used by CP2E.
Applicable Programming Devices

The programming devices in the following table are used to program and monitor the CP2E Unit.
CP2E CPU Units are supported by CX-One version 4.51 or higher and CX-Programmer version 9.72 or
higher.
Sopport Software
• CX-Programmer
• CX-Simulator
CX-One • CX-Integrator
• Switch Box Utility
CP2E CPU Unit
Application CX-One Software Description

CX-Programmer Basic software for creating and debugging PLC programs.
Programming
SwitchBox Utility Utility software to support PLC debugging operations.
Software for starting and setting FA networks, such as Controller Link,
Network settings CX-Integrator DeviceNet, CompoWay/F, Ethernet, and CompoNet. Includes routing table com-
ponents, data link components, and DeviceNet Configurator functions.
Software for simulating PLC operations on a personal computer and debugging
Simulation CX-Simulator
programs without requiring a CPU Unit.

CX-Programmer
The CX-Programmer is a basic software application for creating and debugging PLC programs.
4-1 Applicable Programming Devices for CP2E

Ladder
Ladder language
Programming FBs
language
ST language
Programming functions
Simulation
CX-Programmer
Debugging and
Monitoring maintenance
functions
CPU Unit
PLC Setup
parameters
4
CX-Integrator
The CX-Integrator is a software application for setting up Ethernet.
Routing table settings
Network configuration General network

CX-Integrator
reading settings and monitoring
Network testing

4-2 Connecting by USB

This section describes how to connect the CX-Programmer with the CP2E E/S-type CPU Unit.
Preparations for Connection

In order to connect the PLC to a personal computer by USB, a USB driver must be installed in the per-
sonal computer. When installing the CX-One, the installer automatically stores the USB driver for USB
connections in the following directory on the OS disc drive:
C:\ProgramFiles\OMRON\CX-Server\USB
When the personal computer is connected to the PLC by USB cable, the personal computer automati-
cally recognizes the device and the USB driver installation is started. For details on how to install the
USB driver, refer to CX-Programmer’s manual.
Connection Methods
Using commercially available USB cable, connect the CX-Programmer to the peripheral USB port on
the CPU Unit.
Computer
CX-Programmer
USB port
A connector B connector CP2E CPU Unit
Commercially available
USB cable*
Peripheral USB port

(Conforming to USB 2.0, B connector)
* Commercially available USB cable: 5 m max., for USB 2.0.
Use the following cable to connect the CP2E CPU Unit to the CX-Programmer.
Port at Network type
Port at Unit Model numbers Length
computer (communications mode)
Peripheral USB port USB port USB 2.0 (or 1.1) Commercially available USB 5m max.
(Conforming to USB 2.0, cable (A connector - B con-
B connector) nector)

Restrictions on Connecting by USB

The following restrictions apply to the connection of the CP2E to a computer due to the USB specifica-
tions. Keep these restrictions in mind when using the USB port.
• Only one CP2E CPU Unit can be connected by USB to a single personal computer. It is not possible
to connect multiple CP2E CPU Units simultaneously.
• Do not remove the USB cable while connected online. The application must be offline before the
cable is removed. The CX-Programmer will not go online simply by reinserting the USB cable. Place
the CX-Programmer offline before reinserting the USB cable, then place it online again.
4-2 Connecting by USB

• If the cycle time is too long, it may result the communication failure when CX-Programmer tries to
work online. In this case, click the Settings button on the right side of Network Type in the Change
PLC dialog box and increase the value in Response Timeout(s).

4-3 Connection Method with an Ethernet

Port
This section describes how to connect the CX-Programmer with the CP2E N -type CPU Unit.
Connection Method
Using commercially available Ethernet cable, connect the CX-Programmer to the built-in Ethernet port.
Computer
CX-Programmer
Note
・Either PORT1A or PORT1B of the CP2E N-type CPU
Unit can be connected.
Ethernet cable ・Connect the computer to the CP2E built-in Ethernet port by
an Ethernet cable.
Built-in Ethernet port
Use the following cable to connect the CP2E CPU Unit to the CX-Programmer.
• Twisted-pair cable
UTP (Unshielded): Category 5, 5e
STP (Shielded): Category 5, 5e
Connection Procedure
CX-Programmer supports two methods for connecting online to the target PLC, which are auto online
and normal online.
z Auto Online
You can automatically and easily connect online to a PLC when PC and target PLC are in same
local network by using auto online function.
1 Connect the Ethernet port to the computer via a twisted-pair cable or hub according to the con-
nection type (Refer to A-5 Network Installation).

2 Select DirectEthernetUtility from the Menu as follow.
4-3 Connection Method with an Ethernet Port

3 Select a target network card to connect with.
4 Open the CX-Programmer and click the PLC button as follow.

5 Select the CP1/CP2 Ethernet Online item. The user can also click the button in the Tool-
bars.
6 Select a connection type
Direct connection is possible only when a PLC and a computer are connected 1:1. In other cir-
cumstances, select HUB connection.
a. Choose the Direct Connection item and click the Connect button. Then connection online is
completed.

b. Choose the Hub Connection item and click Browse button to select the PLC which user
wants to connect.

4

Click the Connect button to connect and then connection online is completed.

z Normal Online
To connect with a PLC via Ethernet, there are two types of hardware connections that can be used
(Refer to A-6 Network Installation). These are described in the following table.

Connection Type Ethernet - Direct connection Ethernet - HUB connection
Connection diagram
Description The Ethernet port on the computer is The Ethernet port on the computer is
connected directly to the Ethernet port connected to a hub and then the CX-
on the PLC with a twisted-pair cable. Programmer is placed online with a
PLC through the Ethernet network.
Network Type Ethernet (FINS/TCP) Ethernet or Ethernet (FINS/TCP)
Destination PLC IP setting No need Need
PC IP setting No need Need
4
Network Type
Network Type Ethernet Ethernet (FINS/TCP)
Protocol FINS/UDP FINS/TCP
Features A standard protocol for host computers A standard protocol for host computers
with HUB connection only. with either Direct connection or HUB
connection.
z Ethernet - Direct Connection

When the Ethernet port on the computer is connected directly to the Ethernet port on the PLC with a
twisted-pair cable, this mode can be selected as the connection method.
In this mode, user need not change the IP setting in PC side.
1 Select the PLC type as CP2E-N in Device Type in the CX-Programmer’s Change PLC Dialog
Box.

2 Set Ethernet (FINS/TCP) in Network Type.
3 Click the Settings button on the right side of Network Type. The settings in the Network Tab
and in the Driver are as follow dialogue boxes.


4 Click the OK button and finish the settings of the direct connection.
4
5 Then connect to the CP2E by executing the CX-Programmer’s online connection command.
z Ethernet - HUB connection

When the Ethernet port on the computer is connected to a hub and then the CX-Programmer is
placed online with a PLC through the Ethernet network, this mode can be selected as the connec-
tion method.
In this mode, user should change the IP setting in PC side in a same subnet as PLC.
1 The settings of PLC type and CPU type are the same as Ethernet - Direct connection.
2 Set Network Type. Both Ethernet and Ethernet (FINS/TCP) are supported. In the following we
will use Ethernet (FINS/TCP) as the sample.
The settings of Network Tab in Network Settings are also the same as those in the Ethernet -
Direct connection.

3 Set the connection type as Ethernet - HUB connection in Driver Tab.
4 Set the target PLC’s IP Address.

If do not know the target PLC’s IP address, user can click the Browse button on the right side of
IP Address and it will show a dialogue box as follow. The CX-Programmer will automatically
search CP2E series PLCs under the same segment in the local area. All PLC found by CX-Pro-
grammer will be listed with the IP address, PLC’s type and MAC ID in the Select Target IP
Address dialogue box. Choose a target PLC to be connected and click the OK button.
5 Change the IP setting in PC side to an IP address in same subnet as the target PLC.
6 Click the OK button in the Network Settings dialogue box and finish the settings.
7 Then connect to the CP2E by executing the CX-Programmer’s online connection command.

4-4 Connection Method with a Serial Port

This section describes how to connect the CX-Programmer with the CP2E CPU Unit.
4-4 Connection Method with a Serial Port

Connection Method
Connect the CX-Programmer to the serial communication port.
Computer
CX-Programmer
D-Sub connector
(9-pin, female)
Recommended cable
for CP1W-CIF01
XW2Z-200S-CV (2 m) or D-Sub connector
XW2Z-500S-CV (5 m) (9-pin, male)
4
CP2E N-type CPU Unit
Connect the Programming Device using the Connecting Cable that is appropriate for the serial commu-
nications mode of the computer and CPU Unit.
Computer Connecting Cable CP2E CPU Unit
Connector Model Length Connector Serial communications mode
D-Sub 9 pin, male XW2Z-200S-CV 2m D-Sub 9 pin, female (With Host Link
XW2Z-500S-CV 5m a CP1W-CIF01 mounted (SYSWAY)
in option board slot)
Refer to the cable mentioned Terminal Block (With a
in A-3 built-in RS-232C port or a
CP2W-CIFDF mounted
in option board slot)


5
Installation and Wiring
This section describes how to install and wire CP2E Units.
5-1 Fail-safe Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

5-2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5
5-2-1 Installation Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-2-2 Unit Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-2-3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-2-4 Connecting Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5-3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-3-1 Wiring Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-3-2 Wiring Power Supply and Ground Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-3-3 I/O Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5-3-4 Wiring Safety and Noise Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5-3-5 Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

5-1 Fail-safe Circuits

This section describes the fail-safe circuits that must be set up outside the CP2E.
Always set up safety circuits outside of the PLC to prevent dangerous conditions in the event of errors in
the CP2E CPU Unit or external power supply.
In particular, be careful of the following points.
Timing of Supplying Power to the PLC and the Controlled System

If the PLC’s power supply is turned ON after the controlled system’s power supply, outputs in Units such
as DC Output Units may momentarily not function properly.
To prevent any malfunction, add an external circuit that prevents the power supply to the controlled sys-
tem from going ON before the power supply to the PLC itself.
Safety Circuit for Errors (Outputs Turned OFF)

When any of the following errors occur, PLC operation (program execution) will stop and all outputs
from the Units will be turned OFF.
• A CPU error (watchdog timer error) or CPU on standby
• A fatal error (memory error, I/O bus error, too many I/O points error, program error, cycle time
exceeded error, FALS error or built-in Ethernet stop error)
Be sure to add any circuits necessary outside of the PLC to ensure the safety of the system in the event
of an error that stops PLC operation.
Safety Circuit after a Malfunction (When an Output Remains ON)

It is possible for an output to remain ON due to a malfunction in the internal circuitry of the Output Unit,
such as a relay or transistor malfunction. Always add any circuits necessary outside of the PLC to
ensure the safety of the system in the event that an output fails to go OFF.
External Interlock Circuits

When the PLC controls operation such as the clockwise and counterclockwise operation of a motor and
if there is any possibility of an accident or mechanical damage due to faulty PLC operation, provide an
external interlock such as the one shown below to prevent both the forward and reverse outputs from
turning ON at the same time.
Example:
Interlock Circuits A circuit like the one shown in the dia-
MC2 Motor gram on the left is required to prevent
100.00 outputs MC1 and MC2 from both being
MC1 clockwise
operation
ON at the same time even if both PLC
CP2E outputs CIO 100.00 and CIO 100.01
MC1 Motor are both ON.
100.01
MC2 counterclock
wise operation

5-2 Installation
This section describes the environmental factors that must be considered and the installation location of
each Unit.
Installation Environment
Do not install the Unit in the following locations.
• Locations subject to ambient temperatures lower than -20ºC or higher than 60ºC.
• Locations subject to drastic temperature changes or condensation.
• Locations subject to ambient humidity lower than 10% or higher than 90%.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
5-2 Installation
• Locations subject to excessive dust, salt, or metal filings.
• Locations that would subject the PLC to direct shock or vibration.
• Locations exposed to direct sunlight.
• Locations that would subject the PLC to water, oil, or chemical reagents.
5
Always enclose or protect the PLC sufficiently in the following locations.
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.

• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power lines.
Installation in Cabinets or Control Panels

When the CP2E is being installed in a cabinet or control panel, be sure to provide proper ambient con-
ditions as well as access for operation and maintenance.
z Installation Orientation
When installing the CP2E in a control panel, it must be installed with the side with indicators and
communications ports facing the front to ensure proper heat dissipation.
OK

Not possible
z Accessibility for Operation and Maintenance

• To ensure safe access for operation and maintenance, separate the PLC as much as possible
from high-voltage equipment and moving machinery.
• The PLC will be easiest to install and operate if it is mounted at a height of 1.0 to 1.6 m above the
floor.
WARNING
Do not touch the power supply or the area around the I/O terminals while
power is being supplied or immediately after power has been turned OFF.
Doing so may result in burns.

After the power supply has been turned OFF, wait until the PLC has sufficiently cooled before
touching it.

z Improving Noise Resistance

Leave space between the CP2E and control panel or other devices to allow adequate dissipation of
heat generated by the power supply.
• Do not mount the PLC in a control panel containing high-voltage equipment.
• Install the PLC at least 200 mm (6.5 feet) from power lines.
Power Line
200 mm min.
SYSMAC CP2E
200 mm min.
• Ground the mounting plate between the PLC and the mounting surface.
5-2 Installation
z Temperature Control
The ambient operating temperature around the CP2E must be between -20 and 60ºC. Observe the
following precautions.
• Provide enough space for good air flow.
• Do not install the PLC above equipment that generates a large amount of heat such as heaters, 5
transformers, or high-capacity resistors.
• If the ambient temperature exceeds 60ºC, install a cooling fan or air conditioner.

Fan
Control panel
SYSMAC
CP2E
Louver

5-2-2 Unit Arrangement

This section describes how to arrange the CP2E Units.
As shown in the following diagrams, Units can be arranged in one or two rows when Expansion I/O
Units or Expansion Units are used.
Arrangement in One Row

Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units can be installed in a side-by-side arrangement.
CP2E CPU Unit
CP-series Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units

When connecting CP-series Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units to a CPU Unit with AC
power, provide a space of approximately 10 mm between the CPU Unit and the first Expansion
Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
If sufficient space cannot be provided between the CPU Unit and the first Expansion Unit or
Expansion I/O Unit, use the PLC in an ambient temperature of -20 to 50°C.
Arrangement in Two Rows

The Units can be arranged in two rows using the CP1W-CN811 I/O Connecting Cable (800 mm).
CP1W-CN811 I/O
Connecting Cable

I/O Connecting Cable can be used in one place only in each CP2E PLC. It cannot be used in
more than one place in the same CP2E PLC.

5-2-3 Installation
This section describes how to install the CP2E.
Dimensions and Installation Height
z Dimensions
• E/S-type CPU Units
W1 80
W2 8
5-2 Installation
110 100 90
4-φ4.5
5
• N-type CPU Units
5-2-3 Installation
W1 80
W2 8
110 100 90
4-φ4.5
Model number W1 W2
CP2E-14D- 86 76
CP2E-20D- 86 76
CP2E-30D- 130 120
CP2E-40D- 150 140
CP2E-60D- 195 185
z Installation Height
The installation height is approximately 90 mm.
When a cable is connected to an Option Board, however, the additional height must be included.
Always allow for the additional height when considering the depth of the control panel in which the
PLC is to be mounted.

Installation Methods
There are two installation methods.
z DIN Track Installation

• Units can be mounted to PEP-50N (50 cm) or PEP-100N/100N2 (100 cm) DIN Tracks.
• Units can be moved and removed easily.
• The installation height in the control panel will be increased depending on the type of DIN tracks
used.
z Surface Installation
Units can be directly mounted in the control panel using M4 screws.
Installation Example
z DIN Track Installation

Secure the DIN Track with screws in at least three places.
DIN Track
Secure with screws
A CP2E CPU Unit and CP-series Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units can be mounted using
M4 screws. For restrictions on the number of Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units that can be
connected, refer to 2-3 Expansion I/O Unit or Expansion Unit.
DIN Track Installation
1 Use a screwdriver to pull down the DIN Track mounting pins from the back of the Units to
release them, and mount the Units to the DIN Track.
Release

2 Fit the back of the Units onto the DIN Track by catching (1) the top of the Units on the Track and
then pressing (2) in at the bottom of the Units, as shown below.
(1)
DIN Track
(2)
5-2 Installation
3 Press in all of the DIN Track mounting pins to securely lock the Units in place.
5-2-3 Installation
Mounting Brackets
z DIN Track
Secure the DIN Track to the control panel using M4 screws at interval of 210 mm or less (6 holes or
fewer). The tightening torque is 1.2 N·m.
PFP-100N2 28-25 × 4.5 long holes

16
4.5
30±0.3 27 zz 29.2
15 25 25 25 25 15 1 1.5
10 10
1000
PFP-100N/50N 7.3±0.15
4.5
35±0.3 27±0.15
15 25 25 25 25 15(5)* 1
10 10
1000(500)*
*PFP-50N dimensions are given in parentheses.

z End Plate
Use the PFP-M End Plates to secure the Units so that they do not move towards one end or the
other of the DIN Track.
Surface Installation
• Create the mounting holes in the mounting surface as shown in the dimensions diagrams.
• Align the CP2E CPU Unit with the mounting holes and secure it in place with M4 screws.
z Surface Installation Mounting Hole Pitch

• CP2E CPU Units, Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units
Mounting hole
Unit
pitch A (mm)
CP2E CPU Units Unit with 14 I/O points 76±0.5
Unit with 20 I/O points 76±0.5
A Unit with 60 I/O points 185±0.5
Expansion I/O Units Unit with 8 input points 56±0.2
Unit with 8 output 56±0.2
CP2E CPU Unit, points
100mm Expansion Unit or
Expansion I/O Unit Unit with 16 output 76±0.2
points
8mm
Analog I/O Units Analog I/O 76±0.2
Analog input
Analog output
Temperature Sen- Except CP1W-TS004 76±0.2
sor Units
CP1W-TS004 140±0.2

Using Wiring Ducts

Whenever possible, route I/O wiring through wiring ducts. Install the ducts so that it is easy to wire the
I/O Units through the ducts. It is handy to have the ducts at the same height as the Racks. Use mount-
ing bases if necessary to adjust the heights.
81.6~89.0mm
Duct
20mm min.
CPU
Rack
30mm
Unit DIN Track 30mm Mounting bracket
40mm
Duct
20mm min.
Duct
5-2 Installation
Tighten terminal block screws and cable screws to the following torques.
M4: 1.2 N·m
M3: 0.5 N·m
5
z Routing Wiring Ducts
5-2-3 Installation
Install the wiring ducts at least 20 mm between the tops of the Racks and any other objects, (e.g.,
ceiling, wiring ducts, structural supports, devices, etc.) to provide enough space for air circulation
and replacement of Units.
Input duct Output duct Power duct
200 mm min.
Breaker
CP2E Fuse
Power
equipment,
such as
transformers
and magnetic
relays
Fuses, timers,
relays, etc. Terminal
(Not blocks for Terminal blocks
heat-generatin PLC for power
g equipment or equipment
power
equipment.)

5-2-4 Connecting Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units

This section describes how to connect Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units.
Connection Methods
1 Remove the cover from the CPU Unit’s or the Expansion I/O Unit’s expansion connector. Use a
flat-head screwdriver to remove the cover from the Expansion I/O Connector.
Expansion Connector
Cover
(1) Remove
2 Insert the Expansion I/O Unit’s connecting cable into the CPU Unit’s or the Expansion I/O Unit’s
expansion connector.
IN
OUT
(2) Insert
3 Attach the cover to the CPU Unit’s or the Expansion I/O Unit’s expansion connector.
IN
OUT
(3) Attach

Precautions on Connecting Units

The following restrictions apply to the CP-series Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units that can be
connected to CP2E CPU Units.
z Maximum Number of Connectable Units

With an E30/40/60, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Unit, a total of up to three Expansion I/O Units and
Expansion Units can be connected to one CPU Unit. It is not possible to connect Expansion I/O
Units and Expansion Units to E14/20 or N14/20 CPU Units.
5-2 Installation
5
5-2-4 Connecting Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units

5-3 Wiring
This section describes wiring methods for the CPU Unit.
5-3-1 Wiring Procedure

Make sure that the power supply is OFF before beginning wiring.
1. Prepare the parts required for wiring. Prepare crimp terminals and cables for −
wiring.
2. Connect the power supply terminals. Connect power supply to power supply Refer to 5-3-2 Wiring Power Supply
terminals L1 and L2/N. and Ground Lines.
Ground to 100 Ω or less. Refer to 5-3-2 Wiring Power Supply

3. Ground the ground terminal( ). and Ground Lines.
4. Connect the input terminals. Connect sensors and switches to the Refer to 5-3-3 I/O Wiring.
terminals.
5. Connect the output terminals. Connect loads to the terminals. Refer to 5-3-3 I/O Wiring.
5-3-2 Wiring Power Supply and Ground Lines
Wiring AC Power Supply and Ground

100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
R S
MCCB
Upper Terminal Block
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
LG: Functional ground terminal GR: Protective ground terminal
Ground to 100 Ω or less
• Wire a separate circuit for the power supply circuit so that there is no voltage drop from the inrush
current or startup current that flows when other equipment is turned ON.
• When several CP2E PLCs are being used, it is recommended to wire the PLCs on separate cir-
cuits to prevent a voltage drop from the inrush current or incorrect operation of the circuit breaker.

z AC Power Supply Wiring

• Use twisted-pair power supply cables to prevent noise from the power supply lines.
Adding a 1:1 isolating transformer reduces electrical noise even further.
• Consider the possibility of voltage drops and the allowable current, and always use thick power
lines.
• Use round crimp terminals for AC power supply wiring.
6.2 mm max.
• Use a power supply within the allowable voltage fluctuation range (85 to 264 VAC).
z Grounding
• Always ground the ground terminal to 100 Ω or less to protect against electric shock and incorrect
operation from electrical noise.
• If one phase of the power supply is grounded, connect the grounded phase to the L2/N terminal.
5-3 Wiring
• The GR terminal is a ground terminal. To prevent electrical shock, use a dedicated ground line (2
mm2 min.) of 100 Ω or less.
• The line ground terminal (LG) is a noise-filtered neutral terminal. If noise is a significant source of
errors or if electrical shocks are a problem, connect the line ground terminal (LG) to the ground
terminal (GR) and ground both with a ground resistance of 100 Ω or less. 5
• To prevent electrical shock when short-circuiting between the LG and GR terminals, always use a
ground of 100 Ω or less.
5-3-2 Wiring Power Supply and Ground Lines

• Do not connect ground lines to other devices or to the frame of a building. Doing so will reverse
the effectiveness of the ground and instead have a bad influence.
z Isolation Transformer
The PLC’s internal noise isolation circuits are sufficient to control typical noise in power supply lines.
Ground noise can be further reduced by providing the power supply through a 1:1 isolating trans-
former. Do not ground the secondary coil of the transformer.
WARNING
Tighten the AC power supply terminal screws to a torque of 0.5 N·m.
Loose screws may result in fire or malfunction.

The power supply terminals are located at the top of the Unit. Do not connect a power supply to
the 24-VDC external supply terminals on the bottom of the Unit. Internal circuits may be dam-
aged if power is supplied to these terminals.

Wiring DC Power Supply and Ground
24VDC
+ -
MCCB
Upper Terminal Block

+ - COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
GR:Protective ground terminal
Ground to 100Ω or less
• Wire a separate circuit for the power supply circuit so that there is no voltage drop from the inrush
current or startup current that flows when other equipment is turned ON.
• When several CP2E PLCs are being used, it is recommended to wire the PLCs on separate cir-
cuits to prevent a voltage drop from the inrush current or incorrect operation of the circuit breaker.
z DC Power Supply Wiring

• Use crimp terminals or solid wire for power supply wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals.
6.2mm max. 6.2mm max.
• M3 self-rising terminal screws are used. Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.5
N·m.
• Use a power supply within the allowable voltage fluctuation range (20.4 to 26.4 VDC).
• The maximum power consumption is 20 W for E30/40/60, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Units, 13 W
for E14/20 or N14/20 CPU Units.
• There will be a inrush current of about five times that level when the power is turned ON.
z Grounding
• Always ground the ground terminal to 100Ω or less to protect against electric shock and incorrect
operation from electrical noise.
• The GR terminal is a ground terminal. To prevent electrical shock, use a dedicated ground line
(2mm2 min.) of 100Ω or less.
• Do not connect ground lines to other devices or to the frame of a building. Doing so will reverse
the effectiveness of the ground and instead have a bad influence.

• Be sure not to reverse the positive and negative leads when wiring the power supply termi-
nals.
• Supply power to all of the Power Supply Units from the same source.
• Use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supplies connected to DC
Power Supply Units to comply with EC (Low Voltage Directive) Directives.

5-3-3 I/O Wiring
I/O Wiring

• Never apply a voltage that exceeds the input voltage for Input Units or the maximum switching
capacity for Output Units.
• When the power supply has positive and negative terminals, always wire them correctly.
• Do not bend the I/O Connecting cable past its natural bending radius or pull in it with excessive
force. Doing so will damage the cable.
z Wire Sizes
• AWG22 to AWG18 (0.32 to 0.82 mm2) power lines are recommended.
5-3 Wiring
• The current capacity of electric wire depends on factors such as the ambient temperature and
insulation thickness, as well as the gauge of the wire.
z Crimp Terminals
• M3 self-rising terminal screws are used. 5
• Use crimp terminals or solid wire for wiring.
• Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals.
5-3-3 I/O Wiring

• Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.5 N·m.
• Use crimp terminals (M3) having the dimensions shown below.
6.2 mm max. 6.2 mm max.
z Wiring
• Wire the Units so that they can be easily replaced.
• Make sure that the I/O indicators are not covered by the wiring.
• Do not place the I/O wiring in the same conduits or ducts as high-voltage or power lines. Inductive
noise can cause errors or damage.
• Tighten the terminal screws to the torque of 0.5 N·m.
Unit type Terminal width Terminal pitch

CPU Units 6.4mm 7.6mm
Expansion I/O Units 6.4mm 7.7mm
40ED/32E/20EDT
Expansion I/O Units 6.8mm 8.4mm
AD04/DA0/MAD/TS0/
20EDR1/16E/8E
Terminal Terminal
width pitch

Example of Input Device Connections

Use the following information for reference when selecting or connecting input devices.
z DC Input Units
Connectable DC Input Devices (for DC Output Models)
Contact outputs Two-wire, DC outputs
IN
CP2E IN CP2E
COM Sensor power + COM 2
supply
NPN open-collector outputs NPN current outputs
+ Sensor power +
supply Current
Outputs CP2E regulator Outputs
IN IN CP2E
5mA/
5mA/7.5mA 2 7.5mA Sensor power +
0V
COM COM 2
0V supply
PNP current outputs Voltage outputs
+ Sensor power +
supply COM 2
Outputs Outputs
IN CP2E IN CP2E
0V
5mA/7.5mA COM 1 Sensor power
0V supply
The circuit below should NOT be used for I/O devices

having a voltage output.
+ Sensor power
supply
Outputs
IN CP2E
0V
COM 1

Precautions When Connecting a Two-wire DC Sensor

When using a two-wire sensor with a 24-VDC input device, check that the following conditions have
been met. Failure to meet these conditions may result in operating errors.
(1) Relation between voltage when the PLC is ON and the sensor residual voltage:
VON≤VCC −VR
(2) Relation between current when the PLC is ON and sensor control output (load cur-
rent):
IOUT(min)≤ION≤IOUT(max)
ION=(VCC −VR −1.5[PLC internal residual voltage]*)/RIN
When ION is smaller than IOUT (min), connect a bleeder resistor R.
The bleeder resistor constant can be calculated as follows:
R≤(VCC −VR)/(IOUT(min) −ION)
5-3 Wiring
Power W≥(VCC −VR)2/R × 4(allowable margin)
(3) Relation between current when the PLC is OFF and sensor leakage current:
IOFF≥Ileak
Connect a bleeder resistor if Ileak is greater than IOFF. 5
Use the following equation to calculate the bleeder resistance constant.
R≤RIN × VOFF/(Ileak×RIN −VOFF)
5-3-3 I/O Wiring

Power W≥(VCC − VR)2/R × 4(allowable margin)
DC Input Unit
Two-wire sensor VR R RIN
VCC
Vcc: Power voltage

Vr: Sensor output residual voltage
Von: PLC ON voltage
Iout: Sensor control current (load current)
Voff: PLC OFF voltage
Ion: PLC ON current
Ileak: Sensor leakage current
Ioff: PLC OFF current
R: Bleeder resistance
Rin: PLC input impedance
(4) Precautions on Sensor Inrush Current

An incorrect input may occur due to sensor inrush current if a sensor is turned ON after the
PLC has started up to the point where inputs are possible.
Determine the time required for sensor operation to stabilize after the sensor is turned ON
and take appropriate measures, such as inserting into the program a timer delay after turn-
ing ON the sensor.

z Programming Example
In this example, the sensor’s power supply voltage is used as the input to CIO 0.00.
A 100-ms timer delay (the time required for an OMRON Proximity Sensor to stabilize) is created in
the program.
After the Completion Flag for the timer turns ON, the sensor input on input bit CIO 0.01 will cause
output bit CIO 100.00 to turn ON.
0.00
TIM
100
#0001
T100 0.01
100.00
Output Wiring
z Protective Circuit for Load Short-circuits

If a load connected to the output terminals is short-circuited, output components and the printed cir-
cuit boards may be damaged. To guard against this, incorporate a fuse in the external circuit. Use a
fuse with a capacity of about twice the rated output.
z Connecting to a TTL Circuit

A TTL circuit cannot be connected directly to a transistor output because of the transistor’s residual
voltage. Connect a TTL Unit through a CMOS-IC. It is necessary to connect a pull-up resistor for a
transistor output.
z Precautions on Inrush Current

When connecting a transistor or triac output to a load having a high inrush current (such as an
incandescent lamp), steps must be taken to avoid damage to the transistor or triac. Use either of the
following methods to reduce the inrush current.
[Method1] [Method2]
R
OUT L OUT L
+ +
SYSMAC CP2E R SYSMAC CP2E
COM COM
Providing a dark current of approx. one-third of the Installing a limiting resistor

rated value through an incandescent lamp

5-3-4 Wiring Safety and Noise Controls
I/O Signal Wiring

Whenever possible, place I/O signal lines and power lines in separate ducts or conduits both inside and
outside of the control panel.
(1):I/O cables
(2):Power lines
(1) (1) (2)

(1) (2)
(2)
Floor ducts Conduit
5-3 Wiring
Suspended ducts
When wiring in the same duct, use shielded cables and connect the shields to the GR terminal to
reduce noise.
5
Inductive Loads
When an inductive load is connected to an I/O Unit, connect a surge protector or diode in parallel with
5-3-4 Wiring Safety and Noise Controls

the load as shown below.
IN L
OUT
Diode
L DC input Relay output
Surge protector
COM COM
OUT
+
Relay output
Transistor output Diode
COM

Use surge protectors and diodes with the following specifications.
Surge protector
Resistance : 50Ω
Capacitor : 0.47μF
Voltage : 200V
Diode
Breakdown voltage : 3 times load voltage

Mean rectification current :1A

Reducing Electrical Noise for External Wiring

Take the following points into account when externally wiring I/O, power supply, and power lines.
• When multi-conductor signal cable is being used, do not combine I/O wires and other control wires in
the same cable.
• If wiring racks are parallel, allow at least 300 mm between them.
Low-current
cables
PLC I/O wiring
300 mm min.
PLC power supply Control cables
General control
circuit wiring
300 mm min.
Power cables
Power lines
Ground to 100 Ω or less.
• If the I/O wiring and power cables must be placed in the same duct, they must be shielded from each
other using grounded steel sheet metal.
PLC power supply

General control
PLC I/O wiring circuit wiring Power lines Steel metal
200 mm min.
5-3-5 Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods

The CP2E PLCs conforms to the Common Emission Standards (EN61131-2) of the EMC Directives.
However, noise generated by relay output switching may not satisfy these Standards.
In such a case, a surge protector must be connected to the load side or other appropriate countermea-
sures must be provided outside the PLC. Countermeasures taken to satisfy the standards vary depend-
ing on the devices on the load side, wiring, configuration of machines, etc.
Following are examples of countermeasures for reducing the generated noise.
z Countermeasures (Refer to EN 61131-2 for details.)

• Countermeasures are not required if the frequency of load switching for the whole system with the
PLC included is less than 5 times per minute.
• Countermeasures are required if the frequency of load switching for the whole system with the
PLC included is more than 5 times per minute.

z Countermeasure Examples
• When switching an inductive load, connect a surge protector, diodes, etc., in parallel with the load
or contact as shown below.
Current
Circuit Characteristic Required element
AC DC
CR method If the load is a relay or solenoid, there is The capacitance of the capacitor must be
a time lag between the moment the cir- 1 to 0.5 μF per contact current of 1 A and
cuit is opened and the moment the load resistance of the resistor must be 0.5 to
1 Ω per contact voltage of 1 V.
Inductive load
is reset.
Power C If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V, insert These values, however, vary with the load
OK OK the arc killer in parallel with the load. If and the characteristics of the relay.
R
the supply voltage is 100 to 200V, insert Decide these values from experiments,
the arc killer between the contacts. and take into consideration that the
capacitance suppresses spark discharge
when the contacts are separated and the
resistance limits the current that flows into
the load when the circuit is closed again.
The dielectric strength of the capacitor
must be 200 to 300 V. If the circuit is an
5-3 Wiring
AC circuit, use a capacitor with no polarity.
Diode method The diode connected in parallel with the The reversed dielectric strength value of
load changes energy accumulated by the diode must be at least 10 times as
the coil into a current, which then flows large as the circuit voltage value. The for-
Inductive load
--- OK into the coil so that the current will be ward current of the diode must be the
converted into Joule heat by the resis- same as or larger than the load current.
Power
tance of the inductive load. The reversed dielectric strength value of
5
This time lag, between the moment the the diode may be two to three times larger
circuit is opened and the moment the than the supply voltage if the surge pro-
5-3-5 Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods

load is reset, caused by this method is tector is applied to electronic circuits with
longer than that caused by the CR low circuit voltages.
method.
Varistor method The varistor method prevents the impo-
sition of high voltage between the con-
tacts by using the constant voltage
Inductive load
OK OK characteristic of the varistor. There is

time lag between the moment the circuit
Power
is opened and the moment the load is −
reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V, insert
the varistor in parallel with the load. If
the supply voltage is 100 to 200 V,
insert the varistor between the contacts.
• When switching a load with a high inrush current such as an incandescent lamp, suppress the
inrush current as shown below.
[Method 1] [Method 2]
R
OUT L OUT L
+ +
R
COM COM
Providing a dark current of approx. one-third of Providing a limiting resistor

the rated value through an incandescent lamp

z Conditions for Meeting EMC Directives when Using CP-series Relay

Expansion I/O Units
EN61131-2 immunity testing conditions when using the CP1W-40EDR, CP1W-32ER, or CP1W-
16ER with a CP1W-CN811 I/O Connecting Cable are given below.
• Recommended Ferrite Core
Ferrite Core (Data Line Filter): 0443-164151 manufactured by Nisshin Electric
Minimum impedance: 90 Ω at 25 MHz, 160 Ω at 100 MHz
30
32 33
• Recommended Connection Method

(1) Cable Connection Method
(2) Connection Method

As shown below, connect a ferrite core to each end of the CP1W-CN811 I/O Connecting Cable.

6
Troubleshooting
This section describes how to troubleshoot problems that may occur with a CP2E PLC.
6-1 Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6-1-1 Errors and Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-1-2 Checking Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-1-3 Checking Detailed Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-1-4 Reading Error Log Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 6
6-1-5 Types of Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-1-6 Error Processing Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-1-7 No Operation When Power is Supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-1-8 Fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6-1-9 CPU Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6-1-10 Non-fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6-1-11 Other Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6-2 Troubleshooting Unit Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6-2-1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6-2-2 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6-2-3 CX-Programmer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

6 Troubleshooting
6-1 Troubleshooting CPU Unit Errors

This section describes how to troubleshoot errors that occur in the CP2E CPU Units.
6-1-1 Errors and Remedies

Use the following procedure when an error occurs.
Error occurs
Check the indicators on the front of the CPU Unit or use the CX-
Check the indicators ··· Programmer to read the error status.
Identify the error from the indicators(refer to 6-1-5 Types of Errors)

Identify the error ··· or use the CX-Programmer to read the error status.
Implement countermeasures ··· Take measures to eliminate the error that occurred and to
prevent it from occurring again.
End
6-1-2 Checking Errors

The type of error that occurred can be determined by checking the indicators on the front of the CPU
Unit or by using the CX-Programmer.
Refer to 6-1-5 Types of Errors for details on the types of error status.
Checking the Indicators

N E/S
POWER POWER POWER: Power supply Green
RUN RUN
RUN: RUN or MONITOR mode
ERR/ALM ERR/ALM Green
INH INH ERR/ALM: Shows the results of

self-diagnosis. Red
BKUP PRPHL
LINK/ACT BKUP INH: Outputs OFF Yellow — — — —
PORT1A RS-232C
LINK/ACT PRPHL: Peripheral USB port
RS-485 communications Yellow — — — —
PORT1B
BKUP: Writing to backup memory
LINK/ACT
Yellow — — — —
RS-232C: Built-in RS-232C port
communications Yellow — — — —
RS-485: Built-in RS-485 port
(S30/40/60 CPU Unit only)
LINK/ACT: Built-in Ethernet
(N14/20 CPU Unit only)
PORT1A Built-in Ethernet
LINK/ACT: communications Yellow — — — —
(N30/40/60 CPU Unit only)
PORT1B Built-in Ethernet Yellow — — — —
LINK/ACT: communications
(N30/40/60 CPU Unit only)
Status Normal operation Operation is A non-fatal A fatal error

stopped in error has has occurred
PROGRAM occurred
mode

6 Troubleshooting
Checking Error Status with the CX-Programmer

Use the following procedure to read the error status.
1 Place the CX-Programmer online with the CPU Unit.
2 Double-click Error Log in the project tree in the main window.

The PLC Errors Window will be displayed. Click the Errors Tab. The current errors will be dis-
played on the Errors Tab Page.

6-1-3 Checking Detailed Status
You can check detailed error status using information registered in the Auxiliary Area.
The following error details are registered.
6
Area Description
6-1-3 Checking Detailed Status

Error flags The Auxiliary Area contains flags that indicate the type of error.
Error information is provided for various types of error.
Error information The Auxiliary Area contains words that provide detailed information on current errors.
Error information is provided for various types of error.
Error code The Auxiliary Area contain a word that provides a code that describes the error that has
occurred.
The error code is stored in A400 for all errors.
If two or more errors occur at the same time, the highest (most serious) error code will be
stored in A400.
6-1-4 Reading Error Log Information

If the error status could not be checked when the error occurred, it can be checked by reading error log
data.
The following information is stored in the error log.
• Error code (This is the same error code as is stored in word A400.)
• Error contents
• Time of occurrence

6 Troubleshooting
Error Log Information

A maximum of 20 error records will be stored in the error log.
If more than 20 errors occur, the oldest error record (in A100 to A104) will be deleted and the 19
records stored in A105 to A199 will be shifted by one, with the newest record being stored in A195 to
A199.
Error code Order of occurrence
Error Log Area
4102 1
A100 4 1 0 2 Error code
A101 Error contents
A102 Minutes, seconds
00F7 2 A103 Day, hour Time of occurrence
A104 Year, month
A105 0 0 F 7 Error code
A106 Error contents
A108 Day, hour Time of occurrence
A109 Year, month
009D 20
A195 0 0 9 D Error code

A196 Error contents
A198 Day, hour Time of occurrence
A199 Year, month
A300
Error Log Pointer
Note The E-type CPU Units do not support the clock function, so the time of occurrence cannot be confirmed.
The display is always 01-01-01 01:01:01 Sunday.
When the clock in the N/S-type CPU Units stops, the display is also 01-01-01 01:01:01 Sunday.
Checking Error Log Information

The following methods can be used to check error log information with the CX-Programmer.
z CX-Programmer PLC Error Window

Check the error log by clicking the Error Log Tab in the PLC Errors Window of the CX-Programmer.
The error code is displayed here.
The example above shows that a memory error has occurred.

• Error code 80F1 → Memory error
• Error contents (A403) → 0001 → A403.00 is ON → A checksum error has occurred in the program.

6 Troubleshooting
z Directly Monitoring the Area where Error Log Information is Stored
1 Connect the CX-Programmer online.
2 Read words A100 to A199.
3 Check the error status from the registered data.
6-1-5 Types of Errors

The type of error that has occurred can be identified by checking the indicators on the front of the CPU
Unit, or by using the CX-Programmer to check the error status.
The errors detected by the CPU Unit are listed in the following table.
Refer to 6-2 Troubleshooting Unit Errors for errors not detected by the CPU Unit.
• Error code storage word: The error code is stored in A400 when an error occurs.
• Error flags: Flags that indicate the type of error are allocated in the Auxiliary Area.
• Error information: There are words in the Auxiliary Area that provide specific information
on the meaning of error flags and information on the error location and
error details.
Indicator
Error 6
Error information
Error Operation
Error code
flag status
ERR/ LINK/ RS-232C (A400)
POWER RUN INH PRPHL BKUP Error Word
6-1-5 Types of Errors

ALM ACT RS-485
Power supply error Operation

− − − − − stops.
Not lit Not lit Not lit Not lit Not lit Not lit Not lit
CPU error (WDT Operation
error)*1 − − − − − − − − − stops.
Lit Not lit Lit
Peripheral USB port Operation
communications error − − − − − − − − continues.
Lit Lit Not lit Not lit
Built-in RS-232C/ Operation
RS-485 port communi- − − − − − − − − continues.
Lit Lit Not lit Not lit
cations error
Fatal Memory error − − − − − 0x80F1 A401.15 Memory Error A403 Operation
errors Location stops.
*1*2 Lit Not lit Lit
I/O bus error 0x80CA A401.14 Always A404
0x0A0A
Too many I/O 0x80E1 A401.11 Always A407
points error 0x4000
Program error 0x80F0 A401.09 Program Error A294
Details to
A299
Cycle time 0x809F A401.08 − −
exceeded error
FALS error 0xC101 A401.06 − −
to
0xC2FF
Built-in 0x80F6 A401.04 Built-in A313
Ethernet Ethernet Stop
stop error Error Detaits

6 Troubleshooting
Error
Indicator
Error information
Error Operation
Error code
flag status
ERR/ LINK/ RS-232C (A400)
POWER RUN INH PRPHL BKUP Error Word
ALM ACT RS-485
Non- FAL − − − − − 0x4101 A402.15 Executed FAL A360 Operation

fatal instruction to Number to continues.
Lit Lit Flash-
errors executed 0x42FF A391
ing
*2
Backup mem- 0x00F1 A315.15 − −
ory error
PLC setup 0x009B A402.10 − −

error
Option Board 0x00D1 A315.13 Error Option A424

error 0x00D2 Board
(N-type Number
only)
Battery error 0x00F7 A402.04 − −
Ethernet 0x021A A315.11 Routing tables A313

setting table error or
error Ethernet
address
tables error
FINS/TCP 0x03C0 A315.10 An error in
connection TCP
setup error connection
setup
including
FINS/TCP
connection
setup.
Ethernet 0x03C1 An error in
server setup server setup,
error including DNS
server and
SNTP server.
Ethernet 0x03C4 An error in
server connecting
connection with server,
including DNS
error
server and
SNTP server.
*1 The indicator status is the same for CPU errors and fatal errors, but they can be distinguished because a Programming
Device can be connected when a fatal error occurs, but not when a CPU error occurs.
*2 Refer to 6-1-8 Fatal Errors and 6-1-10 Non-fatal Errors for details on fatal and non-fatal errors.
Note The indicator status shows the status of the errors that have occurred in RUN or MONITOR mode.

6 Troubleshooting
6-1-6 Error Processing Flowchart

Confirm the error category by referring to the status of the CPU Unit indicators, investigate the cause for
the error in the error tables, and take corrective actions.
Problem?
POWER indicator lit? Check the power supply.

Not lit Refer to 6-1-7 and 6-2.
Lit

RUN indicator lit?
Not lit
Lit
ERR/ALM indicator lit? ERR/ALM indicator lit?

Not lit Not lit
Flashing Lit
There is no error
in the CP2E.
A non-fatal error has occurred. Check for other A fatal error has occurred.
Refer to 6-1-10. causes. Refer to 6-1-8.
Refer to 6-2.
6-1-7 No Operation When Power is Supplied 6

First confirm that the POWER indicator (green) is lit.
6-1-6 Error Processing Flowchart

z POWER Indicator Not Lit
The power supply may not match the Unit rating, wiring may not be correct, or the Unit may be faulty.
• Confirm the Unit rating (i.e., is it 24 VDC or 100 to 240 VAC?) and see if the supply power
matches the rating.
• Check the wiring to see if it is correct and that nothing is disconnected.
• Check the voltage at the power supply terminals. If the voltage is normal and the POWER indica-
tor is not lit, the Unit may be faulty. In that case, replace the Unit.
z POWER Indicator Flashing

There may be fluctuations in the power supply voltage, disconnected wiring, or poor contacts. Check
the power supply system and wiring.
z POWER Indicator Lit but No Operation

Check the RUN indicator if the POWER indicator is lit but the CPU Unit does not operate.
The CPU Unit may be on standby if the RUN indicator is not lit.

6 Troubleshooting
6-1-8 Fatal Errors
z CPU Unit Indicators

N E/S POWER

POWER POWER RUN
RUN RUN
ERR/ALM
ERR/ALM ERR/ALM
INH —
INH INH
PRPHL —
BKUP PRPHL
PORT1A BKUP —
BKUP
LINK/ACT RS-232C —
RS-232C
PORT1B
RS-485 RS-485 —
LINK/ACT
PORT1A
—
LINK/ACT
PORT1B —
LINK/ACT
—: Irrelevant
There may be a CPU error or a fatal error if operation stops (i.e., the RUN indicator turns OFF) and
the ERR/ALM indicator lights.
Data on fatal errors is displayed on the Errors Tab Page of the CX-Programmer’s PLC Errors Win-
dow.
Take corrective actions after checking error details based on the CX-Programmer display message
together with the Auxiliary Area Error Flags and error information.
• Errors are listed in order with the most serious errors first.
• If two or more errors occur at the same time, the most serious error code will be stored in
A400.
• If the IOM Hold Bit has not been turned ON to protect I/O memory, all non-retained areas of I/O
memory will be cleared when a fatal error other than FALS occurs.
• I/O memory will be held when the I/O Memory Hold Bit is ON, but outputs will be turned OFF.
Memory Errors
Probable cause Possible remedy
An error has occurred in memory. See below.
One or more bits in A403 will turn ON to indicate where the error has
occurred.
• Memory Error Location
A403.00 is ON A checksum error has occurred in the ladder pro- Transfer the ladder program again.
gram. The power supply was turned OFF when
backing up the user program to backup memory.
A403.04 is ON A checksum error has occurred in the PLC Setup. Transfer the PLC Setup again.
A403.07 is ON A checksum error has occurred in the routing tables. Transfer the routing tables again.
(Only for N-type CPU Units)
A403.11 is ON A checksum error has occurred in IP address table. Transfer the IP address table again.
A403.12 is ON A checksum error has occurred in IP router table. Transfer the IP router table again.
A403.14 is ON I/O memory has not been backed up When power Set I/O Memory again.
was turned OFF.

6 Troubleshooting
z Reference Information
Error flag Memory Error Flag, A401.15
Error code (A400) 80F1
Error information Memory Error Location, A403

As a memory error cannot be backed up in time due to Power OFF, it will be detected at the next
Power ON. If the power supply is turned OFF after the memory error occurs, the program will
execute with damaged memory data.
For applications that need to maintain DM, HR, CNT and other data during Power OFF, it is nec-
essary to prevent the device from being powered on next time by inserting a ladder program (for

example, using the I/O Memory Backup Error Flag to turn ON the Load Cutoff Flag).
If the ladder program is running without I/O memory, the device may malfunction.
A500.15
A583.00 (Output OFF Bit)
A583.00 I/O Memory Backup Error Flag

The flag will be ON when the I/O memory is not held at power ON.
It will still be ON until the memory area is cleared or the flag is turned OFF manually.
6
I/O Bus Error
6-1-8 Fatal Errors

An I/O bus error has occurred in data transfer between the CPU Units and Units connected to the I/O
bus.
Cycle the power supply. If operation is not restored when the power supply has been cycled, turn OFF
the power supply and check that connections are proper and that there is no damage.
An error occurred in data transfer • Cycle the power supply.
between the CPU Unit and an Expansion • If the problem persists, turn OFF the power supply and check the
Unit or Expansion I/O Unit. Connecting Cables between the Units to see if they are connected
(A value of 0A0A hex will be stored in properly.
A404.) • Check the Unit connections to be sure they are ok (e.g., that there
is no damage).
• After correcting the problem, turn ON the power to the Units again.
Error flag I/O Bus Error Flag, A401.14
Error code (A400) 80CA
Error information I/O Bus Error Details, A404

6 Troubleshooting
Too Many I/O Points Error

The number of CP-series Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units connected exceeds the restriction
for the number of Units or words for the system configuration.
Turn OFF the power supply and reconfigure the system within the restrictions.
The number of CP-series Expansion Units and Connect a maximum of three Expansion Units or Expan-
Expansion I/O Units exceeds the restriction. sion I/O Units to CPU Units with 30,40 or 60 I/O points.
(A value of 4000 hex will be stored in A407.)
Error flag Too Many I/O Points Flag, A401.11
Error code (A400) 80E1

Error information Too Many I/O Points Details, A407
Program Errors
A program error indicates a problem with the user program. Refer to the error information, check the
program, and correct the mistakes.
Clear the error once the problem has been corrected.
Instruction Processing Error (A295.08 turns ON) • Refer to A298 and A299 (instruction program address
The instruction could not be executed because of when the program fails), check the specifications for
incorrect operand data, and the ER Flag was turned the relevant instruction, and set the correct operand
ON. (Only when the Stop CPU on Instruction Error data.
parameter in the PLC Setup is set to Stop.) • Set the PLC Setup to not stop operation for an instruc-
tion error.
Indirect DM Addressing BCD Error • Refer to A298 and A299 (instruction program address
(A295.09 turns ON) when the program fails), and correctly set the content
The operand of indirect DM Area addressing in BCD for the indirectly addressed DM operand (BCD mode)
Mode did not contain a BCD value when the instruc- to BCD or change the specified destination. Alterna-
tion was executed, and the AER Flag was turned ON. tively, change the indirect addressing to binary mode.
(Only when the Stop CPU on Instruction Error • Set the PLC Setup to not stop operation for an instruc-
parameter in the PLC Setup is set to Stop.) tion error.
Illegal Area Access Error (A295.10 turns ON) • Refer to A298 and A299 (instruction program address
The AER flag is ON because an illegal area was when the program fails) and take corrective actions so
specified for access when executing the instruction. that illegal area access errors will not occur.
(Only when the Stop CPU on Instruction Error • Set the PLC Setup to not stop operation for an instruc-
parameter in the PLC Setup is set to Stop.) tion error.
The following operations are considered illegal
access:
• Reading/writing the parameter area
• Writing to an area without memory installed
• Writing to a write-protected area
• Indirect DM addressing BCD error
No END Error (A295.11 turns ON) Insert an END instruction at the end of the program allo-
This error occurs when there is not an END instruc- cated to the task stored in A294 (task number when the
tion in the program. program fails).

6 Troubleshooting

Task Error (A295.12 turns ON) Create a task for the number stored in A294 (task number
There is no specified interrupt task when an interrupt when the program fails).
is generated (input interrupt, high-speed counter
interrupt or scheduled interrupt.)
Differentiation Overflow Error Change the operating mode to PROGRAM mode and
(A295.13 turns ON) then return to MONITOR mode.
Differentiation instructions were repeatedly inserted
or deleted using the online editor and the system
restriction was exceeded.
Illegal Instruction Errors (A295.14 turns ON) Transfer the program again using the CX-Programmer.
Execution of an unexecutable instruction was
attempted.

UM Overflow Error (A295.15 turns ON) Transfer the program again using the CX-Programmer.
An attempt was made to execute a program that
exceeds the user program capacity.
Error flag Program Error Flag, A401.09
Error information Program Error Details, A294 to A299
6-1-8 Fatal Errors

6 Troubleshooting
Error information Contents

Task Number When Program Stopped This word contains the task number of the task that was being executed
A294 when program execution was stopped because of a program error.
Cyclic tasks: 0000 hex
Interrupt tasks: 8000 to 800F hex (task 0 to 15)
Program Stop Error Identification This word contains FFFF hex when the stop position is in the program
Information except the function block.
A297 This word contains the data other than FFFF hex when the stop position
is in the function block.
Program Address Where Program These words contain the program address of the instruction where pro-
Stopped gram execution was stopped due to a program error.
A298 to A299
Confirm the Program Error When A295.08 to A295.10 Turn ON
Program Error
295.08 to A295.10 turn ON
Check the task number in A294
Except FFFF hex

Check A297
FFFF hex
The program error occurs in the The program error occurs in the function block
program of the task whose program which is used by the task number in A294.
address is stored in A298 or A299 * If more than two FBs are used, it cannot be
and task number in A294 where specified which FB fails.
program execution stopped.
Correct the corresponding Check and correct the program (function block)
instruction. whose address is stored in A298 or A299 where
program execution stopped.
* Confirm all the FB instructions used by the
corresponding task number.
Note Clicking Ctrl+G in the tasks and function blocks of the CX-Programmer, it is possible to search the instruc-
tions of the corresponding addresses.

6 Troubleshooting
Cycle Time Exceeded Error

This error occurs when the cycle time • Change the program to reduce the cycle time.
PV exceeds the maximum cycle time • Change the maximum cycle time setting.
set in the PLC Setup. • Refer to the Maximum Interrupt Task Processing Time (A440) and
study the maximum cycle time.
For example, use the JUMP instruction to skip sections that are not
executed to shorten the cycle time.
• The cycle time exceeded error may occur during the following situa-
tion in the use of high-speed counter. Please check the input signal of
high-speed counter.
• The Z-signal is input at high-frequency.

• Change the direction of signal at high-frequency.
• Change the direction of target matching at high-frequency.
• The input interrupt (IN2 to IN9) signal is input at high-frequency.
Error flag Cycle Time Too Long Error, A401.08
Error code (A400) 809F
Error information −
Errors Created with FALS Instructions 6

6-1-8 Fatal Errors

FALS instruction executed C100 hex will be added to the FALS number (001 to 1FF hex) and the result will
(fatal error) in the program. be stored in A400 as the error code (C100 to C2FF hex).
Check the conditions for executing FALS instructions and remove any causes
for the user-defined error.
Error flag FALS Error Flag, A401.06
Error code (A400) C101 to C2FF
Built-in Ethernet Stop Error (Only for N-type CPU Units)

ON when the built-in Ethernet stops working Cycle the power supply. The Unit may be faulty. Consult
because of sum value of MAC address error or your OMRON representative.
controller error.
Error flag Built-in Ethernet Stop Error, A401.04

6 Troubleshooting
6-1-9 CPU Errors

N E/S POWER
POWER POWER RUN
RUN RUN
ERR/ALM
ERR/ALM ERR/ALM
INH —
INH INH
PRPHL —
BKUP PRPHL
PORT1A BKUP —
BKUP
RS-232C
PORT1B
RS-485 RS-485 —
LINK/ACT
PORT1A
—
LINK/ACT
PORT1B —
LINK/ACT
—: Irrelevant
A CPU error or fatal error may have occurred if the ERR/ALM indicator lights during operation (RUN
mode or MONITOR mode), the RUN indicator turns OFF, and operation stops.
CPU Unit Errors

A WDT (watchdog) error occurred in the CPU Cycle the power supply.
Unit. The Unit may be faulty. Consult your OMRON representative.
(This does not occur in normal use.)
Error flag −
Error code (A400) −
Note Just as when a CPU error occurs, the RUN indicator will turn OFF and the ERR/ALM indicator will
light when a fatal error occurs. Connecting the CX-Programmer, however, is possible for fatal
errors but not for CPU errors.
If the CX-Programmer cannot be connected (online), a CPU error has probably occurred.

6 Troubleshooting
6-1-10 Non-fatal Errors

A non-fatal error has occurred if both the RUN indicator is lit and the ERR/ALM indicator is flashing
during operation (i.e., in RUN or MONITOR mode).

N E/S POWER
POWER POWER RUN
RUN RUN
ERR/ALM
ERR/ALM ERR/ALM
INH —
INH INH
PRPHL —

BKUP PRPHL
PORT1A BKUP —
BKUP
RS-232C
PORT1B
RS-485 RS-485 —
LINK/ACT
PORT1A
—
LINK/ACT
PORT1B —
LINK/ACT
—: Irrelevant
Information on the non-fatal errors can be obtained from the Errors Tab Page of the CX-Program-
mer’s PLC Errors Window.
Take corrective actions after checking error details using the display messages and the Auxiliary
Area Error Flags and error information.
• Errors are listed in order with the most serious errors first. 6
• If two or more errors occur at the same time, the most serious error code will be stored in A400.

Errors Created with FAL Instructions
A FAL instruction was executed in the program to Check the conditions for executing FAL instructions and
create a non-fatal error. remove any causes of the user-defined error.
(The executed FAL number 001 to 511 will be stored
in A360 to A391. The number 4 will be added to the
front of 101 to 2FF (which correspond to executed
FAL numbers 001 to 511) and the result will be
stored in A400 as error code 4101 to 42FF. )
Error flag FAL Error Flag, A402.15
Error code (A400) 4101 to 42FF
Backup Memory Error

Writing to the backup memory fails. The Flash Memory in which the user data is backed up
(A315.15 will turn ON. ) has failed.
The users data may be lost when the power supply is
turned OFF.
Save the user data (program, parameter and backup DM)
before the power supply is turned OFF and then replace
the CPU Unit.

6 Troubleshooting
Error flag Backup Memory Error Flag, A315.15
PLC Setup Errors

A set value error occurred in the PLC Setup. Correct the PLC Setup with correct values.
Error flag PLC Setup Error Flag, A402.10
Error code (A400) 009B
Option Board Errors (Only for N-type CPU Units)

The Option Board is removed while the power is Turn OFF the power supply and then install the Option
being supplied. Board again.
(A315.13 will turn ON.)
The Option Board is not supported by the CPU Turn OFF the power supply and then remove the Option
Unit. Board.
(A315.13 will turn ON.) The CP1W-CIF41 or CP1W-DAM01 cannot be used on
CP2E CPU Unit.
Two Analog Option Boards are mounted. Install one Aralog Option Board.
(A315.13 will turn ON.)
Error flag Option Board Error Flag, A315.13
Other Non-fatal Error Flag, A402.00
00D1: Option slot 1
Error code (A400)
00D2: Option slot 2
Battery Errors (Only for N/S-type CPU Units)

If the PLC Setup is set to detect battery errors, this Check the battery connections.
error will occur when there is an error in the battery Select the Do not detect battery error Check Box in the
in the CPU Unit (i.e., the voltage is low or a battery PLC Setup setting if battery-free operation is being used.
is not mounted).
Error flag Battery Error Flag, A402.04

6 Troubleshooting
Ethernet Setting Table Error (Only for N-type CPU Units)

An error occurs in routing table. Set the routing table again by the CX-Integrator.
An error occurs in IP address table or IP router Confirm the IP Router Table on the Built-in Ethernet Tab in
table. the PLC Setup or the IP Address Table in the FINS/UDP
Setup, and then transfer again.
Error flag Setting Table Logic Error Flag, A315.11
Other Non-fatal Flag, A402.00

Error code (A400) 021A
Error information (A313) Error in IP address tables or IP router tables 0003
Error in Ethernet address tables 0004
FINS/TCP Connection Setup Error, Ethernet Server Setup Error,

Ethernet Server Connection Error (Only for N-type CPU Units)
A Built-in Ethernet error has occurred. A315.10 will turn ON to See below.
indicate where the error has occurred. See below for details.
• Error Information
6
A315.10 is ON FINS/TCP Connection Setup Error Confirm the FINS/TCP Setting on the Built-in
Error code When there is an error in TCP connec- Ethernet Tab in the PLC Setup and transfer
again.

(A400): 03C0 tion setup including FINS/TCP con-
nection setup, the error occurs.
A315.10 is ON Server Setup Error Confirm the DNS and Clock Auto Adjustment
Error code When there is an error in server setup, Settings on the Built-in Ethernet Tab in the PLC
(A400): 03C1 including DNS server and SNTP Setup and transfer again.
server, the error occurs.
A315.10 is ON Server Connection Error Click the DNS Setting and the Clock Auto
Error code When there is an error in connecting Adjustment on the Built-in Ethernet Tab in the
(A400): 03C4 with server, including DNS server and PLC Setup and confirm the DNS and SNTP
SNTP server, the error occurs. Server Settings.

6 Troubleshooting
Error flag Built-in Ethernet Error Flag, A315.10
Other Non-fatal Flag, A402.00
Error code (A400) 03C0: FINS/TCP connection setup error
03C1: Ethernet server setup error
03C4: Ethernet server connection error
Error information 03C0 Leftmost byte: FINS/TCP connection number
(A313) 01: FINS/TCP connection No.1
02: FINS/TCP connection No.2
03: FINS/TCP connection No.3
Rightmost byte: Error causes
01: Automatic allocation of FINS node address error
02: Target IP address error
03: Target FINS/TCP Port No. error
03C1 Leftmost byte: Server type
00: DNS server
01: SNTP server
01: IP address setting error
02: Host name error
03: Port No. error
04: Other setting error
03C4 Leftmost byte: Server type
00: DNS server
01: SNTP server
01: Specified host does not existed
02: No service at specified host
03: Time out error
04: Closed unilaterally by host error
05: Cannot connect because account information does not match
06: Host name resolution error
07: Transmission error
08: Reception error

6 Troubleshooting
6-1-11 Other Errors
Communications Errors

N E/S POWER

POWER POWER RUN
RUN RUN
ERR/ALM
ERR/ALM ERR/ALM
INH —

INH INH
PRPHL —
BKUP PRPHL
PORT1A BKUP —
BKUP
RS-232C
PORT1B
RS-485 RS-485 —
LINK/ACT
PORT1A
—
LINK/ACT
PORT1B —
LINK/ACT
—: Irrelevant

An error has occurred in the communications • Check the cable wiring.
between the Ethernet port and connected device. • Check the Ethernet cable and replace it if necessary. 6
An error has occurred in the communications • Check the cable wiring.
between the peripheral USB port and connected • Check the USB cable and replace it if necessary.
6-1-11 Other Errors

device.
An error has occurred in the communications • Confirm that the Built-in RS-232C Port, Built-in RS-485
between the serial port and connected device. Port or Serial Port Tab settings in the PLC Setup are cor-
rect.
• Check the cable wiring.
• If a host computer is connected, check the serial port
settings and program in the host computer.
An error will be occurred if the cycle time is too • Start the CX-Programmer. Select Change Model from
long. the PLC Menu. The Change PLC Dialog Box will be dis-
played.
• Click the Settings Button on the right side of Network
Type. The Network Settings [USB] Dialog Box will be
displayed.
• Click the Network Tab and increase the value in
Response Timeout(s).

6 Troubleshooting
Ethernet Communication Error

When Ethernet Communication Error occurs during FINS communication service by built-in Ether-
net port, the error code, error contents and error’s time will be stored in A40 to A44.
The detail information of error code and error contents show as the following table.
Error Detailed information
code Error content
(Hex) 1st byte 2nd byte
0105 Node address setting error (send failed) FINS Commands
Bit 15: OFF
0107 Remote node not in network (send failed)
Bits 08 to 14: Source network address
0108 No unit with specified unit address (send failed) Bits 00 to 07: Source node address
FINS Responses
010D Destination address not in routing tables (send failed)
Bit 15: ON
010E No routing table entry (send failed) Bits 08 to 14: Destination network address
Bits 00 to 07: Destination node address
010F Routing table error (send failed)
0111 Command too long (send failed)
0112 Header error (send failed)
0117 Internal buffers full; packet discarded
0118 Illegal packet discarded
0119 Local node busy (send failed)
0120 Unexpected routing error
0121 No setting in IP address table; packet discarded
03C3 FINS/UDP packet discarded 01 to FE: Source node address
03C2 FINS/TCP packet discarded 01 to 03: 02:
Connection number Reopened because
remote node closed
03:
Reopened because of
reception error
04:
Reopened because of
transmission error
05:
Reopened because
RST received from
remote node
06:
Reopened because of
no keep-alive
response
07:
Illegal FINS/TCP pro-
cedure
08:
Insufficient memory
during server pro-
cessing
09:
Insufficient memory
during client process-
ing
0A:
Insufficient memory
during node switching
03C6 Clock data write error 0001: Clock data cannot be refreshed because
of a CPU Unit error.
0002: Clock data cannot be refreshed because
the current CPU mode do not support opera-
tion.

6 Troubleshooting
6-2 Troubleshooting Unit Errors

This section describes how to troubleshoot errors that occur in devices other than the CP2E CPU
Unit.
6-2-1 Inputs
No. Symptom Probable cause Possible remedy
1 Not all inputs turn ON or 1. External power is not supplied for the Supply power.
indicators are not lit. input.
2. Supply voltage is low. Adjust supply voltage to within
rated range.

3. Terminal block screws are loose. Tighten screws.
2 Not all inputs turn ON Input circuit is faulty. (There is a short at Replace Unit.
even though the indicator the load or something else that caused an
is lit. overcurrent to flow.)
3 Not all inputs turn OFF. Input circuit is faulty. Replace Unit.
4 Specific input bit does not 1. Input device is faulty. Replace input devices.
turn ON. 2. Input wiring disconnected. Check input wiring
4. Too short ON time of external input. Adjust input device.
5. Input circuit is faulty. Replace Unit.
6
6. Input bit number is used for output Correct the ladder program.
instruction.
6-2-1 Inputs
5 Specific input bit does not 1. Input circuit is faulty. Replace Unit.
turn OFF. 2. Input bit number is used for output Correct the ladder program.
instruction.
6 Input irregularly turns 1. External input voltage is low or unsta- Adjust external input voltage to
ON/OFF. ble. within rated range.
2. Malfunction due to noise. Take protective measures
against noise, such as:
• Install surge suppressor.
• Install insulation transformer.
• Install shielded cables between
the Input Unit and the loads.
7 Error occurs in units of 8 1. Common terminal screws are loose. Tighten screws.
points or 16 points, i.e., 2. Faulty data bus Replace Unit.
for the same common
3. Faulty CPU Replace CPU Unit.
8 Input indicator is not lit in Faulty indicator or indicator circuit. Replace Unit.
normal operation.

6 Troubleshooting
6-2-2 Outputs
No. Symptom Probable cause Possible remedy
1 Not all outputs turn ON 1. Load is not supplied with power. Supply power.
2. Load voltage is low. Adjust voltage to within rated
range.
4. Unit failure caused by an overcurrent Replace Unit.
(possibly caused by a short at the
load).
5. Faulty I/O bus connector contact. Replace Unit.
6. Faulty output circuit. Replace Unit.
7. If the INH indicator is lit, the Output Turn A500.15 OFF.
OFF Bit (A500.15) is ON.
2 Not all outputs turn OFF Output circuit is faulty. Replace Unit.
3 Output of a specific bit 1. Output ON time is too short because of Correct program to increase the
number does not turn ON a mistake in programming. time that the output is ON.
and indicator is not lit 2. Bit status controlled by multiple instruc- Correct program so that each
tions in a ladder program. output bit is controlled by only
one instruction.
4 Output of a specific bit 1. Faulty output device. Replace output device.
number does not turn ON 2. Break in output wiring. Check output wiring.
(indicator lit).
3. Loose terminal block screws. Tighten screws.
4. Faulty output bit (relay output only). Replace Unit.
5 Output of a specific bit 1. Faulty output bit (relay output only). Replace Unit.
number does not turn OFF 2. Bit does not turn OFF due to leakage Replace external load or add
(indicator is not lit). current or residual voltage. dummy resistor.
6 Output of a specific bit 1. Bit status controlled by multiple instruc- Correct the ladder program.
number does not turn OFF tions in ladder program.
(indicator lit). 2. Faulty output circuit. Replace Unit.
7 Output irregularly turns 1. Low or unstable load voltage. Adjust load voltage to within
ON/OFF. rated range.
2. Bit status controlled by multiple instruc- Correct program so that each
tions in ladder program. output bit is controlled by only
one instruction.
3. Malfunction due to noise. Take protective measures
against noise, such as:
• Install surge protector.
• Install insulation transformer.
• Use shielded cables between
the output terminal and the
load.
8 Error occurs in units of 8 1. Common terminal screws are loose. Tighten screws.
points or 16 points, i.e., for 2. An overcurrent (possibly caused by a Replace Unit.
the same common. short at the load) resulted in a blown
fuse for the output.
3. Faulty data bus Replace Unit.
4. Faulty CPU Replace CPU Unit.
9 Output indicator does not Faulty indicator. Replace Unit.
light during normal opera-
tion.

6 Troubleshooting
6-2-3 CX-Programmer Connection

Use the following procedure if the CX-Programmer cannot connect to the PLC.
Connecting via the Peripheral USB Port

The CX-Programmer
cannot connect.
Is the USB cable No

Insert the cable all the way in at both the
securely connected? personal computer and at the CPU Unit.
Yes

No Can the CX- Yes
Programmer be End
connected online?
Is the CX-Programmer No
Set the CX-Programmer network
network type set to USB? type to USB.
Yes
No Can the CX- Yes
Programmer be
connected online?
Replace the USB cable.
6
If the cycle time is too long, it may result the communication failure when CX-Programmer tries to work
online. In this case, click the Settings button on the right side of Network Type in the Change PLC dia-
log box and increase the value in Response Timeout(s).
6-2-3 CX-Programmer Connection

6 Troubleshooting
Connecting via the Ethernet Port
The CX-Programmer
cannot connect.
At the personal computer (or the
Ethernet switch) and the CPU Unit,
firmly insert the cable until the connector
locks. Confirm that the LINK/ACT
Is the Ethernet cable No indicator lights at the personal computer
securely connected? (or Ethernet switch).
Use the PING command from the personal

computer to confirm that the communications
Yes to the PLC have been established. For details,
refer to 15-4-4 Communications Test in the
CP2E CPU Unit Software User’s Manual(Cat.
No. W614).
No Can the Yes

CX-Programmer be End
connected online?
Are unique IP
addresses used for the Yes Set the IP address for the personal
personal computer and computer. Either use the default IP
the CPU Unit, and are
they set for the same address for the CPU Unit or else
domain? connect the CX-Programmer and set
another IP address.
No
Use the PING command from the personal
computer to confirm that the communications
to the PLC has been established. For details,
refer to 15-4-4 Communications Test in the
CP2E CPU Unit Software User’s Manual(Cat.
No. W614).
No Can the Yes

CX-Programmer be
connected online?
Is the
CX-Programmer No Set the CX-Programmer network
network type set to type to Ethernet.
Ethernet?
Yes
Can the Yes
No CX-Programmer be
connected online?
Replace the Ethernet cable

and the Ethernet switch.

7
Maintenance and Inspection
This section describes periodic inspections, the service life of the Battery, and how to
replace the Battery.
7-1 Periodic Maintenance and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7-1-1 Tools Required for Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-1-2 Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-1-3 Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-1-4 Unit Replacement Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-2 Replacing the Battery in N/S-type CPU Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

7-1 Periodic Maintenance and Inspection

This section describes periodic inspections and maintenance of CP2E PLCs.
Daily or periodic inspections are required in order to maintain the PLC’s functions in peak operating
condition.
7-1-1 Tools Required for Inspections
z Required Tools
• Phillips screwdrivers
• Voltage tester or digital voltmeter
• Industrial alcohol and clean cotton cloth
z Tools Required Occasionally

• Synchroscope
• Oscilloscope with pen plotter
• Thermometer and hygrometer (humidity meter)
7-1-2 Periodic Inspection
Although the major components in CP-series PLCs have an extremely long life time, they can deterio-
rate under improper environmental conditions. Periodic inspections are thus required to ensure that the
required conditions are being kept.
Inspection is recommended at least once every six months to a year, but more frequent inspections will
be necessary in adverse environments.
Take immediate steps to correct the situation if any of the conditions in the following table are not met.
z Battery
Item Life Remedy
Check whether the Battery Service life expectancy Replace the Battery when its service life has passed
has reached its service life is 5 years at 25ºC, less even if a Battery error has not occurred. The service life
(CP2W-BAT02 Battery). at higher temperatures. depends on the model and ambient temperature.
(From 1.5 to 5 years Refer to 7-2 Replacing the Battery in N/S-type CPU
depending on model and Units.
ambient temperature.)

7-1-3 Inspection and Maintenance

Inspection
No. Inspection Criteria Remedy
points
1 Power sup- Check for voltage fluctuations Allowable voltage Use a voltage tester to check the
ply voltage at the power supply terminals. range power supply at the terminals. Take
AC power supply: necessary steps to bring voltage fluc-
85 to 264 VAC tuations within limits.
DC power supply:
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
2 I/O power Check for voltage fluctuations Voltages must be Use a voltage tester to check the
supply at the I/O terminals. within I/O specifica- power supply at the terminals. Take
tions for each Unit. necessary steps to bring voltage fluc-
tuations within limits.
3 Ambient Check the ambient tempera- -20 to 60°C Use a thermometer to check the tem-
7-1 Periodic Maintenance and Inspection

environment ture. (Inside the control panel perature and make sure that the
if the PLC is in a control ambient temperature remains within
panel.) the allowed range of -20 to 60ºC.
Check the ambient humidity Relative humidity Use a hygrometer to check the opera-
(inside the control panel if the must be 10% to tion humidity and ensure that the
PLC is in a control panel). 90% with no con- ambient humidity remains between
densation. 10% and 90%.
Make sure that condensation does
not occur due to rapid changes in
temperature.
Check that the PLC is not in Not in direct sun- Protect the PLC if necessary.
direct sunlight. light
Check for accumulation of No significant accu- Clean and protect the PLC if neces-
dirt, dust, salt, metal filings, mulation sary.
etc. 7
Check for water, oil, or chemi- No spray on the Clean and protect the PLC if neces-
cal spray. PLC sary.
7-1-3 Inspection and Maintenance

Check for corrosive or flam- No corrosive or Check by smell or use a sensor.
mable gases in the area of the flammable gases
PLC.
Check the level of vibration or Vibration and shock Install cushioning or shock absorbing
shock. must be within equipment if necessary.
specifications.
Check for noise sources near No significant noise Either separate the PLC and noise
the PLC. sources source or protect the PLC.
Check that the PLC is not in Not in direct UV Protect the PLC if necessary.
direct UV.
4 Installation Check that the Option Boards No looseness Correct any improperly installed con-
and wiring and cable connectors are fully nectors.
inserted and locked.
Check for loose screws in No looseness Tighten loose screws with a Phillips
external wiring. screwdriver.
Check crimp connectors in Adequate spacing Check visually and adjust if neces-
external wiring. between connec- sary.
tors
Check for damaged external No damage Check visually and replace cables if
wiring cables. necessary.

7-1-4 Unit Replacement Precautions

Check the following when replacing any faulty Units discovered during inspections.
• Do not replace a Unit until the power is turned OFF.
• Check the new Unit to make sure that there are no errors.
• If a faulty Unit is being returned for repair, describe the problem in as much detail as possible,
enclose this description with the Unit, and return the Unit to your OMRON representative.
• For poor contact, take a clean cotton cloth, soak the cloth in industrial alcohol, and carefully wipe the
contacts clean. Be sure to remove any lint prior to remounting the Unit.

When replacing a CPU Unit, be sure that not only the user program but also all other data
required for operation is transferred to or set in the new CPU Unit before starting operation,
including DM Area and HR Area settings.
If data area and other data are not correct for the user program, unexpected accidents may
occur.

7-2 Replacing the Battery in N/S-type

CPU Units
For CP2E N/S-type CPU Units, the clock will stop when the power is turned OFF.
Mount the CP2W-BAT02 Battery (sold separately) to an N/S-type CPU Unit when using the clock
function.
A Battery cannot be mounted to an E-type CPU Unit.
7-2 Replacing the Battery in N/NA(S)-type CPU Units

The procedure to replace the Battery on an N/S-type CPU Unit is given below.
Battery Service Life and Replacement Period

At 25°C, the maximum service life for the Battery is five years whether or not power is supplied to the
CPU Unit while the Battery is installed.
The Battery’s lifetime will be shorter when it is used at higher temperatures.
The following table shows the approximate minimum lifetimes and typical lifetimes for the backup Bat-
tery (total time with power not supplied).
Approx. maximum Approx. minimum
Model number Typical lifetime*
lifetime lifetime*
CP2E-ND- 5 years 13,000 hours 43,000 hours
CP2E-SD- (1.5 years) (5 years)
* The minimum lifetime is the memory backup time at an ambient temperature of 60°C.
The typical lifetime is the memory backup time at an ambient temperature of 25°C.
Memory Backup Time

7
5 years
4 years
CP2E N/S-type CPU Unit
3 years
2 years
1 year
Ambient temperature
25°C 40°C 60°C
* This graphic is for reference only.

Low Battery Indications

The ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash when the Battery is nearly discharged.
Flashing
When the ERR/ALM indicator flashes, connect the CX-Programmer and read the error messages.
If a low Battery message appears on the CX-Programmer or the Battery Error Flag (A402.04) is ON,
first check whether the Battery is properly connected to the CPU.
If the Battery is properly connected, replace the Battery as soon as possible.
Once a low battery error has been detected, it will take 5 days (at an ambient temperature of 25°C)
before the Battery fails assuming that power has been supplied at least once a day.
You can prevent the clock from stopping by ensuring that the CPU Unit power is not turned OFF until
the Battery is replaced.

• The low battery message will appear on the CX-Programmer and the Battery Error Flag
(A402.04) will turn ON only if the Detect Low Battery parameter in the PLC Setup has been set
to detect a low-Battery error.
If this setting has not been made, Battery errors will not be detected.
• The Battery will discharge faster at higher temperatures, e.g., 4 days at 40°C and 2 days at
60°C.
z Replacement Battery
Name: Battery Unit
Model: CP2W-BAT02

Be sure to install a replacement Battery within two years of the production date. shown on the
Battery’s label.
How to read production date.
CR2032 Production Date

+ 1st character: the rightmost digit of year
2nd character: month (0: Oct., Y: Nov., Z：Dec.)
8Z For example, “8Z” indicates the Battery is
manufactured in December 2018.

Replacing the Battery

Use the following procedure to replace the Battery when the previous Battery has become completely
discharged.

We recommend replacing the Battery with the power OFF to prevent the CPU Unit’s sensitive
internal components from being damaged by static electricity. The Battery can be replaced with-
out turning OFF the power supply. To do so, always touch a grounded piece of metal to discharge
7-2 Replacing the Battery in N/NA(S)-type CPU Units

static electricity from your body before starting the procedure.
After replacing the Battery, connect a Programming Device and clear the Battery error.
1 Turn OFF the power supply to the N/S-type CPU Unit.

If the CPU Unit has not been ON, turn it ON for at least 30 minutes and then turn it OFF.
There is a capacitor inside the N/S-type CPU Unit that keeps the clock working when the
Battery is removed. If the power is not turned ON for at least 30 minutes before replacing the
Battery, the capacitor will not be fully charged and the clock data may be reset to 2001-01-01
01:01:01 before the new Battery is inserted.
2 Open the Battery holder on the CPU Unit and draw out the Battery. Put the new Battery into the
Battery holder and close it.


• You must complete this procedure within 5 minutes after turning OFF the power to the CPU
Unit to ensure memory backup.
If the Battery is removed for more than 5 minutes, the time will be reset to 2001-01-01 01:01:01.
• Never short-circuit the Battery terminals; never charge the Battery; never disassemble the Bat-
tery; and never heat or incinerate the Battery. Doing any of these may cause the Battery to
leak, heat, burn, or rupture, resulting in injury, fire, and possible loss of property.
Also, never use a Battery that has been dropped on the floor or otherwise subject to shock. It
may leak.
UL standards require that batteries be replaced by experienced technicians. Always place an
experienced technician in charge of Battery replacement.
• Turn ON the power after replacing the Battery for a CPU Unit that has been unused for a long
time.
Leaving the CPU Unit unused again without turning ON the power even once after the Battery
is replaced may result in a shorter Battery life.
The Battery error will be cleared automatically the next time the CPU Unit is turned ON after
replacing the Battery.

8
Using Expansion Units and
Expansion I/O Units
This section describes the Analog Input Unit, Analog Output Unit, Temperature Sensor
Units, CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit, and Expansion I/O Units.
8-1 Analog Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

8-1-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-1-2 Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-1-3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8-1-4 Flow of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8-2 Analog Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8-2-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8-2-2 Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8-2-3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8-2-4 Flow of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8
8-3 Analog I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8-3-1 CP1W-MAD11 Analog I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8-3-2 CP1W-MAD42/CP1W-MAD44 Analog I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
8-4 Temperature Sensor Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
8-4-1 CP1W-TS1/TS2 Temperature Sensor Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
8-4-2 CP1W-TS003 Temperature Sensor Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
8-4-3 TS004 Temperature Sensor Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81

8-1 Analog Input Units
8-1-1 Overview
Each CP1W-AD041/CP1W-AD042 Analog Input Unit provides four analog inputs.

• The analog input signal ranges are 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to +10 V, 0 to 20 mA, and 4 to
20 mA.
The resolution of CP1W-AD041 is 1/6,000.
The resolution of CP1W-AD042 is 1/12,000.
The open-circuit detection function is activated in the ranges of 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA.
• The Analog Input Unit uses four input words and two output words.
8-1-2 Part Names and Functions
z CP1W-AD041/CP1W-AD042
IN CH
(2) Expansion I/O

connecting cable (1) Analog input terminals
(1)Analog Input Terminals

Connected to analog output devices.
• Input Terminal Arrangement

V IN1 Voltage input 1
IN CH
I IN1 VIN2 COM2 I IN3 VIN4 COM4 AG I IN1 Current input 1
COM1 Input common 1
I IN2 Current input 2
COM2 Input common 2
COM3 Input common 3
COM4 Input common 4
(2)Expansion I/O Connecting Cable

Connected to the CPU Unit or Expansion Unit expansion connector. The cable is attached to the
Analog Input Unit and cannot be removed.


Do not touch the cables during operation. Static electricity may cause operating errors.
(3)Expansion Connector
Connected to the next Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit to enable expansion.
8-1-3 Specifications
CP1W-AD041/AD042 Analog Input Units are connected to a CP2E CPU Unit.
CP2E CPU Unit CP1W-20EDR1 CP1W-8ED CP1W-AD041
Expansion I/O Unit Expansion I/O Unit CP1W-AD042
Analog Input Unit
C OM 01 03 05 07 09 11 C OM 01 03
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02
IN CH IN
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 C H 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11
20EDR1 8ED
OUT
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP EXP IN CH
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 04 06 I IN1 VIN2 COM2 I IN3 VIN4 COM4 AG
N C C OM CO M C OM 03 CO M 06 C OM 05 07 VIN1 COM1 I IN2 VIN3 COM3 I IN4 NC
4 analog inputs

Model CP1W-AD041 CP1W-AD042
Item Voltage input Current input Voltage input Current input
Number of analog inputs 4 inputs (4 words allocated)
Input signal range 0 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 20 mA
1 to 5 V, or 4 to 20 mA 1 to 5 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V, 0 to 10 VDC,
or -10 to 10 V or -10 to 10 VDC
Max. rated input ±15 V ±30 mA ±15 V ±30 mA
8
External input impedance 1 MΩ min. Approx. 250 Ω 1 MΩ min. Approx. 250 Ω
Overall 25°C 0.3% full scale 0.4% full scale 0.2% full scale 0.3% full scale
accuracy 0 to 55°C 0.6% full scale 0.8% full scale 0.5% full scale 0.7% full scale
55 to 60°C 0.7% full scale 0.8% full scale 0.5% full scale 0.7% full scale
-20 to 0°C 0.8% full scale 1% full scale 0.7% full scale 0.9% full scale
A/D conversion data 16-bit binary (4-digit hexadecimal) 16-bit binary (4-digit hexadecimal)
Full scale for -10 to 10 V: Full scale for -10 to 10 V:
F448 to 0BB8 hex E890 to 1770 hex
Full scale for other ranges: Full scale for other ranges:
0000 to 1770 hex 0000 to 2EE0 hex
Averaging function Supported (Set in output words n+1 and n+2.)
Open-circuit detection function Supported
Conversion time 2 ms/point (8 ms/all points) 1 ms/point (4 ms/all points)
Isolation method Photocoupler isolation between analog input terminals and internal circuits. No
isolation between analog I/O signals.
Current consumption 5 VDC: 100 mA max.; 5 VDC: 100 mA max.;
24 VDC: 90 mA max. 24 VDC: 50 mA max.

z Analog Input Signal Ranges

Analog input data is digitally converted according to the input signal range as shown below.
When the input exceeds the specified range, the A/D conversion data will be fixed at either the
lower limit or upper limit.
-10 to 10 V Inputs
When the resolution is 1/6,000, the -10 to 10 V
Converted data
Hexadecimal (Decimal) range correspond to hexadecimal values F448 to
0BB8 (-3,000 to 3,000). The range of data that can
0CE4 (3300)
0BB8 (3000) be converted is F31C to 0CE4 hex (-3,300 to
3,300). A negative voltage is expressed as a two’s
complement.
−11 V −10 V 0000 (0)

0V 10 V 11 V
F448 (−3000)
F31C (−3300)
Converted Data When the resolution is 1/12,000, the -10 to 10 V

Hexadecimal (Decimal)
range correspond to hexadecimal values E890 to
19C8 (6600) 1770 (-6,000 to 6,000). The entire data range is
1770 (6000) E638 to 19C8 hex (-6,600 to 6,600). A negative
voltage is expressed as a two's complement.
−11V −10V 0000 (0)

0V 10V 11V
E890 (−6000)
E638 (−6600)
0 to 10 V Inputs
Converted data
When the resolution is 1/6,000, the 0 to 10 V range
Hexadecimal (Decimal) correspond to hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0
189C (6300)
to 6,000). The range of data that can be converted
1770 (6000) is FED4 to 189C hex (-300 to 6,300). A negative
voltage is expressed as a two’s complement.
−0.5 V 0000 (0)

0V 10 V 10.5 V
FED4 (−300)

Converted Data When the resolution is 1/12,000, the 0 to 10 V

range correspond to hexadecimal values 0000 to
3138 (12600) 2EE0 (0 to 12,000). The entire data range is FDA8
2EE0 (12000) to 3138 hex (-600 to 12,600). A negative voltage is
expressed as a two's complement.
−0.5 V 0000 (0)

0V 10 V 10.5 V
FDA8 (−600)
0 to 5 V Inputs
Converted data
189C (6300)
to 6,000). The range of data that can be converted
1770 (6000) is FED4 to 189C hex (-300 to 6,300). A negative
voltage is expressed as a two’s complement.
−0.25V 0000 (0)

0V 5V 5.25 V
FED4 (−300)
Converted Data When the resolution is 1/12,000, the 0 to 5 V range

correspond to hexadecimal values 0000 to 2EE0 (0
3138 (12600) to 12,000). The entire data range is FDA8 to 3138
2EE0 (12000)
hex (-600 to 12,600). A negative voltage is
expressed as a two’s complement.

−0.25 V 0000 (0)
0V 5V 5.25 V
FDA8 (−600)
1 to 5 V Inputs
Converted data
189C (6300)
to 6,000). The range of data that can be converted 8
1770 (6000) is FED4 to 189C hex (-300 to 6,300).Voltage in the
range of 0.8 to 1 V is expressed as a two’s comple-
ment.
0000 (0)
If an input is below the range (i.e., less than 0.8 V),
0.8 V
1V 5 V 5.2 V the open-circuit detection function is activated and
FED4 (−300) the data becomes 8,000.
Converted Data When the resolution is 1/12,000, the 1 to 5 V range

Hexadecimal (Decimal) correspond to hexadecimal values 0000 to 2EE0 (0
3138 (12600) to 12,000). The entire data range is FDA8 to 3138
2EE0 (12000)
hex (-600 to 12,600). Voltage in the range of 0.8 to
1 V is expressed as two's complement.
If an input is below the range (i.e., less than 0.8 V),
0000 (0) 0.8 V the open-circuit detection function is activated and
1V 5 V 5.2 V the data becomes 8,000.
FDA8 (−600)

0 to 20 mA Inputs
When the resolution is 1/6,000, the 0 to 20 mA
Converted data
Hexadecimal (Decimal) range correspond to hexadecimal values 0000 to
1770 (0 to 6,000). The range of data that can be
189C (6300)
1770 (6000) converted is FED4 to 189C hex (-300 to 6,300). A
negative current is expressed as a two’s comple-
ment.
−1 mA 0000 (0)
0 mA 20 mA 21 mA
FED4 (−300)
Converted Data When the resolution is 1/12,000, the 0 to 20 mA

2EE0 (12000) to 3138 hex (-600 to 12,600). A negative voltage is
−1 mA 0000 (0)
0 mA 20 mA 21 mA
FDA8 (−600)
4 to 20 mA Inputs
When the resolution is 1/6,000, the 4 to 20 mA
Converted data
189C (6300)
1770 (0 to 6,000). The range of data that can be con-
1770 (6000) verted is FED4 to 189C hex (-300 to 6,300). Current
in the range of 3.2 to 4 mA is expressed as a two’s
complement.
0000 (0) 3.2 mA
If an input is below the range (i.e., less than 3.2 mA),
0 mA 4 mA 20 mA 20.8 mA the open-circuit detection function is activated and
FED4 (−300) the data becomes 8,000.
Converted Data When the resolution is 1/12,000, the 4 to 20mA

range correspond to hexadecimal values 0000 to
2EE0 (12000)
to 3138 hex (-600 to 12,600). Current in the range
of 3.2 to 4 mA is expressed as two's complement.
If an input is below the range (i.e., less than 3.2
0000 (0) 3.2 mA mA), the open-circuit detection function is activated
0 mA 4 mA 20 mA 20.8 mA
and the data becomes 8,000.
FDA8 (−600)
z Averaging Function
For analog inputs, the averaging function operates when the averaging bit is set to 1. The averaging
function outputs the average (a moving average) of the last eight input values as the converted value.
Use this function to smooth inputs that vary at a short interval.
z Open-circuit Detection
The open-circuit detection function is activated when the input range is set to 1 to 5 V and the volt-
age drops below 0.8 V, or when the input range is set to 4 to 20 mA and the current drops below
3.2 mA.
When the open-circuit detection function is activated, the converted data will be set to 8,000.
The time for enabling or clearing the open-circuit detection function is the same as the time for con-
verting the data. If the input returns to the convertible range, the open-circuit detection is cleared
automatically and the output returns to the normal range.

8-1-4 Flow of Operation
1 Connect and wire Units.

• Connect Analog Input Units.
• Wire to analog output devices.
2 Create a ladder program.

• Write set data to output words (n+1, n+2).
• Set use of inputs.
• Select input signals using range codes.
• Set use of averaging.
• Read A/D converted values from input words (m+1 to m+4).
• For current inputs, confirm that there is no open circuit.
z Writing Set Data and Reading A/D Converted Values
CPU Unit Analog Input Unit
Ladder program
Word (n+1) Set data (inputs 1, 2)
Word (n+2) Set data (inputs 3, 4)
MOV
Word (m+1) Analog input 1 converted value
Word (m+2) Analog input 2 converted value Analog devices
• Temperature sensor
Word (m+3) Analog input 3 converted value • Pressure sensor
Writes the set data.
• Speed sensor

Reads the converted Word (m+4) Analog input 4 converted value
• Flow sensor
value.
• Voltage/current meter
“m” is the last input word and “n” is • Other devices
the last output word allocated to the
CPU Unit or previous Expansion
Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
1 Connect the Analog Input Unit to the CPU Unit.

8
CP2E CPU Unit CP1W-AD041/AD042
Analog Input Unit
IN CH
IIN1 VIN2 COM2 IIN3 VIN4 COM4 AG
VIN1 COM1 IIN2 VIN3 COM3 IIN4 NC

2 Wire to analog output devices.

(1) Wiring internal circuits of the CPU Unit
V IN1
510 kΩ 250 Ω
I IN1
Analog input 1
Internal circuits
COM1(−)
510 kΩ
to to
V IN4
510 kΩ 250 Ω
I IN4
Analog input 4
COM4(−)
510 kΩ
AG
Analog ground
(2) Wiring analog output devices to the Analog Input Unit
2-core shielded 2-core shielded

+ twisted-pair cable twisted-pair cable
V IN + V IN
Analog Analog Analog
device with Analog
I IN device with I IN Input
voltage Input
current Unit
output − COM Unit − COM
output
FG FG

• Do not connect the shield when using shielded twisted-pair cables.
• When an input is not being used, short V IN and I IN to COM terminals.
• Separate wiring from power lines (AC power supply lines, high-voltage lines, etc.)
• When there is noise in the power supply line, install a noise filter on the input section and the
power supply.

Refer to the following information on open circuits when using voltage inputs.
A
Analog
output
device
B C
1
Analog
output
device
2

24 VDC
For example, if connected device 2 is outputting 5 V and the same power supply is being used for both
devices as shown above, approximately 1/3, or 1.6 V, will be applied to the input for input device 1.
If a wiring disconnection occurs when voltage input is being used, the situation described below will
result. Either separate the power supplies for the connected devices, or use an isolator for each
input.
• If the same power supply is being used by the connected devices and a disconnection occurs at
points A or B in the above diagram, an unwanted circuit path will occur as shown along the dotted 8
line in the diagram. If that occurs, a voltage of approximately 1/3 to 1/2 of the output voltage of the
other connected device will be generated.

• If that voltage is generated while the setting is for 1 to 5 V, open-circuit detection may not be pos-
sible.
• If a disconnection occurs at point C in the diagram, the negative (-) side will be used for both
devices and open-circuit detection will not be possible.
This problem will not occur for current inputs even if the same power supply is used.

3 Create the ladder program.

(1) Allocating I/O Words
Four input words and two output words are allocated from the next words following the last
I/O words allocated to the CPU Unit or an existing Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
Words (m+1) to (m+4)
Analog Input Unit
Words (n+1), (n+2)
(2) Writing Set Data

Write the settings for input use, averaging use, and range codes for words n+1 and n+2.
When the set data is transferred from the CPU Unit to the Analog Input Unit, the A/D con-
version will be started.
15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Wd (n+1) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Even if analog inputs Analog input 2 Analog input 1

are not used, bits 15 in
words n+1 and n+2
must be set to 1.
15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Wd (n+2) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Even if analog inputs Analog input 4 Analog input 3

words n+1 and n+2
must be set to 1.
• Set Data
Range code Analog input range

00 −10 to 10 V
01 0 to 10 V
10 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA
11 0 to 5 V or 0 to 20 mA
Averaging
0 No
1 Yes
Input use
0 No
1 Yes
• The Analog Input Unit will not start converting analog input values until the set data has
been written.
The conversion data will be 0000 until the range code is written.
• Once the settings have been made, it is not possible to be changed while power is being
supplied to the CPU Unit. To change the range code or other settings, turn the CPU Unit
OFF then ON again.
(3) Averaging
Set whether averaging is to be used for set data. When the averaging bit is set to 1, the
average (moving average) for the past eight inputs is output as conversion data.

(4) Reading Analog Input Conversion Values

The ladder program can be used to read the memory area words where the converted val-
ues are stored.
With word m as the last input word allocated to the CPU Unit or an already-connected
Expansion Unit, the A/D conversion data will be output to the following words m+1 to m+4.
(5) Startup Operation
After the power is turned ON, it will require two cycle times plus approximately 50 ms before
the first conversion data is stored in the input words. Therefore, create a program as shown
below, so that the ladder can start to operate with valid conversion data in input words.
The analog input data will be 0000 until the first conversion data is stored in the input
words.
TIM0005 is started when the power is turned

Always ON Flag
P_On ON. After 0.2 s (200 ms) elapses, the TIM0005
TIM contact turns ON and the analog input 1 con-
version data stored in CIO 2 is transferred to
0005
D0.
#0002
T0005
MOV
2
D0
(6) Handling Unit Errors

• When an error occurs in an Analog Input Unit, the analog input conversion data

becomes 0000.
• Expansion Unit errors are output to bits 0 to 5 of word A436 for Units 1 to 3. The bits are
allocated from A436.00 in order starting with the Unit nearest the CPU Unit. CP1W-
AD041 is allocated two bits each. Use these flags in the program when it is necessary to
detect errors.

(7) Program Example

Destination
Analog input Input range Range code Averaging Set data
word
Input 1 0 to 10 V 01 Yes 1101 (D hex) n+1
Input 2 4 to 20 mA 10 Yes 1110 (E hex) n+1
Input 3 -10 to +10 V 00 No 1000 (8 hex) n+2
Input 4 Not used. −(00) − 0000 (0 hex) n+2
First Cycle Flag

A200.11
MOV
#80ED
102 Writes set data E and D.
MOV
#8008
Always ON 103 Writes set data 0 and 8.
P_On
TIM
0005
#0002
Execution
T0005 condition
CMP
3
#8000
P_EQ
100.00 Analog input 2 open circuit alarm
Execution
T0005 condition
MOV
2
Execution D100 Reads analog input 1 converted value.

T0005 condition
MOV
3
Execution D101 Reads analog input 2 converted value.

T0005 condition
MOV
4
D102 Reads analog input 3 converted value.

• Example: Scaling analog input values

When a 0 to 10V voltage is input to the analog input word (CIO 3) of CP1W-AD042 as 0 to 12,000,
convert the value into a value between 0 and 24,000 and output the result to D200.
24,000
Scaled
value
(0 to
(D200)
24,000)
0
0 (Data in CIO3) 12,000
(0V) (10V)
Data input to Analog Input Unit
(Unscaled: 0 to 12,000)
Data Memory Settings

Setting Address Data
Control word D100 #0800
Unscaled minimum value (0) D101 &0
Scaled minimum value (0) D102 &0
Unscaled maximum value (12,000) D103 &12,000
Scaled maximum value (24,000) D104 &24,000

Ladder Program
Always ON Flag
P_On
APR(069) Use APR instruction for scaling.
D100
3
D200
8
Descriptions of APR Instruction

APR
Y1
C C:Control word Scaled
data
S S:Source word
D D:Result word D
Scaled
result
Y0
X0 S X1
Input data
Unscaled data

C: Control word
Set for “Signed Integer Data (Binary)”.
Control word setting

#0800: Binary numeral (0000 1000 0000 0000)
The number of coordinates is 1 (m=1), so

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 set bit 0 to 7 to “0” (=m-1).
C 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Number of coordinates minus one (m+1),

00 to FF hex (1İmİ256)
Floating-point specification for S and D
0: Integer data
Data length specification for S and D
0: 16-bit signed binary data
1: 32-bit signed binary data
Signed data specification for S and D
1: Signed binary data

Control word C #0800
Unscaled minimum value (X0) C+1 X0
Scaled minimum value (Y0) C+2 Y0
Unscaled maximum value (Xm = X 1) C+3 X1
Scaled maximum value (Ym = Y1) C+4 Y1
S: Source data
Specify the word address of the input data before scaling.
R: Result word
Specify the word address where the data will be output after scaling.

8-2 Analog Output Units
8-2-1 Overview
Each CP1W-DA021 Analog Output Unit provides two analog outputs.

Each CP1W-DA041/CP1W-DA042 Analog Output Unit provides four analog outputs.
• The analog output signal ranges are 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to +10 V, 0 to 20 mA, and 4 to 20 mA.
The resolution of CP1W-DA021/DA041 is 1/6,000.
The resolution of CP1W-DA042 is 1/12,000.
• CP1W-DA021 uses two output words and CP1W-DA041/DA042 uses four output words.
8-2-2 Part Names and Functions
z CP1W-DA021/CP1W-DA041/CP1W-DA042

OUT CH
I OUT1 VOUT2 COM2 I OUT3 VOUT4 COM4 NC
(2) Expansion I/O

(1) Analog output terminals
connecting cable
(1)Analog Output Terminals

Connected to analog input devices.
• I/O Terminal Arrangement for CP1W-DA021 8
V OUT1 Voltage output 1
OUT CH
I OUT1 VOUT2 COM2 NC NC NC NC I OUT1 Current output 1
8-2-1 Overview
VOUT1 COM1 I OUT2 NC NC NC NC
COM1 Output common 1

I OUT2 Current output 2
I OUT1 VOUT2 COM2 NC NC NC NC

VOUT1 COM1 I OUT2 NC NC NC NC

• I/O Terminal Arrangement for CP1W-DA041/DA042

OUT CH
VOUT1 COM1 I OUT2 VOUT3 COM3 I OUT4 NC I OUT3 Current output 3

Connected to the expansion connector on the CPU Unit or previous Expansion Unit. The cable is
provided with the Unit and cannot be removed.

Connected to the next Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
CP1W-DA021/DA041/DA042 Analog Output Units are connected to a CP2E CPU Unit.
CP2E CPU Unit CP1W-20EDR1 CP1W-8ED CP1W-DA021/DA041

Expansion I/O Unit Expansion I/O Unit CP1W-DA042
Analog Output Unit
C OM 01 03 05 07 09 11 C OM 01 03
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02
IN CH IN
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 C H 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11
20EDR1 8ED
OUT
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP EXP OUT CH
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 04 06 I OUT1 VOUT2 COM2 I OUT3 VOUT4 COM4 AG
N C C OM CO M C OM 03 CO M 06 C OM 05 07 VOUT1 COM1 I OUT2 VOUT3 COM3 I OUT4 NC
CP1W-DA021: 2 analog outputs


Model CP1W-DA021/CP1W-DA041 CP1W-DA042

Item Voltage output Current output Voltage output Current output
Analog Number of analog out- CP1W-DA021: 4 outputs (4 words allocated)
output puts 2 outputs (2 words allocated)
section CP1W-DA041:
4 outputs (4 words allocated)
Output signal range 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V, or 4 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V, or 4 to 20 mA
or -10 to 10 V or -10 to 10 V
External output allow- 2 kΩ min. 350 Ω max. 2 kΩ min. 350 Ω max.
able load
resistance
External output imped- 0.5 Ω max. − 0.5 Ω max. −
ance
Overall 25°C 0.4% full scale 0.3% full scale
accuracy 0 to 60°C 0.8% full scale 0.7% full scale
-20 to 0°C 1% full scale 0.9% full scale
D/A conversion data 16-bit binary (4-digit hexadecimal) 16-bit binary (4-digit hexadecimal)
Full scale for -10 to 10 V: Full scale for -10 to 10 V:
F448 to 0BB8 hex E890 to 1770 hex
Full scale for other ranges: Full scale for other ranges:
0000 to 1770 hex 0000 to 2EE0 hex

Conversion time CP1W-DA021: 1 ms/point (4 ms/all points)
2 ms/point (4 ms/all points)
CP1W-DA041:
2 ms/point (8 ms/all points)
Isolation method Photocoupler isolation between analog I/O terminals and internal circuits. No
isolation between analog I/O signals.
Current consumption CP1W-DA021: 5 VDC 40 mA max.; 5 VDC: 70 mA max.;
24 VDC 95 mA max. 24 VDC: 160 mA max.
CP1W-DA041: 5 VDC 80 mA max.; 8
24 VDC 124 mA max.
z Analog Output Signal Ranges
The output data is converted to analog according to the output signal range, as shown below.
When the output exceeds the specified range, the output signal will be fixed at either the lower
limit or upper limit.

-10 to 10 V
When the resolution is 1/6,000, the hexadecimal values F448 to 0BB8 (-3000 to 3000) correspond to
an analog voltage range of -10 to 10 V.
The entire output range is -11 to 11 V.
Specify the DA conversion data as the two’s complement if it is a negative value.
11 V
10 V
8000 F31C F448

(-3300) (-3000) 0000 (0) Conversion
0BB8 0CE4 7FFF Data
0V
(3000) (3300) Hexadecimal
(Decimal)
−10 V
−11 V
When the resolution is 1/12,000, the hexadecimal values E890 to 1770 (-6000 to 6000) correspond
to an analog voltage range of -10 to 10 V.
The entire output range is -11 to 11 V.
Specify the DA conversion data as the two's complement if it is a negative value.
11 V
10 V
E638 E890
8000 (−6600) (−6000) 0000 (0)
Conversion Data
0V 1770 19C8 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(6000) (6600)
−10 V
−11 V
0 to 10 V
When the resolution is 1/6,000, the hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to 6000) correspond to an
analog voltage range of 0 to 10 V.
The entire output range is -0.5 to 10.5 V.
10.5 V
10 V
FED4
8000 (−300) 0000 (0) Conversion
1770 189C 7FFF Data
0V
(6000) (6300) Hexadecimal
(Decimal)
−0.5 V

When the resolution is 1/12,000, the hexadecimal values 0000 to 2EE0 (0 to 12000) correspond to
an analog voltage range of 0 to 10 V.
Specify the DA conversion data as the two's complement if it is a negative value.
10.5 V
10 V
FDA8
8000 (−600) 0000 (0)
Conversion Data
0V 2EE0 3138 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(12000) (12600)
−0.5 V
1 to 5 V
analog voltage range of 1 to 5 V.
The entire output range is 0.8 to 5.2 V.
5.2 V
5V
1V
0.8 V
Conversion
Data

8000 FED4 0V 1770 189C 7FFF Hexadecimal
(−300) (6000) (6300) (Decimal)
an analog voltage range of 1 to 5 V.
5.2 V
5V
8
1V
0.8 V
Conversion Data
8000 FDA8 0V 2EE0 3138 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(−600) (12000) (12600)
0 to 20 mA
analog current range of 0 to 20 mA.
The entire output range is 0 to 21 mA.
21 mA
20 mA
0000 (0) Conversion

8000
Data
0 mA 1770 189C 7FFF Hexadecimal
(6000) (6300) (Decimal)

an analog voltage range of 0 to 20 mA.
21 mA
20 mA
8000 0000 (0)

Conversion Data
0 mA 2EE0 3138 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(12000) (12600)
4 to 20 mA
analog current range of 4 to 20 mA.
The entire output range is 3.2 to 20.8 mA.
20.8 mA
20 mA
4 mA
3.2 mA
Conversion
Data
8000 FED4 0 mA 1770 189C 7FFF Hexadecimal
(−300) (6000) (6300) (Decimal)
an analog voltage range of 4 to 20 mA.
20.8 mA
20 mA
4 mA
3.2 mA
Conversion Data
8000 FDA8 0 mA 2EE0 3138 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(−600) (12000) (12600)
1 Connect and wire Units.

• Connect Analog Output Units.
• Wire to analog input devices.

• Write range code to output words
CP1W-DA021: Word n+1
CP1W-DA041/DA042: Words n+1, n+2
• Set use of outputs.
• Select output signals using range codes.
• Write D/A conversion values to output words
CP1W-DA021: Words n+1, n+2
CP1W-DA041/DA042: Words n+1 to n+4

z Writing Set Data and Writing D/A Conversion Data
CP1W-DA021
CPU Unit Analog Output Unit
Ladder program Word (n+1) Set data (outputs 1, 2)
MOV
Word (n+1) Analog output 1 conversion value
Word (n+2) Analog output 2 conversion value Analog devices
• Adjustment equipment
Writes the set data. • Servo Controller
Writes the conversion • Variable speed device
values. • Recorder
Where “n” is the last output word • Other
allocated to the CPU Unit, or
previous Expansion Unit or
Expansion I/O Unit.
CP1W-DA041/CP1W-DA042
CPU Unit Analog Output Unit
Ladder program Word (n+1) Set data (outputs 1, 2)

Word (n+2) Set data (outputs 3, 4)
MOV
Word (n+2) Analog output 2 conversion value Analog devices
Writes the set data. • Servo Controller
Writes the conversion Word (n+4) Analog output 4 conversion value • Variable speed device
values. • Recorder
Where “n” is the last output word • Other
allocated to the CPU Unit, or

previous Expansion Unit or
Expansion I/O Unit.
1 Connect the Analog Output Unit to the CPU Unit.
CP1W-DA021/DA041
CP2E CPU Unit CP1W-DA042
Analog Output Unit 8
OUT CH
I OUT1 VOUT2 COM2 I OUT3 VOUT4 COM4 AG

2 Wire to analog input devices.

The following diagram shows the internal circuit using CP1W-DA041/DA042 as an example,
which wires analog outputs 1 to 4. In the case of CP1W-DA021, analog outputs 1 to 2 can
be used.
V OUT1
Analog output 1
I OUT1
Internal circuits
COM1 (−)
to to
V OUT4
I OUT4 Analog output 4
COM4 (−)
Analog ground NC
(2) Wiring analog input devices to the Analog Output Unit

twisted-pair cable twisted-pair cable
V OUT + V OUT +
Analog Analog
Analog device Analog device
I OUT I OUT
output with output with
unit COM − voltage unit COM − current
input input
FG FG

power supply.
When external power is supplied (when setting the range code), or when there is a power inter-
ruption, a pulse-form analog output may be generated.
If this causes problems with operation, take countermeasures such as those suggested below.
(1) Countermeasure 1
• Turn ON the power supply for the CP2E CPU Unit first, confirm correct operation, and
then turn ON the power supply for the load.
• Turn OFF the power supply for the load before turning OFF the power supply for the
CP2E CPU Unit.
• Control the machine not only by analog output but also by other signals (additional
start/stop control signal for machine).


(1) Allocating Output Words
Four output words (n+1 to n+4) are allocated to the Analog Output Unit starting from the
next word following the last word allocated to the CPU Unit or previous Expansion Unit or
Expansion I/O Unit. For CP1W-DA021, two output words (n+1, n+2) are allocated.
CP1W-DA041/DA042
Analog Output Unit
Words n+1 to n+4
(2) Writing Set Data

Write the output use and the range code to words n+1 and n+2. For CP1W-DA021, only
word n+1 can be used. The D/A conversion will start when the set data is transferred from
the CPU Unit to the Analog Output Unit.
15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Wd n+1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Even if analog outputs Analog output 2 Analog output 1

words n+1 and n+2
must be set to 1.
15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Wd n+2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Even if analog outputs Analog output 4 Analog output 3

words n+1 and n+2
must be set to 1.
• Set Data
8
Range code Analog output range
000 −10 to 10 V

001 0 to 10 V
010 1 to 5 V
011 0 to 20 mA
100 4 to 20 mA
Output use
0 No
1 Yes
• The Analog Output Unit will not start converting analog output values until the set data
has been written.
• Before the range code is written, 0 V or 0 mA will be output for the 0 to 10V, -10 to 10V,
or 0 to 20 mA ranges, and 1 V or 4 mA will be output for the 1 to 5V and 4 to 20 mA
ranges.
• Once the range code has been set, it is not possible to be changed while power is being
supplied to the CPU Unit. To change the range code, turn the CPU Unit OFF then ON
again.

(3) Writing Analog Output Conversion Values

The ladder program can be used to write conversion data to the output words.
When “n” is the last output word allocated to the CPU Unit, or previous Expansion Unit or
Expansion I/O Unit, the output words will be n+1 to n+2 for CP1W-DA021 and n+1 to n+4
for CP1W-DA041/DA042.
After power is turned ON, it will require two cycle times plus approximately 50 ms before the
first conversion data is output.
The following table shows the output status after the initial processing is completed.
Output type Voltage output Current output
Output range 0 to 10 V, 1 to 5 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
-10 to +10 V
Before range code 0V 0mA
is written
After range code is 0V 1V 0mA 4mA
written
Therefore, create a program as shown below, so that when operation begins simulta-
neously with startup it will wait for valid set data.
TIM0005 is started when the power is turned

Always ON Flag
ON. After 0.2 s (200 ms) elapses, the TIM0005
P_On
TIM
contact turns ON and the data stored in D100
will be moved to CIO 102 as the conversion
0005 data for analog output 1.
#0002
T0005
MOV
D100
102

• When an error occurs at the Analog Output Unit, the analog output will be 0 V or 0 mA.
If a CPU error or an I/O bus error (fatal errors) occurs at the CPU Unit and the analog
output is set to 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA, 0 V or 0 mA will be output. For any other fatal
errors at the CPU Unit, 1 V or 4 mA will be output.
• Expansion Unit and Expansion I/O Unit errors are output to bits 0 to 5 of word A436 for
units 1 to 3. The bits are allocated from A436.00 in order starting from the Unit nearest
the CPU Unit. CP1W-DA041/DA042 is allocated two bits each and CP1W-DA021 is allo-
cated one bit each. Use these flags in the probgram when it is necessary to detect
errors.

(6) Program Example (CP1W-DA041/DA042)

Analog output Output range Range code Set data Destination word
Output 1 0 to 10 V 001 1001 (9 hex) n+1
Output 2 4 to 20 mA 100 1100 (C hex) n+1
Output 3 -10 to 10 V 000 1000 (8 hex) n+2
Output 4 Not used. −(000) 0000 (0 hex) n+2
First Cycle Flag

A200.11
MOV
#80C9
102 Writes set data C and 9.
MOV
#8008 Writes set data 0 and 8.
Always ON Flag 103
P_On
TIM
0005
#0002
Execution
T0005 condition
MOV
D200
102 Writes analog output 1 conversion data.
Execution

T0005 condition
MOV
D201
Execution 103 Writes analog output 2 conversion data.

T0005 condition
MOV
D202
104 Writes analog output 3 conversion data.

• Example: Scaling analog output values

Convert a value between 200 and 500 in D300 into 2 to 5 V to output the voltage from the analog
output word (CIO 102) of CP1W-DA042.
Unscaled 500
data
(200 to
500) (D300) 㩷
200
3,000 (Data in CIO102) 12,000

(2V) (5V)
Value output to Analog Output Unit
(Scaled: 3,000 to 12,000)
Data memory settings

Control word D110 #0800
Unscaled minimum value (200) D111 &200
Scaled minimum value (3,000) D112 &3,000
Unscaled maximum value (500) D113 &500
Scaled maximum value (12,000) D114 &12,000
Ladder program
Always ON Flag
P_On
APR(069) Use APR instruction for scaling.
D110
D300
102
Refer to 8-1 Example: Scaling analog input values for the descriptions of APR instruction.

8-3 Analog I/O Units
8-3-1 CP1W-MAD11 Analog I/O Units
Overview
Each CP1W-MAD11 Analog I/O Unit provides 2 analog inputs and 1 analog output.
• The analog input range can be set to 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, or 4 to 20
mA. The inputs have a resolution of 1/6000. An open-circuit detection function is activated in the
ranges of 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA.
• The analog output range can be set to 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, or 4 to 20 mA. The
outputs have a resolution of 1/6000.
z CP1W-MAD11
(4) DIP switch

NC NC
(2) Expansion I/O connecting cable

(1) Analog I/O terminals
(1)Analog I/O Terminals 8

Connected to analog I/O devices.

• I/O Terminal Arrangements
V OUT Voltage output
I OUT Current output
COM Output common
COM0 Input common 0
I OUT NC NC V IN0 COM0 I IN1 AG
V OUT COM NC NC I IN0 V IN1 COM1
COM1 Input common 1
Note For current inputs, short V IN0 to I IN0 and V IN1 to I IN1.

Connected to the expansion connector of a CPU Unit or an Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
The cable is provided with the Analog I/O Unit and cannot be removed.


Used for connecting Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units.
(4)DIP Switch
Used to enable or disable averaging.
Pin 1: Average processing for analog input 0
(OFF: Average processing not performed; ON: Average processing performed)
Pin 2: Average processing for analog input 1
(OFF: Average processing not performed; ON: Average processing performed)
Specifications
CP1W-MAD11 Analog I/O Units are connected to the CP2E CPU Unit.
CP1W-20EDR1 CP1W-8ED CP1W-MAD11
CP2E CPU Unit Expansion I/O Unit Expansion I/O Unit Analog I/O Unit
C OM 01 03 05 07 09 11 C OM 01 03
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02
IN CH IN
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 C H 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11
20EDR1 8ED
OUT
CH
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP EXP
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 04 06 NC NC
N C C OM CO M C OM 03 CO M 06 C OM 05 07
1 analog output 2 analog inputs

Model CP1W-MAD11
Item Voltage I/O Current I/O
Analog Number of analog inputs 2 inputs (2 words allocated)
Input Input signal range 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
Section or -10 to 10 V
Max. rated input ±15 V ±30 mA
External input impedance 1 MΩ min. Approx. 250 Ω
Resolution 1/6000 (full scale)
-20 to 0°C 0.8% full scale 1% full scale
A/D conversion data 16-bit binary (4-digit hexadecimal)
Full scale for -10 to 10 V: F448 to 0BB8 hex
Full scale for other ranges: 0000 to 1770 hex
Averaging function Supported (Settable for individual inputs via DIP switch)
Open-circuit detection func- Supported
tion
Analog Number of outputs 1 output (1 word allocated)
Output Output signal range 1 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
Section or -10 to 10 VDC
Allowable external output 1 kΩ min. 600 Ω max.
load resistance

External output impedance 0.5 Ω max. −
Overall 25°C 0.4% full scale
accuracy 0 to 60°C 0.8% full scale
-20 to 0°C 1% full scale
Set data (D/A conversion) 16-bit binary (4-digit hexadecimal)
Full scale for -10 to 10 V: F448 to 0BB8 hex
8
Full scale for other ranges: 0000 to 1770 hex
Conversion time 2 ms/point (6 ms/all points)

Isolation method Photocoupler isolation between analog I/O terminals and internal cir-
cuits.
No isolation between analog I/O signals.
Current consumption 5 VDC: 83 mA max., 24 VDC: 110 mA max.
z Analog I/O Signal Ranges

Analog I/O data is digitally converted according to the analog I/O signal range as shown below.
When the input/output exceeds the specified range, the AD/DA converted data will be fixed at
either the lower limit or upper limit.

Analog Input Signal Ranges

-10 to 10 V
Voltages in the -10 to 10 V range corre-
Converted Data
Hexadecimal (Decimal) spond to hexadecimal values F448 to 0BB8
(-3,000 to 3,000). The range of data that can
0CE4 (3300) be converted is F31C to 0CE4 hex (-3,300
0BB8 (3000) to 3,300). A negative voltage is expressed
as a two’s complement.
−11V −10V 0000 (0)

0V 10 V 11 V
F448 (−3000)
F31C (−3300)
0 to 10 V
Converted Data Voltages in the 0 to 10 V range correspond
Hexadecimal (Decimal) to hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to
6,000). The range of data that can be con-
189C (6300) verted is FED4 to 189C hex (-300 to 6,300).
1770 (6000)
A negative voltage is expressed as a two’s
complement.
−0.5 V 0000 (0)

0V 10 V 10.5 V
FED4 (−300)
0 to 5 V
Voltages in the 0 to 5 V range correspond to
Converted Data
hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to
1770 (6000)
A negative voltage is expressed as a two’s
complement.
−0.25 V 0000 (0)

0V 5 V 5.25 V
FED4 (−300)

1 to 5 V
Voltages in the 1 to 5 V range correspond to
Converted Data
Hexadecimal (Decimal) hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to
1770 (6000)
Voltage in the range of 0.8 to 1 V is
If an input is below the range (i.e., less than
0.8 V), the open-circuit detection function is
0000 (0) 0.8 V activated and the data becomes 8,000.
1V 5 V 5.2 V
FED4 (−300)
0 to 20 mA
Currents in the 0 to 20 mA range corre-
Converted Data
spond to hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770
(0 to 6,000). The range of data that can be
189C (6300) converted is FED4 to 189C hex (-300 to
1770 (6000) 6,300). A negative current is expressed as a
two’s complement.
−1 mA 0000 (0)
0 mA 20 mA 21 mA
FED4 (−300)

4 to 20 mA
Currents in the 4 to 20 mA range corre-
Converted Data
Hexadecimal (Decimal) spond to hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770
(0 to 6,000). The range of data that can be
189C (6300) converted is FED4 to 189C hex (-300 to
1770 (6000) 6,300). Current in the range of 3.2 to 4 mA
is expressed as a two’s complement. If an
input is below the range (i.e., less than 3.2
mA), the open-circuit detection function is
8
activated and the data becomes 8,000.
0000 (0) 3.2 mA
0 mA

4 mA 20 mA 20.8 mA
FED4 (−300)

Analog Output Signal Ranges

-10 to 10 V
The hexadecimal values F448 to 0BB8 (-3000 to 3000) correspond to an analog voltage range of
-10 to 10 V.
The entire output range is -11 to 11V.
11 V
10 V
F31C F448
8000 (−3300) (−3000) 0000 (0)
Conversion Data
0V 0BB8 0CE4 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(3000) (3300)
−10 V
−11 V
0 to 10 V
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to 6000) correspond to an analog voltage range of 0 to 10 V.
10.5 V
10 V
FED4
8000 (−300) 0000 (0)
Conversion Data
0V 1770 189C 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(6000) (6300)
−0.5 V
1 to 5 V
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to 6000) correspond to an analog voltage range of 1 to 5 V.
5.2 V
5V
1V
0.8 V
Conversion Data
8000 FED4 0 V 1770 189C 7FFF
(−300) (6000) (6300) Hexadecimal (Decimal)

0 to 20 mA
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to 6000) correspond to an analog current range of 0 to 20 mA.
21 mA
20 mA
8000 0000 (0)

1770 189C Conversion Data
0 mA 7FFF
(6000) (6300) Hexadecimal (Decimal)
4 to 20 mA
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to 6000) correspond to an analog current range of 4 to 20 mA.
20.8 mA
20 mA
4 mA
3.2 mA
Conversion Data

8000 FED4 0 mA 1770 189C 7FFF
z Averaging Function for Analog Inputs

The averaging function can be enabled for inputs using the DIP switch. The averaging function out-
puts the average (a moving average) of the last eight input values as the converted value. 8
Use this function to smooth inputs that vary at a short interval.
z Open-circuit Detection Function for Analog Inputs 8-3-1 CP1W-MAD11 Analog I/O Units
age drops below 0.8 V, or when the input range is set to 4 to 20 mA and the current drops below
3.2 mA.
verting the data.
If the input returns to the convertible range, the open-circuit detection is cleared automatically and
the output returns to the normal range.

Flow of Operation
1 Connect the Unit.

• Connect the Analog I/O Unit.
• Set analog inputs as voltage or current inputs and set the averag-
ing function.
2 Wire the analog I/O.

• Connect analog I/O devices.

• Write the range code.
• Analog inputs: Read converted values.
• Analog output: Write set data.
z Writing Set Data and Reading A/D Converted Values

CPU Unit Analog I/O Unit
Ladder program
Word (n+1) Set data
Analog input 0
Word (m+1) converted value
MOV
Word (m+2) Analog input 1
• Writes the set data.
• Reads the converted
converted value
values.
Analog devices
“m” is the last input word and “n” is the last • Temperature sensor
output word allocated to the CPU Unit or • Pressure sensor
previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit. • Speed sensor
• Flow sensor
• Other
z Writing D/A Conversion Data

CPU Unit Analog I/O Unit
Ladder program (*)

Analog output
Word (n+1)
conversion value
MOV
Writes the conversion

values.
Analog devices
“n” is the last output word allocated to the CPU • Servo Controller
Unit or previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O • Variable speed device
Unit. • Recorder
• Other
* Word (n+1) can be used for either the set data or the analog output conversion value.

1 Connect the Analog I/O Unit to the CPU Unit.
CP1W-MAD11
CP2E CPU Unit Analog I/O Unit
NC NC
• Setting the Averaging Function

DIP switch pins 1 and 2 are used to set the averaging function. When averaging is enabled, a
moving average of the last eight input values is output as the converted value. The averaging
function can be set separately for analog inputs 0 and 1.
DIP switch pin Function Setting Default
1 Averaging Analog input 0 OFF
OFF: Disabled; ON: Enabled
2 Analog input 1 OFF
OFF: Disabled; ON: Enabled

2 Wire to analog I/O devices.
• Analog Inputs • Analog Outputs
Input 0 Output
510 kΩ
V IN0 V OUT
I IN0
250 Ω
COM0 (−) 8
Internal circuits
Internal circuits
COM (−)
510 kΩ
Input 1
V IN1

510 kΩ I OUT
I IN1
250 Ω
COM1 (−)
510 kΩ NC
AG
NC
Analog ground Analog ground
(2) Wiring analog output devices to the Analog I/O Unit

Analog + V IN Analog + V IN
device Analog device Analog
I IN I IN
with Input with Input
voltage − COM Unit current − COM Unit
output output
FG FG

(3) Wiring analog input devices to the Analog I/O Unit

V OUT + Analog V OUT + Analog
I OUT I OUT
Output with Output with
Unit COM − voltage Unit COM − current
input input
FG FG

power supply terminals.
A
Analog
output
device 1
B C
Internal
circuits
Analog
output
device 2
24 VDC
Example: If connected device 2 is outputting 5 V and the same power supply is being used for both
result. Either separate the power supplies for the connected devices, or use an isolator for each input.

points A or B in the above diagram, an unwanted circuit path will occur as shown along the dotted line
in the diagram. If that occurs, a voltage of approximately 1/3 to 1/2 of the output voltage of the other
connected device will be generated.
• If that voltage is generated while the setting is for 1 to 5 V, open-circuit detection may not be possible.
• If a disconnection occurs at point C in the diagram, the negative (-) side will be used for both devices
and open-circuit detection will not be possible.
CP2E CPU Unit.

Two input words and one output word are allocated to the Analog I/O Unit starting from the
next word following the last word allocated to the CPU Unit or previous Expansion Unit or
Expansion I/O Unit.
Analog I/O Unit
Word m+1
Word m+2
8
32 inputs

16 outputs
Word n+1
(2) Writing the Set Data

Write the set data to word n+1. A/D or D/A conversion begins when the set data is trans-
ferred from the CPU Unit to the Analog I/O Unit. There are five range codes, 000 to 100,
that combine the analog input 0 and 1 and analog output ranges, as shown below.
Range code Analog input 0 range Analog input 1 range Analog output range
000 -10 to 10 V -10 to 10 V -10 to 10 V
001 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V
010 1 to 5 V/4 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V/4 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V
011 0 to 5 V/0 to 20 mA 0 to 5 V/0 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA
100 − − 4 to 20 mA

15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
word n+1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

output input 1 input 0
Example: The following instructions set analog input 0 to 4 to 20 mA, analog input 1 to 0 to 10 V,
and the analog output to -10 to 10 V.
First Cycle Flag
A200.11
MOV Analog input 0: 4 to 20 mA
#800A Analog input 1: 0 to 10 V
Analog output: -10 to 10 V
n+1
• The Analog I/O Unit will not start converting analog I/O values until the range code has
been written. Inputs will be 0000, and 0 V or 0 mA will be output.
• After the range code has been set, 0 V or 0 mA will be output for the 0 to 10V, -10 to 10V,
or 0 to 20mA ranges, and 1 V or 4 mA will be output for the 1 to 5V and 4 to 20mA
ranges until a convertible value has been written to the output word.
• Once the range code has been set, it is not possible to change the setting while power is
being supplied to the CPU Unit. To change the I/O range, turn the CPU Unit OFF then
ON again.
(3) Reading Analog Input Converted Values

The ladder program can be used to read the memory area words where the converted val-
ues are stored.
Values are output to the next two words (m + 1, m + 2) following the last input word (m) allo-
cated to the CPU Unit or previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
(4) Writing Analog Output Converted Values

The ladder program can be used to write data to the memory area where the set value is
stored.
The output word will be “n+1”, where “n” is the last output word allocated to the CPU Unit or
previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.

After the power is turned ON, it will require two cycle times plus approximately 50 ms before
the first conversion data is stored in the input words. Therefore, create a program as shown
below, so that when operation begins simultaneously with startup it will wait for valid conver-
sion data.
Analog input data will be 0000 until initial processing is completed. Analog output data will
be 0 V or 0 mA until the range code has been written. After the range code has been writ-
ten, the analog output data will be 0 V or 0 mA if the range is 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V, or 0 to
20 mA, or it will be 1 V or 4 mA if the range is 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA.
Always ON Flag
P_On TIM0005 is started when the power is turned
TIM ON. After 0.2 s (200 ms) elapses, the TIM0005
0005 contact turns ON and the converted data from
analog input 0 that is stored in CIO 2 will be
#0002
transferred to D0.
T0005
MOV
2
D0


• When an error occurs in the Analog I/O Unit, analog input data will be 0000 and 0 V or 0
mA will be output as the analog output.
If a CPU error or an I/O bus error (fatal errors) occurs at the CPU Unit and the analog
output is set to 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA, 0 V or 0 mA will be output. For any other fatal
errors at the CPU Unit, 1 V or 4 mA will be output.
• Expansion Unit and Expansion I/O Unit errors are output to bits 0 to 5 of word A436. The
bits are allocated from A436.00 in order starting from the Unit nearest the CPU Unit. Use
these flags in the program when it is necessary to detect errors.
(7) Programming Example

Analog input 0: 0 to 10 V
Analog input 1: 4 to 20 mA
Analog output : 0 to 10 V
First Cycle Flag

A200.11
MOV
#8051
102 Writes the range code (8051) to the Unit.
Always ON Flag
P_On
TIM
0005
#0002

Execution
T0005 condition
MOV
2
D0 Reads analog input 0’s converted value.
Execution
T0005 condition
MOV
3 8
D1 Reads analog input 1’s converted value.
Execution

T0005
condition
MOV
D10
102 The content of D10 is written to the output
Execution word as the analog output set value.
T0005 condition
CMP
3
#8000
P_EQ
100.00 Open-circuit alarm

8-3-2 CP1W-MAD42/CP1W-MAD44 Analog I/O Units
Overview
Each CP1W-MAD42 Analog I/O Unit provides 4 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs.
Each CP1W-MAD44 Analog I/O Unit provides 4 analog inputs and 4 analog outputs.
• The analog input range can be set to 0 to 5 VDC, 1 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, −10 to 10 VDC, 0 to 20
mA, or 4 to 20 mA. The inputs have a resolution of 1/12000.
An open-circuit detection function is activated in the ranges of 1 to 5 VDC and 4 to 20 mA.
• The analog output range can be set to 1 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, −10 to 10 VDC, 0 to 20 mA, or 4 to
20 mA. The outputs have a resolution of 1/12000.
z CP1W-MAD42/CP1W-MAD44
(1) Analog Input terminals
(3) Expansion I/O connecting cable (2) Analog Output terminals
(1)Analog Input Terminals

Connected to analog output devices.
• Input Terminal Arrangement for CP1W-MAD42/MAD44
COM1 Input common 1
COM2 Input common 2
COM3 Input common 3
COM4 Input common 4
(2)Analog Output Terminals
Connected to analog input devices.

• Output Terminal Arrangement for CP1W-MAD42

• Output Terminal Arrangement for CP1W-MAD44


Connected to the expansion connector of a CPU Unit or an Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
The cable is provided with the Analog I/O Unit and cannot be removed.

(4)Expansion Connector 8
Units
8-3-2 CP1W-MAD42/CP1W-MAD44 Analog I/O
Specifications
CP1W-MAD42/MAD44 Analog I/O Units are connected to the CP2E CPU Unit.
CP1W-20EDR1 CP1W-8ED CP1W-MAD42/MAD44
CP2E CPU Unit Expansion I/O Unit Expansion I/O Unit Analog I/O Unit
4 analog inputs
C OM 01 03 05 07 09 11 C OM 01 03
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02
IN CH IN
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 C H 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11
20EDR1 8ED
OUT
CH
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP EXP
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 04 06
CP1W-MAD42: 2 analog outputs

CP1W-MAD44: 4 analog outputs

Model CP1W-MAD42/CP1W-MAD44
Item Voltage I/O Current I/O
Analog Number of inputs 4 inputs (4 words allocated)
Input Input signal range 0 to 5 VDC, 1 to 5 VDC, 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
Section 0 to 10 VDC, or −10 to 10 VDC
Max. rated input ±15 V ±30 mA
External input impedance 1 MΩ min. Approx. 250 Ω
-20 to 0°C 0.7% full scale 0.9% full scale
A/D conversion data 16-bit binary (4-digit hexadecimal)
Full scale for −10 to 10 V: E890 to 1770 hex
Full scale for other ranges: 0000 to 2EE0 hex
Averaging function Supported
Open-circuit detection func- Supported
tion
Analog Number of outputs CP1W-MAD42: 2 outputs (2 words allocated)
Output CP1W-MAD44: 4 outputs (4 words allocated)
Section
Output signal range 1 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
−10 to 10 VDC
Allowable external output 2 kΩ min. 350 Ω max.
load resistance
External output impedance 0.5 Ω max.
Overall 25°C 0.3% full scale
accuracy 0 to 60°C 0.7% full scale
-20 to 0°C 0.9% full scale
Set data (D/A conversion) 16-bit binary (4-digit hexadecimal)
Full scale for −10 to 10 V: E890 to 1770 hex
Full scale for other ranges: 0000 to 2EE0 hex
Conversion time CP1W-MAD42: 1 ms/point (6 ms/all points)
CP1W-MAD44: 1 ms/point (8 ms/all points)
Isolation method Photocoupler isolation between analog I/O terminals and internal circuits.
No isolation between analog I/O signals.
Current consumption CP1W-MAD42: 5 VDC: 120 mA max., 24 VDC: 120 mA max.
CP1W-MAD44: 5 VDC: 120 mA max., 24 VDC: 170 mA max.
z Analog I/O Signal Ranges

Analog I/O data is digitally converted according to the analog I/O signal range as shown below.
When the input/output exceeds the specified range, the AD/DA converted data will be fixed at
either the lower limit or upper limit.

Analog Input Signal Ranges

−10 to 10 V
The −10 to 10 V range corresponds to the hexadecimal values E890 to 1770 (−6000 to 6000). The
entire data range is E638 to 19C8 (−6600 to 6600).
A negative voltage is expressed as a two’s complement.
Converted Data
19C8 (6600)
1770 (6000)
−11V −10V 0000 (0)

0V 10 V 11 V
E890 (−6000)
E638 (−6600)
0 to 10 V
The 0 to 10 V range corresponds to the hexadecimal values 0000 to 2EE0 (0 to 12000). The entire
data range is FDA8 to 3138 (−600 to 12600). A negative voltage is expressed as a two’s comple-
ment.

Converted Data
3138 (12600)
2EE0 (12000)
−0.5 V 0000 (0)

0V 10 V 10.5 V 8
FDA8 (−600)
Units
0 to 5 V
ment.
Converted Data
3138 (12600)
2EE0 (12000)
−0.25 V 0000 (0)

0V 5 V 5.25 V
FDA8 (−600)

1 to 5 V
data range is FDA8 to 3138 (−600 to 12600). Inputs between 0.8 and 1 V are expressed as two’s
complements. If the input falls below 0.8 V, open-circuit detection will activate and converted data
will be 8000.
Converted Data
3138 (12600)
2EE0 (12000)
0000 (0) 0.8 V

1V 5 V 5.2 V
FDA8 (−600)
0 to 20 mA
The 0 to 20 mA range corresponds to the hexadecimal values 0000 to 2EE0 (0 to 12000). The entire
data range is FDA8 to 3138 (−600 to 12600). A negative current is expressed as a two’s comple-
ment.
Converted Data
3138 (12600)
2EE0 (12000)
−1 mA 0000 (0)
0 mA 20 mA 21 mA
FDA8 (−600)
4 to 20 mA
data range is FDA8 to 3138 (−600 to 12600). Inputs between 3.2 and 4 mA are expressed as two’s
complements. If the input falls below 3.2 mA, open-circuit detection will activate and converted data
will be 8000.
Converted Data
3138 (12600)
2EE0 (12000)
0000 (0) 3.2 mA

0 mA 4 mA 20 mA 20.8 mA
FDA8 (−600)

Analog Output Signal Ranges

−10 to 10 V
The hexadecimal values E890 to 1770 (−6000 to 6000) correspond to an analog voltage range of −10
to 10 V. The entire output range is −11 to 11 V. Specify a negative voltage as a two’s complement.
11 V
10 V
E638 E890
8000 (−6600) (−6000) 0000 (0)
Conversion Data
0V 1770 19C8 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(6000) (6600)
−10 V
−11 V
0 to 10 V
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 2EE0 (0 to 12000) correspond to an analog voltage range of 0 to
10 V. The entire output range is −0.5 to 10.5 V. Specify a negative voltage as a two’s complement.
10.5 V
10 V

FDA8
8000 (−600) 0000 (0)
Conversion Data
0V 2EE0 3138 7FFF Hexadecimal (Decimal)
(12000) (12600)
−0.5 V
1 to 5 V
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 2EE0 (0 to 12000) correspond to an analog voltage range of 1 to 8
5 V. The entire output range is 0.8 to 5.2 V.
Units
5.2 V
5V
1V
0.8 V
Conversion Data
8000 FDA8 0 V 2EE0 3138 7FFF

0 to 20 mA
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 2EE0 (0 to 12000) correspond to an analog current range of 0 to
20 mA. The entire output range is 0 to 21 mA.
21 mA
20 mA
8000 0000 (0)

2EE0 3138 Conversion Data
0 mA 7FFF
(12000) (12600) Hexadecimal (Decimal)
4 to 20 mA
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 2EE0 (0 to 12000) correspond to an analog current range of 4 to
20 mA. The entire output range is 3.2 to 20.8 mA.
20.8 mA
20 mA
4 mA
3.2 mA
7FFF Conversion Data
8000 FDA8 0 mA 2EE0 3138
z Averaging Function for Analog Inputs

For analog inputs, the averaging function operates when the averaging bit is set to 1. The averaging
function outputs the average (a moving average) of the last eight input values as the converted
value. If there is only a slight variation in inputs, it is handled by the averaging function as a smooth
input.
The averaging function stores the average (a moving average) of the last eight input values as the
converted value. Use this function to smooth inputs that vary at a short interval.
z Open-circuit Detection Function for Analog Inputs

The open-circuit detection function is activated when the input range is set to 1 to 5 V and the voltage
drops below 0.8 V, or when the input range is set to 4 to 20 mA and the current drops below 3.2 mA.

Flow of Operation
1 Connect the Unit.

• Connect the Analog I/O Unit.
• Set analog inputs as voltage or current inputs and set the averag-
ing function.
2 Wire the analog I/O.

• Connect analog I/O devices.

• Write the range code.
• Analog inputs: Read converted values.
• Analog output: Write set data.
z Writing Set Data and Reading A/D Converted Data

CPU Unit CP1W-MAD42
Set data (input 1, 2
Word (n+1) and output 1)
Ladder program Set data (input 3, 4
Word (n+2)
and output 2)
Analog input 1
Word (m+1)
MOV converted value
Analog input 2
• Writes the set data. Word (m+2)
converted value
Analog input 3

values.
Word (m+3)
converted value
Word (m+4)
Analog input 4
converted value
Analog devices
• Flow sensor 8
• Other
Units
CPU Unit CP1W-MAD44
Set data
Word (n+1) (input 1, 2)
Set data
Word (n+2) (input 3, 4)
Ladder program
Set data
Word (n+3) (output 1, 2)
Set data
MOV Word (n+4) (output 3, 4)
• Writes the set data. Analog input 1
values. Analog input 2
Analog input 3
Word (m+3)
converted value
Word (m+4)
Analog input 4
converted value
Analog devices
• Flow sensor
• Other

z Writing D/A Conversion Data

CPU Unit CP1W-MAD42
Ladder program (*)

Analog output 1
Word (n+1) conversion value
Analog output 2
Word (n+2)
MOV conversion value
Writes the conversion

values.
Analog devices
Unit. • Recorder
• Other
* Words (n+1, n+2) can be used for either the set data or the analog output conversion value.
CPU Unit CP1W-MAD44
Ladder program (*)

Word (n+1)
Analog output 1
conversion value
Word (n+2) Analog output 2
MOV conversion value
Word (n+3) Analog output 3
Writes the conversion conversion value
values.
Word (n+4)
Analog output 4
conversion value
Analog devices
Unit. • Recorder
• Other
* Words (n+1 to n+4) can be used for either the set data or the analog output conversion value.
1 Connect the Analog I/O Unit to the CPU Unit.
CP1W-MAD42/44
CP2E CPU Unit Analog I/O Unit

2 Wire to analog I/O devices.

Analog Inputs
V IN1
510 kΩ 250 Ω
I IN1 Analog input 1
COM1 (−)
Internal circuits
510 kΩ
to to
V IN4
510 kΩ 250 Ω
I IN4 Analog input 4
COM4 (−)
510 kΩ
AG
Analog ground
Analog Outputs (CP1W-MAD42) Analog Outputs (CP1W-MAD44)
V OUT1 V OUT1
Analog Analog
COM1 (−) COM1 (−)
output 1 output 1
I OUT1 I OUT1
Internal circuits
Internal circuits

to to to to
V OUT2 V OUT4
Analog Analog
COM2 (−) COM4 (−)
output 2 output 4
I OUT2 I OUT4
NC NC
8
NC NC
Analog ground Analog ground
Units
(2) Wiring analog output devices to the Analog I/O Unit

I IN I IN
with Input with Input
voltage − COM Unit current − COM Unit
output output
FG FG
(3) Wiring analog input devices to the Analog I/O Unit

I OUT I OUT
Output with Output with
input input
FG FG


power supply terminals.
A
Analog
output
device 1
B C
Internal
circuits
Analog
output
device 2
24 VDC
Example: If connected device 2 is outputting 5 V and the same power supply is being used for both
result. Either separate the power supplies for the connected devices, or use an isolator for each input.
points A or B in the above diagram, an unwanted circuit path will occur as shown along the dotted line
in the diagram. If that occurs, a voltage of approximately 1/3 to 1/2 of the output voltage of the other
connected device will be generated.
• If that voltage is generated while the setting is for 1 to 5 V, open-circuit detection may not be possible.
• If a disconnection occurs at point C in the diagram, the negative (-) side will be used for both devices
and open-circuit detection will not be possible.

CP2E CPU Unit.

Four input words and two output words are allocated to the CP1W-MAD42, starting from
the next word following the last word allocated to the CPU Unit or previous Expansion Unit
or Expansion I/O Unit.
Four input words and four output words are allocated to the CP1W-MAD44, starting from
the next word following the last word allocated to the CPU Unit or previous Expansion Unit
or Expansion I/O Unit.

CP1W-MAD42 CP1W-MAD44
Word m+1 Word m+1
Word m+2 Word m+2
Word m+3 Word m+3
Word m+4 Word m+4
Word n+1 Word n+1

Word n+2 Word n+2
Word n+3
8
Word n+4
(2) Writing the Range Code
Units
(a) CP1W-MAD42
Write the set data to words (n+1 to n+2). A/D or D/A conversion begins when the set
data is transferred from the CPU Unit to the Analog I/O Unit. Setting contents are
shown as the following table.
Word (n+1) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 1 0 0 0 Analog output 1 Analog input 2 Analog input 1
Word (n+2) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 1 0 0 0 Analog output 2 Analog input 4 Analog input 3

(b) CP1W-MAD44
Write the set data to words (n+1 to n+4). A/D or D/A conversion begins when the set
data is transferred from the CPU Unit to the Analog I/O Unit. Setting contents are
shown as the following table.
Word (n+1) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Analog input 2 Analog input 1
Word (n+2) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Analog input 4 Analog input 3
Word (n+3) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Analog output 2 Analog output 1
Word (n+4) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Analog output 4 Analog output 3
Even if analog inputs are not used, bit 15 in word (n+1) and (n+2) must be set to 1.
• Set Data of Analog Inputs
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value Enable Average AD Range Code Enable Average AD Range Code
Enable Bit Average Bit AD Range Code

0 : Disable channel 0 : Disable 00 : −10 to 10V
1 : Enable channel 1 : Enable 01 : 0 to 10V
10 : 1 to 5V (4 to 20mA)
11 : 0 to 5V (0 to 20mA)
Range Code Analog input range

00 −10 to 10 V
01 0 to 10 V
10 1 to 5 V (4 to 20 mA)
11 0 to 5 V (0 to 20 mA)
• Set Data of Analog Outputs
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value Enable DA Range Enable DA Range
Enable Bit DA Range

0 : Disable channel 000 : -10 to 10
1 : Enable channel 001 : 0 to 10V
010 : 1 to 5V
011 : 0 to 20m
100 : 4 to 20m
Range Code Analog output range

000 −10 to 10 V
001 0 to 10 V
010 1 to 5 V
011 0 to 20 mA
100 4 to 20 mA
• The Analog I/O Unit will not start converting analog I/O values until the set data has
been written.
• Before range code is written, 0 V or 0 mA will be output in the 0 to 10 V, −10 to +10 V,
and 0 to 20 mA ranges, and 1 V or 4 mA will be output in the 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA
ranges.
• Once the range code has been set, it is not possible to be changed while power is being
supplied to the CPU Unit. To change the code range, turn the CPU Unit OFF then ON
again.

(3) Averaging
Set whether averaging is to be used for set data. When the averaging bit is set to 1, the
average (moving average) for the past eight inputs is output as conversion data.
(4) Reading Analog Input Converted Values
Read the conversion value storage area with the ladder program. With word m as the last
input word allocated to the CPU Unit or an already-connected Expansion Unit, the A/D con-
version data will be output to the following words m+1 to m+4.
(5) Writing Analog Output Converted Values
The ladder program can be used to write conversion data to the output words. The output
word start from “n+1” where “n” is the last output word allocated to the CPU Unit, or previ-
ous Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
After power is turned ON, it will require two cycle times plus approximately 50ms before the
first conversion data is output.
Analog input data will be 0000 until the first conversion data is stored in the input words.
The following table shows the output status after the initial processing is completed.
Output type Voltage output Current output
Output range 0 to 10 V, 1 to 5 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
-10 to +10 V
Before range code 0V 0mA
is written
After range code is 0V 1V 0mA 4mA
written

Therefore, create a program as shown below, so that the ladder can start to operate with
valid conversion data in input words.
Always ON Flag
P_On TIM0005 is started when the power is turned
TIM ON. After 0.2 s (200 ms) elapses, the TIM0005
0005 contact turns ON and the converted data from
analog input 0 that is stored in CIO 2 will be
#0002
transferred to D0.
8
T0005
MOV
Units
2
D0

When an error occurs in the Analog I/O Unit, analog input data will be 0000 and 0 V or 0 mA
will be output as the analog output.
If a CPU error or an I/O bus error (fatal errors) occurs at the CPU Unit and the analog out-
put is set to 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA, 0 V or 0 mA will be output. For any other errors at the
CPU Unit, 1 V or 4 mA will be output.
CP2E CP1W-MAD42 CP1W-MAD44

Input word CIO 0 CIO 2 CIO 6
addresses CIO 1 CIO 3 CIO 7
CIO 4 CIO 8
CIO 5 CIO 9
CIO 104
CIO 105
Output word CIO 100 CIO 102 CIO 106
addresses CIO 101 CIO 103 CIO 107

This programming example uses these ranges:

(a) CP1W-MAD42
Analog Input Range Averaging Set data Destination
input range code word
Input 2 0 to 10 V 01 Yes 1101 (D hex) n+1
Input 3 0 to 5 V 11 Yes 1111 (F hex) n+2
Input 4 -10 to 10 V 00 Yes 1100 (C hex) n+2
Output 1 -10 to 10 V 000 − 1000 (8 hex) n+1
Output 2 4 to 20 mA 100 − 1100 (C hex) n+2
(a) CP1W-MAD44
Analog Input Range Averaging Set data Destination
input range code word
Input 2 0 to 10 V 01 No 1001 (9 hex) n+1
Input 3 0 to 5 V 11 Yes 1111 (F hex) n+2
Input 4 -10 to 10 V 00 Yes 1100 (C hex) n+2
Output 1 -10 to 10 V 000 − 1000 (8 hex) n+3
Output 2 4 to 20 mA 100 − 1100 (C hex) n+3
Output 3 0 to 10 V 001 − 1001 (9 hex) n+4
Output 4 Not use − − 0000 (0 hex) n+4
First Cycle Flag

A200.11
MOV
#88DE
102 ← Writes the range code of CP1W-MAD42 to the Unit.
A200.11
MOV
#8CCF
103
A200.11
MOV
#809E
104 ← Writes the range code of CP1W-MAD44 to the Unit.
A200.11
MOV
#80CF
105
A200.11
MOV
#80C8
106
A200.11
MOV
#8009
107

Always ON Flag
P_On
TIM
0005
#0002
Execution
T0005 condition
MOV
2
D0 ← Reads analog input 1’s of CP1W-MAD42 converted value.
Execution
T0005 condition
MOV
3
Execution
T0005 condition
MOV
6
Execution
T0005 condition
MOV
7
Execution
T0005
condition
MOV

D10
102 ← The content of D10 is written to the output
Execution word as the analog output conversion value.
T0005 condition
CMP
2 Open-circuit detection (4 to 20 mA)
#8000
(P_EQ)
8
Units
Execution
T0005
condition
MOV
D12
104 ← The content of D10 is written to the output
Execution word as the analog output conversion value.
T0005 condition
CMP
6 Open-circuit detection (4 to 20 mA)
#8000
(P_EQ)

8-4 Temperature Sensor Units
8-4-1 CP1W-TS1/TS2 Temperature Sensor Units
Overview
CP1W-TS002/TS102 Temperature Sensor Units each provide up to four input points, and CP1W-
TS001/TS101 Temperature Sensor Units each provide up to two input points. The inputs can be from
thermocouples or platinum resistance thermometers.
CP1W-TS002/TS102 Temperature Sensor Units are each allocated four input words.
z Temperature Sensor Units: CP1W-TS001/002/101/102
(2) DIP Switch (3) Rotary Switch
(5) Expansion Connector
(4) Expansion I/O

Connecting Cable (1) Temperature Sensor Input Terminals
(1)Temperature Sensor Input Terminals

Used to connect temperature sensors such as thermocouples or platinum resistance thermome-
ters.
(2)DIP Switch
Used to set the temperature unit (°C or °F) and the number of decimal places used.
(3)Rotary Switch
Used to set the temperature input range. Make the setting according to the specifications of the
temperature sensors that are connected.

Connected to the expansion connector of a CP2E CPU Unit or an Expansion Unit or Expansion
I/O Unit. The cable is included with the Temperature Sensor Unit and cannot be removed.


Specifications
A CP1W-TS01/TS02 Temperature Sensor Unit can be connected to a CP2E CPU Unit.
CP2E CPU Unit CP1W-20EDR1 CP1W-8ED CP1W-TS 01/TS 02

Expansion I/O Unit Expansion I/O Unit Temperature Sensor Unit
C OM 01 03 05 07 09 11 C OM 01 03
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02
IN CH IN
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 C H 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11
20EDR1 8ED
OUT
CH00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP EXP
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 04 06
Thermocouples or
platinum resistance
thermometers
Temperature inputs
Model CP1W-TS001 CP1W-TS002 CP1W-TS101 CP1W-TS102

Temperature sensors Thermocouples Platinum resistance thermometer
Switchable between K and J, but same Switchable between Pt100 and JPt100,
type must be used for all inputs. but same type must be used for all

inputs.
Number of inputs 2 4 2 4
Allocated input words 2 4 2 4
Accuracy 25°C (The larger of ±0.5% of converted (The larger of ±0.5% of converted value
value or ±2°C) ±1 digit max. * or ±1°C) ±1 digit max.
0 to 60°C (The larger of ±1% of converted value (The larger of ±1% of converted value
or ±4°C) ±1 digit max. * or ±2°C) ±1 digit max.
-20 to 0°C (The larger of ±1.3% of converted (The larger of ±1.3% of converted value
value or ±5°C) ±1 digit max. or ±3°C) ±1 digit max.
Conversion time 250 ms for 2 or 4 input points
8
Converted temperature data 16-bit binary data (4-digit hexadecimal)
Isolation Photocouplers between all temperature input signals
Units
8-4-1 CP1W-TS1/TS2 Temperature Sensor
Current consumption 5 VDC: 40 mA max., 5 VDC: 54 mA max.,
24 VDC: 59 mA max. 24 VDC: 73 mA max.
* Accuracy for a K-type sensor at -100°C or less is ±4°C ±1 digit max.

Flow of Operation
1 Connect the Temperature

Sensor Units.
• Connect the Temperature Sensor Units to the CPU Unit.
2 Set the temperature ranges.

• Set the temperature unit, 2-decimal-place mode if required, and
set the temperature input range.
3 Connect the temperature

sensors.
• Connect temperature sensors.
4 Operation in the ladder

program.
• Read temperature data stored in the input words.
1 Connect the Temperature Sensor Unit to the CPU Unit.
CP1W-20EDR1 CP1W-8ED CP1W-TS001/101

CP2E CPU Unit
COM 01 030 5 07 09 11 COM 01 03

NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02
IN CH IN
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 CH 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11
20EDR1 8ED
OUT
CH
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP EXP
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 04 06
NC COM COM C OM 03C OM 06 COM 050 7
2 Set temperature ranges.

With the Temperature Sensor Unit’s DIP switch and rotary switch, set the temperature unit, the
number of decimal places, and the temperature input range.

Do not touch the DIP switch or rotary switch while power is being supplied. Static electricity may
cause operating errors.


Always turn OFF the power supply before setting the temperature range.
DIP Switch Rotary Switch

Used to set the temperature Used to set the
unit and the number of temperature input range.
decimal places used.
Temperature input terminals
(1) DIP Switch Settings

The DIP switch is used to set the temperature unit (°C or °F) and the number of decimal
places.
SW Setting
ON
1 Temperature unit OFF °C
ON °F

1 2
2 Number of deci- OFF Normal (0 or 1 digit after the decimal
mal places* point, depending on the input range)
ON 2-decimal-place Mode
* For details on 2-decimal-place Mode, refer to Two-decimal-place Mode in Function Descriptions.

(2) Rotary Switch Setting
Caution
Set the temperature range according to the type of temperature sensor
connected to the Unit. 8
Temperature data will not be converted correctly if the temperature range
does not match the sensor.
Units
Do not set the temperature range to any values other than those for
which temperature ranges are given in the following table.
The rotary switch is used to set the temperature range.

CP1W-TS001/TS002 CP1W-TS101/TS102
Set-
ting Input Input
Range (°C) Range (°F) Range (°C) Range (°F)
type type
0 K -200 to 1,300 -300 to 2,300 Pt100 -200.0 to -300.0 to
650.0 1,200.0
1 0.0 to 500.0 0.0 to 900.0 JPt100 -200.0 to -300.0 to
650.0 1,200.0
2 J -100 to 850 -100 to 1,500 − Cannot be set.
3 0.0 to 400.0 0.0 to 750.0 −
4 to F − Cannot be set. −

3 Connect Temperature Sensors.

(1) Thermocouples
(a) CP1W-TS001
Either K or J thermocouples can be connected to the CP1W-TS001, but both
thermocouples must be the same type and the same input range.
Input 0 Input 1 NC NC NC
+ +
Input 0 Input 1 NC NC NC NC NC
− −
Temperature input 0
Cold junction compensator
Temperature input 1
(b) CP1W-TS002
Up to four K or J thermocouples can be connected to the CP1W-TS002, but all four
thermocouples must be the same type and the same input range.
Input 0 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 NC

+ + + +
Input 0 Input 1 NC NC NC Input 2 Input 3
− − − −
Temperature input 0
Cold junction Temperature input 2
compensator
Temperature input 1 Temperature input 3

When connecting a thermocouple input, observe the following precautions:
• Do not remove the cold junction compensator attached at the time of delivery. If the cold junc-
tion compensator is removed, the Unit will not be able to measure temperatures correctly.
• Each of the input circuits is calibrated with the cold junction compensator attached to the Unit.
If the Unit is used with the cold junction compensator from other Units, the Unit will not be able
to measure temperatures correctly.
• Do not touch the cold junction compensator. Doing so may result in incorrect temperature
measurement.

(2) Platinum Resistance Thermometers

(a) CP1W-TS101
One or two Pt or JPt platinum resistance thermometers can be connected to the
CP1W-TS101, but both of the thermometers must be of the same type and the same
input range must be used for each.
Input 0 Input 1 Input 1 NC NC NC NC

A A B
B B B
Pt Pt
(b) CP1W-TS102
Up to four Pt100 or JPt100 platinum resistance thermometers can be connected to the
CP1W-TS102, but all four of the thermometers must be of the same type and the same
input range must be used for each.

Input 0 Input 1 Input 1 NC Input 2 Input 3 Input 3
A A B A A B
B B B B B B
Pt Pt Pt Pt 8
Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature
Units
input 0 input 1 input 2 input 3

Do not connect anything to terminals not used for inputs.


(1) Words Allocation
Temperature Sensor Units are allocated words in the same way as other CP-series Expan-
sion Units or Expansion I/O Units, i.e., in order of connection. A Temperature Sensor Unit is
allocated the next input words following the input words of the CPU Unit or previous Expan-
sion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit. Two input words are allocated to the 2-input CP1W-TS001
or CP1W-TS101 and four input words are allocated to the 4-input CP1W-TS002 or CP1W-
TS102. No output words are allocated.
• Example 1 (E30/40/60, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Unit)
CPU Unit CP1W-TS001/101

Temperature Sensor Unit
Input word CIO 0 CIO 2
addresses CIO 1 CIO 3
Output word CIO 100

addresses None
CIO 101
• Example 2 (E30/40/60, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Unit)
CPU Unit CP1W-TS002/102

CIO 4
CIO 5
Output word CIO 100
addresses None
CIO 101
(2) Reading Temperature Data

The temperature data will be stored in the input words allocated to the Temperature Sensor
Unit in 4-digit hexadecimal.
CP1W-TS002/TS102 CP1W-TS001/TS101
m+1 Converted temperature m+1 Converted temperature

data from input 0 data from input 0
m+2 Converted temperature m+2 Converted temperature
data from input 1 data from input 1
m+3 Converted temperature
data from input 2
m+4 Converted temperature
data from input 3
“m” is the last input word allocated to the CPU Unit, Expansion I/O Unit, or Expansion Unit
connected immediately before the Temperature Sensor Unit.

• If the converted value is a negative value, it will be stored as its two’s complements.
• Data for range codes that include one digit after the decimal point are stored as binary
without the decimal point, i.e., 10 times the actual value is stored.
Input Data conversion examples
Unit: 1°C K, J 850°C→0352 hex
-200°C→FF38 hex
Unit: 0.1°C Pt, JPt, K, J ×10 500.0°C→5000→1388 hex
-20.0°C→-200→FF38 hex
-200.0°C→-2000→F830 hex
• If the input temperature exceeds the maximum or minimum value in the temperature
input range that has been set by ±20°C or ±20°F, the displayed value will be held.
• If the circuit is disconnected, the open-circuit detection function will operate and the con-
verted temperature data will be set to 7FFF.
• The open-circuit detection function will be automatically cleared and normal input tem-
perature conversion will begin automatically when the input temperature returns to the
convertible range.

After power is turned ON, approximately 1 s is required for the first conversion data to be
stored in the input word. During that period, the data will be 7FFE. Therefore, create a pro-

gram as shown below, so that when operation begins simultaneously with startup it will wait
for valid conversion data.
Always ON
P_On
CMP
2 Temperature input data
#7FFE
output word
P_EQ
Initialization
Completed Flag
W0.00
(4) Handling Unit Errors 8

• Expansion Unit and Expansion I/O Unit errors are output to bits 0 to 5 of word A436. The
bits are allocated from A436.00 in order starting from the Unit nearest the CPU Unit.
Units
CP1W-TS002 and CP1W-TS102 Temperature Sensor Units are allocated two bits each.
Use these flags in the program when it is necessary to detect Expansion Unit/Expansion
I/O Unit errors.
• When an error occurs, the Temperature Sensor Unit data becomes 7FFF hex (the same
as for an open-circuit detection). With an open-circuit detection, it is not reflected in word
A436.
(5) Programming Example (E30/40/60, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Unit)

(a) The following programming example shows how to convert the input data from 2
temperature sensor inputs to BCD and store the result in D0 and D1.
CP1W-TS001/101
CP2E CPU Unit Temperature unit 0 (°C)
CIO 0 CIO 2 Number of decimal places 0 (normal)
Inputs
CIO 1 CIO 3 Input range setting 1 (K: 0.0 to 500.0°C)
Input 0 CIO 2
Outputs CIO 100 Input 1 CIO 3
None
CIO 101

Always ON
P_On
CMP Detects completion of input 0 initialization.
2
#7FFE
P_EQ
W0.00 ON when input 0 has been initialized
Always ON
P_On
3
#7FFE
P_EQ
W0.01 ON when input 1 has been initialized
W0.00 Execution condition
CMP Detects an open-circuit alarm or Unit
2 error by checking converted temperature
data for the error code 7FFF.
#7FFF
P_EQ
W0.02 ON when an open-circuit alarm or Unit
error has been detected for input 0.
CMP Checks to see if the temperature data
2 in CIO 2 has exceeded 500.0°C (1388
hex without decimal point).
#1388
P_GT
W0.03 ON for an input 0 temperature error
P_LT
BCD Converts the temperature data for
2 input 0 to BCD and stores the result in
D0.
D0
W0.01 Execution condition
3 error by checking whether the error
code 7FFF has been output.
#7FFF
P_EQ
W0.04 ON when an open-circuit alarm or Unit
error has been detected for input 1.
CMP Checks to see if the temperature data
3 in CIO 3 has exceeded 500.0°C (1388
hex without decimal point).
#1388
P_GT
W0.05 ON for an input 1 temperature error
P_LT
BCD Converts the temperature data for
input 1 to BCD and stores the result in
3
D1.
D1

(b) The following programming example shows how to convert the data for tempera-
ture input 0 to BCD and store the result in D0 and D1. “#0001” is stored in D1
when the input data is a negative value. The following system configuration is
used.
CP2E CPU Unit CP1W-TS001/101 Temperature unit setting 0 (°C)
Two-decimal-place 0 (normal)
Inputs CIO 0 CIO 2
CIO 1 CIO 3
mode
Input range setting 1 (Pt100: -200.0 to
650.0°C)
Outputs CIO 100
CIO 101
None Input 0 CIO 2
(6) Programming with BCD Instruction
Always ON
P_On
2
#7FFE
P_EQ
Execution W0.00 ON when input 0 has been initialized
W0.00 condition
error by checking whether the error code
2 7FFF has been output
#7FFF
P_EQ

ON when an open-circuit alarm or Unit
W0.01 error has been detected for input 0.
P_EQ 2.15
BCD Stores positive BCD data in D0.
2
D0
MOV Stores #0000 in D1.

#0000
D1
2.15
-(410) When input 0 converted value is negative
(#0000 minus two’s complement = actual
#0000 value)
2
D0 8
BCD Stores negative BCD data in D0.
Units
D0
D0
MOV Stores #0001 in D1 to indicate a

negative number.
#0001
D1

(7) Programming with SCL2 Instruction
Always ON
P_On
CMP Detects completion of input 0
initialization.
2
#7FFE
P_EQ
Execution W0.00 ON when initialization complete.
W0.00 condition
2 error by checking whether the error code
7FFF has been output
#7FFF
P_EQ
W0.01 ON when an open-circuit alarm has
been detected.
P_EQ
SCL2
2
D10 Parameter settings for data conversion:
D0
P_CY
MOV When the converted value is non-
#0000 negative, stores #0000 in D1.
D1
P_CY
MOV When the converted value is
#0001 negative, stores #0001 in D1.
D1
• Operation
Binary to BCD conversion

CIO 2 163 162 161 160
CY
D1 D0 (when using SCL2 instruction)
0 0 0 1/0 103 102 101 100 1/0
1: Negative, 0: Non-negative
0: If data non-negative, “0000” stored in D1.
1: If data negative, “0001” stored in D1.
Function Descriptions
z Two-decimal-place Mode
If pin 2 on the DIP switch is turned ON, values are stored to two decimal places. In this case, tem-
perature data is stored as 6-digit signed hexadecimal (binary) data with 4 digits in the integer portion
and 2 digits after the decimal point. The actual data stored in memory is 100 times the actual value,
i.e., the decimal point is not indicated. Methods for handling this data are described in this section.
When set to store values to two decimal places, temperature data as far as two digits after the
decimal point is converted to 6-digit binary data, but the actual resolution is not 0.01°C (°F). For
this reason, there may be skipping and inaccuracies in the first digit after the decimal point 0.1°C
(°F). Treat any resolution above that specified for the normal data format as reference data.

Temperature Data Partitioning and Structure
Temperature Data (Actual Temperature x 100 Binary)
@@@@@@
Leftmost 3 Digits and Flags

15 14 13 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
Leftmost/ Temperature Open-circuit Not used.
Rightmost Flag Unit Flag Flag Temperature data
0: Leftmost 0: °C 0: Normal Always 0 ×165 ×164 ×163

1: Rightmost 1: °F 1: Error
Rightmost 3 Digits and Flags

15 14 13 12 11 8 7 4 3 0
Leftmost/ Temperature Open-circuit Not used.
Rightmost Flag Unit Flag Flag Temperature data
0: Leftmost 0: °C 0: Normal
1: Rightmost 1: °F 1: Error
Always 0 ×162 ×161 ×160
Leftmost/Rightmost Flag: Indicates whether the leftmost or rightmost 3 digits are provided.
Temperature Unit Flag: Indicates whether the temperature is in °C or °F.
Open-circuit Flag: Turns ON (1) when an open-circuit is detected. The temperature
data will be 7FF FFF if this flag is ON.

Data Conversion Examples
Example 1
Temperature: 1,130.25°C
×100: 113025
Temperature Data: 01B981 (hexadecimal for 113025)
Flags ×165 ×164 ×163

Bits 15 14 13 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 03 to 00
Data 0 0 0 0 0 1 B 0 0 1 B 8
Normal Flags Temperature
°C
data
Units
Leftmost
Flags ×162 ×161 ×160

Bits 15 14 13 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 0
Data 1 0 0 0 9 8 1 8 9 8 1
°C data
Rightmost

Example 2
Temperature: -100.12°C
×100: -10012
Temperature Data: FFD8E4 (hexadecimal for -10012)

Flags ×165 ×164 ×163
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 03 to 00
Data 0 0 0 0 F F D 0 F F D
°C
data
Leftmost

Flags ×162 ×161 ×160
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 03 to 00
Data 1 0 0 0 8 E 4 8 8 E 4

°C
data
Rightmost
Example 3
Temperature: -200.12°F
×100: -20012
Temperature Data: FFB1D4 (hexadecimal for -20012)
Flags ×165 ×164 ×163
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 03 to 00
Data 0 1 0 0 F F B 4 F F B
°F
data
Leftmost

Flags ×162 ×161 ×160
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 03 to 00
Data 1 1 0 0 1 D 4 C 1 D 4

°F data
Rightmost
Example 4
Temperature: Open circuit (°F)
Temperature Data: 7FFFFF

Flags ×165 ×164 ×163
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 03 to 00
Data 0 1 1 0 7 F F 6 7 F F
Error Flags Temperature
°F
data
Leftmost

Flags ×162 ×161 ×160
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 to 08 07 to 04 03 to 00
Data 1 1 1 0 F F F E F F F
Error Flags Temperature

°F
data
Rightmost

• Leftmost digits are stored in the lower memory addresses. Treat the data in the lower memory
address as the leftmost digits when programming.
• Be sure that the data is read at least once every 125 ms to allow for the CPU Unit’s cycle time
and communications time. Correct data may not be obtained if the read cycle is greater than
125 ms.
Programming Example
The following programming example shows how to use 2-decimal-place Mode for the following PLC
configuration.
CPU Unit CP1W-TS001

Inputs Inputs Temperature unit setting:

0 (°C)
CIO 0 CIO 2
CIO 1 CIO 3 Two-decimal-place Mode:
1 (2 digits after decimal point stored)
Outputs Outputs
CIO 100 None
CIO 101

In this example, 100 times the temperature data for temperature input 0 (input to CIO 002) is stored
in binary form in D100 to D102.
Temperature input 0 CIO 2 Leftmost data W100

Rightmost data
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D100 ×163 ×162 ×161 ×160
D101 ×167 ×166 ×165 ×164
D102 Always 0 Always 0 Always 0 0 0
8
Temperature Unit Flag (0: °C, 1: °F)
Open-circuit Flag (0: Normal, 1: Error)
Units

A200.11 (First Scan Flag)

MOV (1)
#0000 Sets D103 and D102 to #0100 and
#0000, respectively.
D102
MOV
#0100
D103
P_On (Always ON Flag)
2
#7FFE
P_EQ
W0.00 ON when input 0 has been initialized.
W0.00 2.13 (open-circuit detected)
W0.01 Open-circuit alarm output
2.15 (leftmost digits)
SET W0.02
W0.02 2.15 (leftmost digits)
MOV (2)
2 Leftmost digits moved to W100.
2.15 (rightmost digits) W100

MOVD
(3)
Leftmost and rightmost digits rearranged
2 and moved to W102 and W101.
#0020
W101
MOVD (4)
2000
#0300
W101
MOVD (5)
2000
#0011
W102
RSET W0.02
SET W0.03 Data rearrangement completed.
W0.03 W102.7 (non-negative data)

BCDL (6)
If the temperature data is non-negative, the binary
W101
data in W102 and W101 is converted to BCD and
D100 placed in D101 and D100.
W102.7 (negative data)
-L(411) (7)
D102 If the temperature data is negative, the 2’s
complement data in W102 and W101 is converted
W101 to binary data representing the absolute value of
H0 the temperature input and placed in H1 and H0.
BCDL (8)
H0 The binary data in H1 and H0 is converted to
BCD and placed in D101 and D100.
D100
MOVD (9)
#0008 “1” is written to the bit in D101 indicating negative
data.
#0300
D101
REST W0.03

Description of Operation
CIO 2: Leftmost 3 digits of temperature data CIO 2: Rightmost 3 digits of temperature data
5 4 3
0 16 16 16 1 162 161 161
(2)
(3)
W100 0 165 164 163
(4)
(5)
(6)
W102 0 0 165 164 W101 164 163 161 160
If the temperature data is
non-negative, binary data is
converted to BCD data.
D101 0/8 106 105 104 D100 103 102 101 100
(9) If temperature data is negative, “8” is written here. (8)

If the temperature data is
(1) #0100 (1) #0000
negative, binary data is
D103 0 1 0 0 D102 0 0 0 0 converted to BCD data.
− W102 2’s complement data W101 2’s complement data
(7)
H1 0 0 165 164 H0 163 162 161 160
Binary
subtraction
8-4-2 CP1W-TS003 Temperature Sensor Units

Overview
CP1W-TS003 Temperature Sensor Unit provides up to four input points. The inputs can be from ther-
mocouples or analog inputs.
CP1W-TS003 Temperature Sensor Unit is allocated four input words, so no more than three Units can
be connected.

8
z Temperature Sensor Units: CP1W-TS003

(2) DIP Switch
(3) Expansion I/O

Connector Cable (1) Temperature Sensor or Analog Input Terminals
(Terminal block is not removable)

Used to connect temperature sensors such as thermocouples or analog inputs.
(2)DIP Switch
Used to set the input type (temperature or analog input), the input thermocouple type (K or J) and
the temperature unit (°C or °F). Make the setting according to the specifications of the tempera-
ture sensors or analog inputs that are connected.


Connected to the expansion connector of a CP2E CPU Unit or an Expansion Unit or Expansion
I/O Unit.The cable is included with the Temperature Sensor Unit and cannot be removed.

Specifications
Item CP1W-TS003
Temperature sensors Thermocouples or analog input *1
Switchable between K and J, but same type must be used for all
inputs.
Number of inputs 4
Allocated input words 4
Max. number of Units 3
Accuracy 25°C Thermocouple inputs (The larger of ±0.5% of converted value or ±2°C) ±1 digit max. *2
Analog voltage inputs 0.5% full scale
Analog current inputs 0.6% full scale
0 to 60 °C Thermocouple inputs (The larger of ±1% of converted value or ±4°C) ±1 digit max. *3
-20 to 0 °C Thermocouple inputs (The larger of ±1.3% of converted value or ±5°C) ±1 digit max. *3
Input signal range Thermocouple inputs K: -200.0 to 1300.0°C or -300.0 to 2300.0°F
J: -100.0 to 850.0°C or -100.0 to 1500.0°F
Analog voltage inputs 0 to 10V, 1 to 5V
Analog current inputs 4 to 20mA
Resolution Thermocouple inputs 0.1°C or 0.1°F
Analog inputs 1/12000 (full scale)
Max. rated input Analog voltage inputs ±15V
Analog current inputs ±30mA
External input Analog voltage inputs 1MΩ min.
impedance Analog current inputs 250 Ω
Open-circuit detection function Supported
Averaging function Unsupported
Conversion time 250 ms for 4 input points
2-decimal-place mode is not supported
Converted AD data 16-bit binary data (4-digit hexadecimal)
Isolation Photocouplers between any two input signals
*1 Only last two channels can be used as analog input.
*2 Accuracy for a K-type sensor at −100°C or less is ±4°C ±1 digit max.

z Analog Input Signal Ranges

Analog input data is digitally converted according to the input signal range as shown below.
When the input exceeds the specified range, the A/D conversion data will be fixed at either the
lower limit or upper limit.
0 to 10 V
ment.
Converted Data
3138 (12600)
2EE0 (12000)
−0.5 V 0000 (0)

0V 10 V 10.5 V

FDA8 (−600)
1 to 5 V
data range is FDA8 to 3138 (−600 to 12600). Inputs between 0.8 and 1 V are expressed as two’s
complements. If the input falls below 0.8 V, open-circuit detection will activate and converted data
will be 8000.
Converted Data
3138 (12600) 8
2EE0 (12000)
0000 (0) 0.8 V 8-4-2 CP1W-TS003 Temperature Sensor Units

1V 5 V 5.2 V
FDA8 (−600)

4 to 20 mA
data range is FDA8 to 3138 (−600 to 12600). Inputs between 3.2 and 4 mA are expressed as two’s
complements. If the input falls below 3.2 mA, open-circuit detection will activate and converted data
will be 8000.
Converted Data
3138 (12600)
2EE0 (12000)
0000 (0) 3.2 mA

0 mA 4 mA 20 mA 20.8 mA
FDA8 (−600)
z Open-circuit Detection Function for Temperature

If the circuit is disconnected, the open-circuit detection function will operate and the converted tem-
perature data will be set to 7FFF.
z Open-circuit Detection Function for Analog Inputs

age drops below 0.8 V, or when the input range is set to 4 to 20 mA and the current drops below 3.2
mA. When the open-circuit detection function is activated, the converted data will be set to 8,000.
Flow of Operation

Sensor Units.
2 Set the temperature or

analog ranges.
• Set the input type (temperature or analog input), the input thermo-
couple type (K or J) and the temperature unit (°C or °F).

sensors or analog devices.
• Connect temperature sensors or analog devices.

program.
• Read converted data stored in the input words.

CP2E CPU Unit CP1W-20EDR1 CP1W-8ED CP1W-TS003

C O M 01 03 05 07 09 11 C O M 01 03
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02
IN CH IN
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 C H 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11
20EDR1 8ED
OUT
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP EXP
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 04 06
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 05 07
2 Set temperature or analog ranges.

Do not touch the DIP switch while power is being supplied. Static electricity may cause operating
errors.

Caution
connected to the Unit.
Do not set the temperature range to any values other than those for 8

With the Temperature Sensor Unit’s DIP switch, set the input type (temperature or analog input),
the input thermocouple type (K or J) and the temperature unit (°C or °F).
SW 1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
SW Setting
1 Thermocouple type of ON J
temperature sensor OFF K
2 Temperature unit ON °F
OFF °C
3 NC
4 Input type selection for ON Analog input
the third input (Input 2) OFF Thermocouple
5 Input type selection for ON Analog input
the fourth input (Input 3) OFF Thermocouple
6 Analog input signal ON 1 to 5V/4 to 20mA
range OFF 0 to 10V
Temperature input Analog input

Input type Range (°C) Range (°F) Input type Range
K -200.0 to 1300.0 -300.0 to 2300.0 Voltage 0 to 10V/1 to 5V
J -100.0 to 850.0 -100.0 to 1500.0 Current 4 to 20mA
Fahrenheit temperature uses the following equation to convert the temperature unit from Celsius,
but the temperature input range is different between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
Fahrenheit temperature (°F) = Celsius temperature (°C) x 1.8 + 32
3 Connect Temperature Sensors.

(1) Thermocouples
Either K or J thermocouples can be connected, but all four thermocouples must be the
same type and the same input range. Only last two channels can be used as analog inputs.
LOOP2+ LOOP3+
LOOP0+ LOOP1+
V IN2 V IN3
I IN3
LOOP2− LOOP3−
LOOP0− LOOP1− NC NC I IN2 COM2 COM3
Temperature input 0
compensator


measurement.
(2) Analog Inputs

Last two channels can be used as analog inputs, but two of the analog inputs must be the
same range.
LOOP2+ LOOP3+
LOOP0+ LOOP1+
V IN2 V IN3
I IN3
LOOP2− LOOP3−

Temperature input 0
Cold junction Analog Analog
compensator device device
Temperature input 1 with with
current voltage
output output
Analog Analog
input 2 input 3
• Wiring for Analog Inputs
+ twisted-pair cable V IN +
twisted-pair cable
V IN
8
Analog Analog
device with I IN Analog device with I IN Analog

voltage input 2,3 current input 2,3
output − COM − COM
output
FG FG

• When an input is not being used, short the + and – terminals.
power supply.


(1) Word Allocations
sion Units or Expansion I/O Units, in order of connection. A Temperature Sensor Unit is
sion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit. Four input words are allocated to CP1W-TS003.
• Example
CP2E CP1W-TS003
CIO 4
CIO 5
Output word CIO 100 None
addresses CIO 101
(2) Reading Temperature or Analog Data

The temperature or analog data will be stored in the input words allocated to the Tempera-
ture Sensor Unit in 4-digit hexadecimal.
Reading Temperature Data Reading Analog Data
m+1 Converted temperature data from input 0 m+3 Converted analog data from input 2
m+2 Converted temperature data from input 1 m+4 Converted analog data from input 3
m+3 Converted temperature data from input 2
m+4 Converted temperature data from input 3
“m” is the last input word allocated to the CPU Unit, Expansion I/O Unit, or Expansion Unit
connected immediately before the Temperature Sensor Unit.
• Negative values are stored as 2’s complements.
• Data for range codes that include one digit after the decimal point are stored without the
decimal point, i.e., 10 times the actual value is stored.
Unit: 0.1°C K or J ×10 500.0°C → 5000 → 1388 hex
−20.0°C → −200 → FF38 hex
−200.0°C → −2000 → F830 hex
• If the input temperature exceeds the maximum or minimum value in the temperature
input range that has been set by ±20°C or ±20°F, the displayed value will be held.
• If the circuit is disconnected, the open-circuit detection function will operate and the con-
verted temperature data will be set to 7FFF.
convertible range.
After power is turned ON, approximately 1 s is required for the first conversion data to be
stored in the input word. During that period, the data will be 7FFE. Therefore, create a pro-
gram as shown below, so that the ladder can start to operate with valid conversion data in
input words.
Always ON
P_On
CMP
2 Temperature input data
#7FFE
output word
(P_EQ)
Initialization
Completed Flag
W0.00


The following programming example shows how to store the input data of CP1W-TS003 (4
inputs) in D0 to D3, and W10.00 to W10.03 turn ON at the time of open-circuit detection.
CP2E CP1W-TS003
CIO 0 CIO 2 Temperature unit setting: OFF(ºC)
Input word
addresses CIO 1 CIO 3 Input range setting
CIO 4 Input 0: Thermocouple K(CIO2)
CIO 5 Input 1: Thermocouple K(CIO3)
Output word CIO 100 Input 2: Thermocouple K(CIO4)
None
addresses CIO 101 Input 3: Analog input 1 to 5V(CIO5)
• DIP Switch Setting

SW1 OFF K
SW2 OFF °C
SW3 NC
SW4 OFF Thermocouple
SW5 ON Analog
SW6 ON 1 to 5V/4 to 20mA
• Wiring Diagram
LOOP2+ LOOP3+
LOOP0+ LOOP1+ I IN3

V IN2 V IN3
LOOP2− LOOP3−
Temperature input 0
Cold junction Temperature Analog
compensator input 2 device
Temperature input 1 with
voltage
output
8
Analog
input 3

(1 to 5 V)

Detects initialization complete
<>(305) MOV(021) Stores input 0’s data in D0.

#7FFE 2
2 D0
ON when an open-circuit alarm has been

=(300) W10.00 detected for thermocouples input 2.
#7FFF
2

#7FFE 3
3 D1

#7FFF
3

#7FFE 4
4 D2

#7FFF
4

#7FFE 5
5 D3

=(300) W10.03 detected for analog input 3.
#8000
5

8-4-3 TS004 Temperature Sensor Units
Overview
CP1W-TS004 Temperature Sensor Unit provide up to twelve input points. The inputs can be from
thermocouples.
CP1W-TS004 Temperature Sensor Unit is allocated two input words and one output word, so no
more than seven Units can be connected.
z Temperature Sensor Units: CP1W-TS004
(3) Expansion I/O

Connector Cable (1) Temperature Sensor Input Terminals

(2) DIP Switch

Used to connect temperature sensors such as thermocouples.
(2)DIP Switch
Used to set the temperature unit (°C or °F) and the temperature input range. Make the setting
according to the specifications of the temperature sensors that are connected.
(3)Expansion I/O Connecting Cable 8
Connected to the expansion connector of a CP2E CPU Unit or an Expansion Unit or Expan-
sion I/O Unit. The cable is included with the Temperature Sensor Unit and cannot be

removed.


Specifications
Item CP1W-TS004
Temperature sensors Thermocouples
Switchable between K and J, but same type must be used for all inputs.
Number of inputs 12
Allocated input words 2
Allocated output words 1
Accuracy 25°C (The larger of ±0.5% of converted value or ±2°C) ±1 digit max. *1
0 to 60°C (The larger of ±1% of converted value or ±4°C) ±1 digit max. *2
-20 to 0°C (The larger of ±1.3% of converted value or ±5°C) ±1 digit max. *2
Conversion time 500 ms for 12 input points
2-decimal-place mode is not supported
Isolation Photocouplers between any two input signals

z Open-circuit Detection Function for Temperature

If the circuit is disconnected, the open-circuit detection function will operate and the converted tem-
perature data will be set to 7FFF.
Flow of Operation

Sensor Units.
2 Set the temperature ranges.

• Set the temperature unit and set the temperature input range.

sensors.
• Connect temperature sensors.

program.
• Read converted data stored in the input words.
CP2E CPU Unit CP1W-20EDR1 CP1W-8ED CP1W-TS004

C OM 01 03 05 07 09 11 C OM 01 03
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02
IN CH IN
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 C H 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11 08 09 10 11
20EDR1 8ED
OUT
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
CH EXP EXP
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 04 06

2 Set temperature ranges.

Do not touch the DIP switch while power is being supplied. Static electricity may cause operating
errors.

Caution
connected to the Unit.
Do not set the temperature range to any values other than those for

With the Temperature Sensor Unit’s DIP switch, set the temperature unit and the temperature
input range.
SW1
SW2
ON
OFF
8
SW Setting
1 Input type ON J

OFF K
2 Temperature unit ON °F
OFF °C
Temperature input
Input type Range (°C) Range (°F)
K -200.0 to 1300.0 -300.0 to 2300.0
J -100.0 to 850.0 -100.0 to 1500.0
Fahrenheit temperature uses the following equation to convert the temperature unit from Celsius,
but the temperature input range is different between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
Fahrenheit temperature (°F) = Celsius temperature (°C) × 1.8 + 32

3 Connecte Temperature Sensors.

(1) Thermocouples
Either K or J thermocouples can be connected, but all twelve thermocouples must be the
same type and the same input range.
Temperature input 1
Cold junction
compensator Temperature input 11
Temperature input 0

measurement.
• Use the thermocouple with metallic shield and connect the shield to ground.

(1) Word Allocations
sion Units or Expansion I/O Units, in order of connection. A Temperature Sensor Unit is
sion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit. Two input words and one output word are allocated to
CP1W-TS004.
• Example
CP2E CP1W-TS004
Output word CIO 100 CIO 102

addresses CIO 101

(2) Reading Temperature Data

There are 12 temperature input data to be read, but only two input words are allocated to
CP1W-TS004. The operation is shown as the following.
• Input Word
m+1 Response. Input words stored in CIO m+2
m+2 Temperature data of the specified input word
• Output Word
n+1 Read command data (input word specified)
• Read/Response Command and Temperature Data

Output
Input Word
Word
Command n+1 m+1 m+2
Read Response Temperature data
command command (4-digit hexadecimal)
Read temperature data from input 0 #9901 9901 Input 0 temperature data

Read temperature data from input 9 #990A 990A Input 9 temperature data
Read temperature data from input 10 #990B 990B Input 10 temperature data
Read temperature data from input 11 #990C 990C Input 11 temperature data
Others Others No response for other commands
8
• Negative values are stored as 2’s complements.
• The converted temperature data CIO m+2 is stored in 16-bit binary data (4-digit hexa-

decimal).
• Data for range codes that include one digit after the decimal point are stored without the
decimal point, i.e., 10 times the actual value is stored.
Unit: 0.1°C K or J ×10 500.0°C → 5000 → 1388 hex
-20.0°C → -200 → FF38 hex
-200.0°C → -2000 → F830 hex
• IIf the input temperature exceeds the maximum or minimum value in the temperature
input range that has been set by ±20×C or ±20×F, the displayed value will be held.
• If the circuit is disconnected, the open-circuit detection function will operrate and the
converted temperature data will be set to 7FFF.
convertible range.

(3) Creating Ladder Program

(1) Write temperature data command
Write temperature data command which read temperature data from input word to CIO
n+1.
(2) Response confirmation
After CP1W-TS004 receives CIO n+1 read command and CP1W-TS004’s internally
specified input temperature data is ready, the value which is the same as the read com-
mand will be stored in CIO m+1. The temperature data will be stored in CIO m+2 at the
same time.
(3) Read temperature data
Store the temperature data from CIO m+2 in DM area.
The power is ON
CIO n+1
(1) Write temperature data
command
Read command
and response are
CIO m+1
unmatched
(2) Response confirmation
Read command
matches response
CIO m+2
(3) Read temperature data
Store in DM area
Response 7FFE #9901 #9902

CIO m+1
Temperature data Input 1 Input 2

7FFE
CIO m+2 temperature data temperature data
2ms max. from writing read

Approx. 1s Approx. 2ms command, response, to reading
temperature data
Read command 0000 #9901 #9902 #9903

CIO n+1
Power ON Write input 1 Write input 2

temperature data temperature data
command command
Note 1 It takes about 2ms maximum until it is reflected to CIO m+1 and m+2 from writing the read command to
CIO n+1.
2 It takes about 1s after the power is turned ON, till a read command initial processing of CP1W-TS004 is
completed, so a response to the read command after power ON takes only about 1s. After the power is
turned ON, create a ladder program 1s later due to its control by temperature data.
3 When writing a command other than that specified in the temperature data read command, CIO m+1 and
m+2 hold the previous value.


The temperature data of CP1W-TS004 (12 inputs, input type is J type and temperature unit
is °C) is stored in D0 to D11.
When it occurs open-circuit alarm, W10.00 to W10.11 is ON.
CP2E CP1W-TS004
CIO 1 CIO 3 Input range
addresses
J: SW1 OFF
Temperature unit
Output word CIO 100 CIO 102 °C: SW2 ON
addresses CIO 101
• Temperature Data Storage Address

Input word Read command Temperature data Open-circuit alarm
CIO n+1 storage address
Input 0 #9901 D0 W0.00
Input 1 #9902 D1 W0.01
Input 2 #9903 D2 W0.02
Input 3 #9904 D3 W0.03
Input 4 #9905 D4 W0.04
Input 5 #9906 D5 W0.05

Input 6 #9907 D6 W0.06
Input 7 #9908 D7 W0.07
Input 8 #9909 D8 W0.08
Input 9 #990A D9 W0.09
Input 10 #990B D10 W0.10
Input 11 #990C D11 W0.11

First Cycle ON Flag

SET Start to read temperature data.
W0.00
W0.00
MOV(021) Write input 0’s read command
#9901 (#9901) to CIO 102 (CIO n+1).
102
=(300) MOV(021) If CIO 2 (CIO m+1) and read

command are matched, store
#9901 3 Read Input 0’s
the temperature data (CIO
2 D0 m+2) to D0. temperature data
W10.00 turns ONat the time of

=(300) W10.00 open-circuit detection (7FFF).
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.01
RSET
W0.00
W0.01
MOV(021)
#9902
102
=(300) MOV(021)
2 D1 temperature data
=(300) W10.01
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.02
RSET
W0.01
W0.02
MOV(021)
#9903
102
=(300) MOV(021)
=(300) W10.02
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.03
RSET
W0.02

W0.03
MOV(021)
#9904
102
=(300) MOV(021)
#9904 3
Read Input 3’s
=(300) W10.03
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.04
RSET
W0.03
W0.04
MOV(021)
#9905
102
=(300) MOV(021)
#9905 3
Read Input 4’s

=(300) W10.04
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.05
RSET
W0.04
W0.05
MOV(021)
#9906
102 8
=(300) MOV(021)
#9906 3

Read Input 5’s
=(300) W10.05
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.06
RSET
W0.05

W0.06
MOV(021)
#9907
102
=(300) MOV(021)
#9907 3
Read Input 6’s
=(300) W10.06
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.07
RSET
W0.06
W0.07
MOV(021)
#9908
102
=(300) MOV(021)
=(300) W10.07
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.08
RSET
W0.07
W0.08
MOV(021)
#9909
102
=(300) MOV(021)
#9909 3
Read Input 8’s
=(300) W10.08
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.09
RSET
W0.08

W0.09
MOV(021)
#990A
102
=(300) MOV(021)
#990A 3 Read Input 9’s
=(300) W10.09
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.10
RSET
W0.09
W0.10
MOV(021)
#990B
102
=(300) MOV(021)
#990B 3 Read Input 10’s

=(300) W10.10
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.11
RSET
W0.10
W0.11
MOV(021)
#990C
102 8
=(300) MOV(021)
#990C 3 Read Input 11’s

=(300) W10.11
#7FFF
3
SET
W0.00
RSET
W0.11


A pp
Appendices
A-1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

A-1-1 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A-1-2 Option Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A-1-3 Expansion I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A-1-4 Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A-2 Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A-2-1 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A-2-2 Expansion I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
A-2-3 Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
A-2-4 Serial Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
A-3 Wiring for Serial Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
A-3-1 Recommended RS-232C Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
A-3-2 Recommended RS-422A/485 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-46
App
A-3-3 Reducing Electrical Noise for External Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-49
A-4 Network Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
A-5 Comparison between CP1E and CP2E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-53
CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613) A-1

Appendices
A-1 Dimensions
A-1-1 CPU Units
CPU Units with 14 or 20 I/O Points
z CP2E-N14/20D-
Unit: mm
86 80
76 8
110
100
90
2-
φ4
.5
z CP2E-E14/20D-
Unit: mm
86 80
76 8
110
100
90
2-
φ4
. 5
A-2 CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613)

Appendices
CPU Units with 30 I/O Points
z CP2E-N30D-
Unit: mm
130 80
120 8
110
100
90
z CP2E-E30D-, CP2E-S30D-
Unit: mm
130 80
120 8
110
100
90
A-1 Dimensions
App
CPU Units with 40 I/O Points A-1-1 CPU Units
z CP2E-N40D-
Unit: mm
150 80
140 8
110
100
90
4-
φ
4.
5

Appendices
Unit: mm
150 80
140 8
110
100
90
4-
φ4
.5
CPU Units with 60 I/O Points
z CP2E-N60D-
Unit: mm
195 80
185 8
110
100
90
4-
φ4
.5
Unit: mm
195 80
185 8
110
100
90
4-
φ4
.5

Appendices
A-1-2 Option Boards
CP1W-CIF01 RS-232C Option Board

Unit: mm
0.15
16.5
35.9 13.5
37.3
35.9
5.1
16.5
19.7
CP1W-CIF11/CIF12-V1 RS-422A/485 Option Board

Unit: mm
0.15
16.5
35.9 13.5
A-1 Dimensions
35.9
37.3
8.9
App
15.7
16.5
A-1-2 Option Boards
CP2W-CIFD1 RS-232C & RS-232C Option Board

Unit: mm
38.2
35
0.15
3.75
5.9
37.3
36.4
36.4

Appendices
CP2W-CIFD2 RS-232C & RS485 Option Board

Unit: mm
28.2
35 0.15
3.75
5.9
37.3
36.4
36.4
CP2W-CIFD3 RS-485 & RS-485 Option Board

Unit: mm
38.2
35
0.15
3.75
5.9
37.3
36.4
36.4
CP1W-MAB221 Analog Input/Output Option Board

Unit: mm
0.15
36.4
7.3
36.4
37.3
8
35
28.2

Appendices
CP1W-ADB21 Analog Input Option Board

Unit: mm
0.15
36.4
7.3
36.4
37.3
8
35
28.2
CP1W-DAB21V Analog Output Option Board

Unit: mm
0.15
36.4
7.3
36.4
37.3
A-1 Dimensions
3
35
28.2
App
A-1-2 Option Boards

Appendices
A-1-3 Expansion I/O Units
CP1W-8ED Expansion I/O Unit with 8 Input Points

Unit: mm
5
90 100±0.2
56±0.2 5 8
66 2-φ4.5 50
CP1W-8E Expansion I/O Units with 8 Output Points

Unit: mm
5
90 100±0.2
56±0.2 5 8
66 2-φ4.5 50
CP1W-16E Expansion I/O Units with 16 Output Points

Unit: mm
5
90 100±0.2
76±0.2 5 8
86 2-φ4.5 50

Appendices
CP1W-32ER/ET/ET1 Expansion I/O Units with 32 Output Points

Unit: mm
150
140
110 100 90
4-φ4.5 8
50
CP1W-20ED Expansion I/O Units with 20 I/O Points

Unit: mm
5
90 100±0.2
A-1 Dimensions
76±0.2 5 8
86 2-φ4.5 50
CP1W-40ED Expansion I/O Units with 40 I/O Points
App
Unit: mm
150
140 A-1-3 Expansion I/O Units
110 100 90
4-φ4.5 8
50

Appendices
A-1-4 Expansion Units
CP1W-MAD11/MAD42/MAD44 Analog I/O Units

5 Unit: mm
90 100±0.2
76±0.2 5 8
86 2-φ4.5 50
CP1W-AD041/AD042 Analog Input Unit

Unit: mm
5
90 100±0.2
76±0.2 5 8
86 2-φ4.5 50
CP1W-DA021/DA041/DA042 Analog Output Unit

5 Unit: mm
90 100±0.2
76±0.2 5 8
86 2-φ4.5 50

Appendices
CP1W-TS1/2/3 Temperature Sensor Units

Unit: mm
5
90 100±0.2
76±0.2 5 8
86 50
CP1W-TS004 Temperature Sensor Units

Unit: mm
5
90 100±0.2
A-1 Dimensions
140±0.2 5 Two,4.5 dia. 8
150 holes 50
App

Appendices
A-2 Wiring Diagrams
A-2-1 CPU Units
CPU Unit with 14 I/O Points (Terminal Block is not removable)

Input Wiring Diagram Output Wiring Diagram
z All Models z Relay Outputs
AC Power Supply CP2E-E14DR-A
CP2E-E14DR-A CP2E-N14DR-
CP2E-N14D-A CIO 100
DC Power Supply
L L L L L L
CP2E-N14D-D
00 01 02 03 04 05 NC
CIO 0
COM COM NC COM NC COM NC
- +
24V DC
+ -
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 NC NC
CIO 100
NC 00 02 04 06 NC NC
z Transistor Outputs (Sinking)

DC Power Supply
+ - COM
CP2E-N14DT-
NC CIO 100
N14D-D CIO 0
L L L L L L
00 01 02 03 04 05 NC
CIO 100
z Transistor Outputs (Sourcing)

CP2E-N14DT1-D
CIO 100
L L L L L L
00 01 02 03 04 05 NC
CIO 100

Appendices
CPU Unit with 20 I/O Points (Terminal Block is not removable)

AC Power Supply CP2E-E20DR-A
CP2E-E20DR-A CP2E-N20DR-
CP2E-N20D-A CIO 100
DC Power Supply
L L L L L L L
CP2E-N20D-D
00 01 02 03 04 05 07
CIO 0
COM COM NC COM NC COM 06
- +
24V DC L
+ -
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 CIO 100
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10
DC Power Supply CP2E-N20DT-
+ - COM CIO 100
NC
N20D-D CIO 0 L L L L L L L
00 01 02 03 04 05 07
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

L
CIO 100

CP2E-N20DT1-D
CIO 100
App
L L L L L L L
00 01 02 03 04 05 07 A-2-1 CPU Units

CIO 100

Appendices
CPU Units with 30 I/O Points (Terminal Block is not removable)

AC Power Supply CP2E-E30DR-A, CP2E-S30DR-A, CP2E-N30DR-
CP2E-E30DR-A, CP2E-S30DR-A, CIO 100 CIO 101
CP2E-N30D-A
DC Power Supply
L L L L L L L L
CP2E-S30D-D, CP2E-N30D-D
+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02
CIO 0 CIO 1
- COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03
- +
L L L
24V DC L
+ -
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05
DC Power Supply
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04
NC
CIO 100 CIO 101
NC COM
DC Power Supply
N30DR-D
+ - COM
NC
N/S30D-D
CIO 0 CIO 1

CP2E-S30DT-D CP2E-N30DT-
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 100 CIO 101
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
V+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 + 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02
V- COM(-) COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03
- COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03
L L
L L
L L
L L
DC Power Supply
CIO 100 CIO 101
NC CIO 100 CIO 101
NC COM
N30DT-D

CP2E-S30DT1-D CP2E-N30DT1-D
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 100 CIO 101
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
V+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02
V- COM(+) COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03
L L
L L
L L
L L
CIO 100 CIO 101

CIO 100 CIO 101

Appendices

CP2E-E40DR-A, CP2E-S40DR-A, CIO 100 CIO 101
CP2E-N40D-A
DC Power Supply
L L L L L L L L L L L
CIO 0 CIO 1 + 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06

- +
24V DC
+ - L L L L L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
DC Power Supply
NC 00
CIO 100 CIO 101
NC
N40DR-D
CIO 0 CIO 1
DC Power Supply
+ - COM
NC
N/S40D-D

CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 100 CIO 101
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
V+ 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 + 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
V- COM(-) COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07 - COM COM COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07
L L L L L L L L L L
App
DC Power Supply
CIO 100 CIO 101 NC 00 CIO 100 CIO 101 A-2-1 CPU Units
NC
N40DT-D

CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 100 CIO 101
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
V+ 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 NC 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
V- COM(+) COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07 NC COM COM COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07
L L L L L L L L L L
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 100 CIO 101

Appendices

CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102
CP2E-E60DR-A, CP2E-S60DR-A,
CP2E-N60D-A L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
DC Power Supply + 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
- COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06

L L L L L L L L
CIO 0 CIO 1 CIO 2
- +
24 V DC
+ -
DC Power Supply
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 NC
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10 NC COM
N60DR-D
DC Power Supply
+ - COM
NC
CIO 0 CIO 1 CIO 2
N/S60D-D

CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102 CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
V+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 + 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
V- COM(-) COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 - COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06
L L L L L L L L L
L L L L L L L
DC Power Supply
NC
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102
NC COM
N60DT-D

CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102
L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L
V+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
V- COM(+) COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06
L L L L L L L L
L L L L L L L L
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102
CIO 100 CIO 101 CIO 102

Appendices
Input Wiring Example When Using External Power Supply

AC-power-supply CPU Units with 30, 40 or 60 I/O points have an external power supply (DC24V 0.3A),
and can be used as a service power supply for input devices.
DC-power-supply CPU Units with 14 or 20 I/O points have no external power supply.
Wiring Example: AC-power-supply CPU Units with 40 I/O Points
Input device
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
Input terminal
Input device
Output terminal
24VDC 0.3A
+ 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
OUTPUT
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

App
A-2-1 CPU Units

Appendices

The first input word allocated to the Expansion I/O Unit is shown as CIO m and the first output word is
shown as CIO n.
8-point Input Unit (Terminal Block is not removable)


Outputs not provided.
24V DC
- +
+
-
CIO m
COM 01 03 04 06
00 02 COM 05 07 The COM terminals

on the upper terminal
block and the COM
+ terminals on the lower
- terminal block are
24V DC - + internally connected,
but they must also be
wired externally.
8-point Output Units (Terminal Block is not removable)

Inputs not provided. z Relay Outputs
CP1W-8ER
24V DC
L L L L
CIO n
COM 01 03 04 06
00 02 COM 05 07
24V DC
L L L L

Appendices

Inputs not provided. z Transistor Outputs (Sinking)
CP1W-8ET
+
4.5 to 30 VDC L L L L
-
CIO n
COM 01 03 04 06
00 02 COM 05 07
-
L L 4.5 to 30 VDC L L
+

CP1W-8ET1
-
4.5 to 30 VDC L L L L
+
CIO n
COM 01 03 04 06
00 02 COM 05 07
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

+
L L 4.5 to 30 VDC L L
-
App

CP1W-16ER
L L
NC COM COM COM 04 06 COM CIO n
NC 00 01 02 03 05 07
L L L L L L

Appendices

Inputs not provided.
L L L L L
NC 00 02 04 05 07 NC
CIO n+1
L L L

CP1W-16ET
L L
NC 00 01 02 03 05 07
L L L L L L
L L L L L
NC 00 02 04 05 07 NC
CIO n+1
L L L

CP1W-16ET1
L L
NC 00 01 02 03 05 07
L L L L L L

Appendices

Inputs not provided. Unit Lower Terminal Block
L L L L L
NC 00 02 04 05 07 NC
CIO n+1
L L L

CP1W-32ER
CIO n CIO n+1
L L L L L
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 NC NC NC
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

CIO n CIO n+1

CIO n+2 CIO n+3
App
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 NC
L L L L L
CIO n+2 CIO n+3

Appendices

Inputs not provided. z Transistor Outputs (Sinking)
CP1W-32ET
CIO n CIO n+1
L L L L L
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 NC NC NC
CIO n CIO n+1
CIO n+2 CIO n+3
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 NC
L L L L L
CIO n+2 CIO n+3

CP1W-32ET1
CIO n CIO n+1
L L L L L
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 NC NC NC
CIO n CIO n+1

Appendices

Inputs not provided. Unit Lower Terminal Block
CIO n+2 CIO n+3
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 NC
L L L L L
CIO n+2 CIO n+3
20-point I/O Units (Terminal Block is not removable)

CIO m CP1W-20EDR1
24V DC +
-
+
- L L L L L L
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

00 01 02 04 05 07
COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 CIO n
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10
L L
CIO m App
CP1W-20EDT
L L L L L L
00 01 02 04 05 07
CIO n
L L

Appendices

CP1W-20EDT1
L L L L L L
00 01 02 04 05 07
CIO n
L L
40-point I/O Units (Terminal Block is not removable)

CIO m CIO m+1
CP1W-40EDR
CIO n CIO n+1
24V DC
- +
+ -
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
NC NC COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
NC NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
L L L L L
CIO m CIO m+1

CIO n CIO n+1

CP1W-40EDT
CIO n CIO n+1
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
L L L L L
CIO n CIO n+1

CP1W-40EDT1
CIO n CIO n+1
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
L L L L L
CIO n CIO n+1

Appendices
CP1W-AD041/AD042 Analog Input Unit (Terminal Block is not removable)

Wiring Diagrams
z Input Terminal Arrangement
COM1 Input common 1
COM2 Input common 2
IN CH
COM3 Input common 3
COM4 Input common 4
Note For current inputs, short V IN1 to I IN1, V IN2 to I IN2, V IN3 to I IN3, and V IN4 to I IN4.
z Wiring Methods
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

+ twisted-pair cable V IN +
twisted-pair cable
V IN
device with Analog I IN
I IN device with Input
voltage Input
current Unit
output − COM Unit − COM
output
FG FG
Example:
App


Connection to
input 1 for
voltage input
+ Voltage
output
–
Connection to
input 2 for
current input
+
Current output
–

Appendices
CP1W-DA021 Analog Output Unit (Terminal Block is not removable)

Wiring Diagrams
z Output Terminal Arrangement
OUT CH
I OUT1 VOUT2 COM2 NC NC NC NC
VOUT1 COM1 I OUT2 NC NC NC NC COM1 Output common 1
z Wiring Methods
I OUT I OUT
input input
FG FG
Example:
IOUT1 VOUT2 COM2 NC NC NC NC
VOUT1 COM1 IOUT2 NC NC NC NC

Connection to
output 1 for
voltage output
+
Voltage
Input
–
Connection to
output 2 for
current output
+
Current
Input
–

Appendices
CP1W-DA041/DA042 Analog Output Unit (Terminal Block is not removable)

Wiring Diagrams
z Output Terminal Arrangement
OUT CH
I OUT1 VOUT2 COM2 I OUT3 VOUT4 COM4 NC I OUT3 Current output 3
z Wiring Methods
I OUT I OUT
input input
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

FG FG
Example:
IOUT1 VOUT2 COM2 IOUT3 VOUT4 COM4 NC
VOUT1 COM1 IOUT2 VOUT3 COM3 IOUT4 NC

Connection to App
output 1 for
voltage output
+
Voltage
Input
–
Connection to
output 2 for
current output
+
Current
Input
–

Appendices
CP1W-MAD11 Analog I/O Unit (Terminal Block is not removable)

Wiring Diagrams
z I/O Terminal Arrangement
V OUT Voltage output

I OUT Current output
COM Output common
COM0 Input common 0
COM1 Input common 1
Note For current inputs, short V IN0 to I IN0 and V IN1 to I IN1.
z Wiring Methods
• Wiring Analog Inputs

I IN I IN
with I/O Unit with I/O Unit
voltage − COM current − COM
output output
FG FG
• Wiring Analog Outputs

I OUT I OUT
I/O Unit with I/O Unit with
COM − voltage COM − current
input input
FG FG

Appendices
Wiring Diagrams
Example:
I OUT NC NC V IN0 COM0 IIN1 AG
VOUT COM NC NC I IN0 V IN1 COM1

Connection to
input for
voltage output
+
Voltage input
–
Connection to
input 0 for
voltage input
+
Voltage output
–
Connection to
input 1 for
current input
+
Current output
–
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

App

Appendices

Wiring Diagrams
• Input Terminal Arrangement V IN1 Voltage input 1
COM1 Input common 1
COM2 Input common 2
COM3 Input common 3
COM4 Input common 4
• Output Terminal Arrangement

z Wiring Methods

I IN I IN
output output
FG FG

I OUT I OUT
input input
FG FG

Appendices

Wiring Diagrams
• Input Terminal Arrangement
COM1 Input common 1
COM2 Input common 2
COM3 Input common 3
COM4 Input common 4
• Output Terminal Arrangement
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

z Wiring Methods
2-core shielded 2-core shielded App

I IN I IN
output output
FG FG

I OUT I OUT
input input
FG FG

Appendices
CP1W-TS001/TS002/TS101/TS102 Temperature Sensor Units

(Terminal Block is not removable)
Wiring Diagrams
z Connecting a Thermocouple
• CP1W-TS001
One or two K or J thermocouples can be connected to the CP1W-TS001.
Both of the thermocouples must be of the same type and the same input range must be used for
each.
Example:
Input 0 Input 1 NC NC NC
+ +
Input 0 Input 1 NC NC NC NC NC
− −
Temperature input 0
Cold junction compensator
Temperature input 1
• CP1W-TS002
One to four K or J thermocouples can be connected to the CP1W-TS002.
All of the thermocouples must be of the same type and the same input range must be used for
each.
Example:
Input 0 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 NC
+ + + +
Input 0 Input 1 NC NC NC Input 2 Input 3
− − − −
Temperature input 0
compensator

Appendices
Wiring Diagrams
z Connecting a Platinum Resistance Thermometer
• CP1W-TS101
One or two Pt or JPt platinum resistance thermometers can be connected to the CP1W-TS101.
Both of the thermometers must be of the same type and the same input range must be used for
each.
Example:

A A B
B B B
Pt Pt

• CP1W-TS102
One to four Pt or JPt platinum resistance thermometers can be connected to the CP1W-TS102.
All of the thermometers must be of the same type and the same input range must be used for
each.
Example:
A A B A A B
B B B B B B
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

Pt Pt Pt Pt
App
Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature
input 0 input 1 input 2 input 3

Appendices

Wiring Diagrams
Either K or J thermocouples can be connected, but all four of the thermocouples must be of the
same type and the same input range must be used for each. Only last two channels can be used as
analog inputs.
Example:
LOOP2+ LOOP3+
LOOP0+ LOOP1+
V IN2 V IN3
I IN3
LOOP2− LOOP3−
Temperature input 0
compensator
z Connecting Analog Inputs

Only last two channels can be used as analog inputs.
LOOP2+ LOOP3+
LOOP0+ LOOP1+
V IN2 V IN3
I IN3
LOOP2− LOOP3−
Temperature input 0
Cold junction Analog Analog
compensator device device
Temperature input 1 with with
current voltage
output output
Analog Analog
input 2 input 3

Appendices

Wiring Diagrams
Either K or J thermocouples can be connected, but all twelve of the thermocouples must be of the
same type and the same input range must be used for each.
Example:
Temperature input 1
Cold junction
compensator Temperature input 11
Temperature input 0
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

App

Appendices
A-2-4 Serial Communications
Wiring Examples for PTs Using Host Link

CP2E CPU Unit NB-series PT
Connecting the built-in

serial port of the NB-series PT
Host Link
z Connecting a PT and a PLC 1:1 with RS-232C Ports

• Communications Mode: Host Link
CP2E N-type CPU Unit NB-Series PT
Signal Pin Pin Signal
FG Hood Hood FG
FG 1 1 –
SD 2 2 SD
RS-232C RS-232C
RD 3 3 RD
Option Board interface
CP1W-CIF01 RS 4 4 RS
CS 5 5 CS
5V 6 6 5V
DR 7 7 –
ER 8 8 –
SG 9 9 SG
D-sub, 9-pin connector (male) D-sub, 9-pin connector (male)
Port Signal Pin Pin Signal
FG 4 Hood FG
SD 1 1 –
PORT
RD 2 2 SD
CP2W-CIFD1 RS-232C
SG 3 3 RD
CP2W-CIFD2 interface
FG 8 4 RS
PORT SD 5 5 CS
(EX) RD 6 6 5V
SG 7 7 –
* PORT1(EX) does not support Host Link. 8 –
9 SG
D-sub, 9-pin connector (male)
CP2E E/S-type CPU Unit NB-Series PT
FG 6 Hood FG
Built-in SD 1 1 –
RS-232C
Port RD 2 2 SD
RS 3 3 RD RS-232C
CS 4 4 RS interface
SG 5 5 CS
6 5V
7 –
8 –
9 SG

Appendices
z Connecting a PT and a PLC with RS-422A/485 Ports Using 4-wire, RS-422A

Communications
• Communication mode: Host Link
DIP SW
SW1: ON (with terminating resistance)
SW2: OFF (4-wire connection)
SW3: OFF (4-wire connection)
SW4: OFF
SW5: OFF (no control)
SW6: OFF (no control)
RS-422A/485 RDA- 1 1 SDB+

Option Board RDB+ 2 2 SD(TXD)
CP1W-CIF11 SDA- 3 3 RD(RXD)
CP1W-CIF12-V1 SDB+ 4 TRM Built-in
4
FG 5 TRM serial port
5
6 RDB+
7 SDA-
8 RDA-
9 SG
Hood FG
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

App

Appendices
No-protocol Communications
• Communications Mode: No-protocol
z Connecting RS-232C Ports 1:1

S/E-type built-in RS-232C port
or Option Board CP1W-CIF01 Device supporting
RS-232C
Signal Pin shielded cable RS-232C communications
FG 1 Signal
SD 2 SD RS-232C
RD 3 RD interface
RS-232C
Option Board RS 4 SG
CP1W-CIF01 CS 5
DR* 7
ER* 8
SG 9
* DR and ER signals are not supported by the E/S-type CPU Unit.
z Connecting RS-422A/485 Ports 1:1 with 2-wire Connections

Device supporting
RS-422A/485
CP2E N-type CPU Unit communications (2-wire)
Signal Pin Signal

RS-422A/485
RS-422A/485 SDA- 3 A(-) interface
Option Board SDB+ 4 B(+)
CP1W-CIF11 RDA- 1
CP1W-CIF12-V1
RDB+ 2
FG 5
Terminal block
Device supporting
S-type built-in RS-485 port RS-422A/485
or Option Board CP2W-CIFD2/D3 communications (2-wire)
Signal Signal
RS-422A/485
RS-485 Port A- A(-) interface
B+ B(+)
FG
Terminal block
z Connecting RS-422A/485 Ports 1:1 with 4-wire Connections

Device supporting RS-422A/485
CP2E N-type CPU Unit communications
Signal Pin Signal
RS-422A/485 SDA- 3 RDA RS-422A/485

Option Board SDB+ 4 interface
RDB
CP1W-CIF11 RDA- 1
CP1W-CIF12-V1 SDA
RDB+ 2
FG 5 SDB
4-wire Terminal block

Terminating
resistance:
ON

Appendices
Modbus-RTU Easy Master Function

• Communications mode: Modbus-RTU Easy Master
3G3MX2-V1
CP2E N-type CPU Unit CP1W-CIF11
CP1W-CIF12-V1 Signal
RS485
Control circuit
terminal block
(communications
terminals)
2-wire
RS-422A/485 Option Board
CP1W-CIF11
CP1W-CIF12-V1
Modbus-RTU Slave Function

• Communications mode: Modbus-RTU Slave
CP2E N-type CPU Unit CP1W-CIF11 CP1W-CIF11 CP2E N-type CPU Unit
CP1W-CIF12-V1 CP1W-CIF12-V1
RS485
2-wire
RS-422A/485 Option Board RS-422A/485 Option Board
CP1W-CIF11 CP1W-CIF11
CP1W-CIF12-V1 CP1W-CIF12-V1
Serial PLC Links
A-2 Wiring Diagrams

• Communications mode: Serial PLC Link (Master) or Serial PLC Link (Slave)
z Connecting RS-232C Ports

RS-232C connection is also possible when using a Serial PLC Link to connect two CP2E CPU Units.
CP2E N-type CPU Unit CP2E N-type CPU Unit
App
FG 1 1 FG
SD 2 2 SD
RD 3 3 RD
RS-232C RS 4 4 RS RS-232C
Option Board CS 5 5 CS Option Board
CP1W-CIF01 CP1W-CIF01
5V 6 6 5V
DR* 7 7 DR*
ER* 8 8 ER*
SG 9 9 SG
* DR and ER signals are not supported by the E/S-type CPU Unit.

Appendices
z Connecting RS-422A/485 Ports with RS-422A, 4-wire Connections

CP2E N-type CPU Unit CP2E N-type CPU Unit (Polled Unit No. 0) CP2E N-type CPU Unit (Polled Unit No. 1)
CP1W-CIF11 RS-422A/485 Option Board CP1W-CIF11 RS-422A/485 Option Board CP1W-CIF11 RS-422A/485 Option Board
DIP SW DIP SW DIP SW
SW1: ON (with terminating resistance) SW1: OFF (no terminating resistance) SW1: ON (with terminating resistance)
SW2: OFF (4-wire connection) SW2: OFF (4-wire connection) SW2: OFF (4-wire connection)
SW3: OFF (4-wire connection) SW3: OFF (4-wire connection) SW3: OFF (4-wire connection)
SW4: OFF SW4: OFF SW4: OFF
SW5: OFF (no RS control for RD) SW5: OFF (no RS control for RD) SW5: OFF (no RS control for RD)
SW6: ON (no RS control for SD) SW6: ON (with RS control for SD) SW6: ON (with RS control for SD)
RS-422A/485 interface RS-422A/485 interface RS-422A/485 interface

Signal name
Signal name
Signal name
RDB+
RDB+
RDB+
SDB+
SDB+
SDB+
RDA–
RDA–
RDA–
SDA–
SDA–
SDA–
FG
FG
FG
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 Pin 1 2 3 4 5
Shield
z Connecting RS-422A/485 Ports with RS-485, 2-wire Connections

CP2E N□□-type CPU Unit CP2E S-type CPU Unit (Polled Unit No. 0) CP1L CPU Unit (Polled Unit No. 1)
CP2W-CIFD2/3 RS-485 port Built-in RS-485 port
CP1W-CIF11 RS-422A/485 port
DIP SW DIP SW
DIP SW
Terminating resistance：ON Terminating resistance：OFF
SW1: ON (with terminating resistance)
SW2: ON (2-wire connection)
SW3: ON (2-wire connection)
SW4: OFF
SW5: OFF (no RS control for RD)
SW6: ON (with RS control for SD)
RS-485 port RS-485 port RS-422A/485 interface

Signal name
RDA−
RDB＋
Signal name
Signal name
SDA−
SDB＋
FG
A−
B＋
A−
B＋
FG
FG
Pin 1 2 3 4 5
Shield

Appendices
A-3 Wiring for Serial Communications
A-3-1 Recommended RS-232C Wiring
Recommended RS-232C Wiring
We recommend the following wiring method for the RS-232C, especially in environments prone to
noise.
1 Use shielded twisted-pair cables for the communications cables.

• Recommended RS-232C Cables
Model numbers Manufacturer
UL2464 AWG28x5P IFS-RVV-SB (UL product) Fujikura Ltd.
AWG28x5P IFVV-SB (non-UL product)
UL2464-SB (MA) 5Px28AWG (7/0.127) (UL product) Hitachi Cable,
CO-MA-VV-SB 5Px28AWG (7/0.127) (non-UL product) Ltd.
2 Combine a signal wire and SG (signal ground) wire in a twisted-pair cable.

At the same time, bundle the SG wires at the connectors on Option Board and the remote

device.
3 Connect the shield of the communications cable to the hood (FG) of the RS-232C connector on
the Option Board.
At the same time, ground the ground terminal (GR) of the CPU Unit to 100 Ω or less.
z Connection Example
Example: Twisted-pair Cable Connecting SD-SG, and RD-SG Terminals in Host Link Mode
App
SG signal wires
Bundle the SG wires

Aluminum foil
XM2S-0911-E

Appendices
CP2E E/S-type CPU Unit IBM PC/AT or compatible

FG 6 1 CD
Built-in SD 1 2 RD
RS-232C RD 2 3 SD RS-232C
Port CS 4 4 ER interface
RS 3 5 SG
SG 5 6 DR
7 RS
8 CS
9 CI
D-sub, 9-pin connector (female)
CP2E N-type CPU Unit IBM PC/AT or compatible

Port Signal Pin Pin Signal
FG 4 1 CD
PORT SD 1 2 RD
CP2W- RD 2 3 SD RS-232C
CIFD1 SG 3 4 ER interface
FG 8 5 SG
PORT SD 5 6 DR
(EX)*1 RD 6 7 RS
SG 7 8 CS
9 CI
D-sub, 9-pin connector (female)
CP2E N-type CPU Unit IBM PC/AT or compatible

FG*2 1 1 CD
SD 2 2 RD
RS-232C RD 3 3 SD RS-232C
Option Board RS 4 4 ER interface
CP1W-CIF01 CS 5 5 SG
5V 6 6 DR
DR 7 7 RS
ER 8 8 CS
SG 9 9 CI
D-sub, 9-pin connector (male) D-sub, 9-pin connector (female)
*1 PORT1(EX) does not support Host Link.

*2 The hood (FG) is internally connected to the ground terminal (GR) on the CPU Unit.
Therefore, the FG is grounded by grounding the power supply ground terminal (GR). Although there is conduc-
tivity between the hood (FG) and pin 1 (FG), connect the shield to both the hood and pin 1 to reduce the con-
tact resistance between the shield and FG and thus provide better noise resistance.
: Power supply ground terminal
Ground to
100Ω or less
Serial Communication Option Board

Appendices
CP1W-CIF01 Wiring
Use the following steps to wire connectors.
See the following diagrams for the length of the cable portion to be cut in each step.
z Shield Connected to Hood (FG)
1 Cut the cable to the required length.
2 Remove the specified length of the sheath from the cable using a knife.
Be careful not to scratch the braided shield.
25mm (RS-422A)
40mm(RS-232C)
3 Trim off the braided shield using scissors.
10mm

Remove the insulation from each conductor using a stripper.
5mm
5 Fold back the braided shield.
6 Wrap aluminum foil tape around the folded shield.
Aluminum foil tape App


Appendices
z Shield Not Connected to Hood (FG)
1 Cut the cable to the required length.
2 Remove the specified length of the sheath from the cable using a knife.
Be careful not to scratch the braided shield.
25mm (RS-422A)
40mm(RS-232C)
3 Trim off all the braided shield using scissors.
4 Remove the insulation from each conductor using a stripper.
5mm
5 Wrap adhesive tape around the conductor from which the braided shield was removed.
Adhesive tape
z Soldering
1 Place a heat-shrinking tube on each conductor.
2 Temporarily solder each conductor to the corresponding connector terminals.
3 Completely solder each conductor.
1 mm
Soldering iron
Heat-shrinking tube
Inside diameter:
1.5 mm, l = 10
4 Return the heat-shrinking tube to the soldered portion, then heat the tube to shrink it in place.

Appendices
Heat-shrinking tube
z Assembling Connector Hood

Assemble the connector hood as shown below.
End connected to FG End not connected to FG

Aluminum foil tape
Grounding plate
Built-in RS-232C (CP2E-E/SD-) or CP2W-CIFD1/2 RS-232C

Wiring
When wiring the RS-232C terminal block, treat either solid or stranded wires directly.

2-conductor shielded
twisted-pair cable
Release button
• To make the connection, press the release button in with a small flat blade screwdriver and push
the line in while the lock is released. Remove the screwdriver and lock it inside.
App
• To disconnect the wiring, press the release button in with a small flat blade screwdriver and pull
the line out while the lock is released.
Note 1 Note 1 Ferrules with/without plastic sleeve cannot be used.
2 When using stranded wire, twist the core so that the barbed wires cannot protrude.
3 Do not solder-plate the end of cable.
The screwdriver shown below is recommended for wiring.
SZS 0.4×2.5 Phoenix Contact
Side Front
0.4mm 2.5mm

Appendices
A-3-2 Recommended RS-422A/485 Wiring

Use the following wiring methods for RS-422A/485 to maintain transmission quality.
CP1W-CIF11/CIF12-V1 RS-422A/485 Wiring

1 Always use shielded twisted-pair cables as communications cables.
• Recommended RS-422A/485 Cables
CO-HC-ESV-3P×7/0.2 Hirakawa Hewtech Corp.
2 Connect the shield of the communications cable to the FG terminal on the RS-422A/485 Option
Board.
At the same time, ground the ground terminal (GR) of the CPU Unit to 100 Ω or less.
Built-in RS-485 (CP2E-SD-) or CP2W-CIFD2/3 RS-485 wiring

z Applicable Cables
Solid wire or ferrules can be used.
• Recommended RS-485 Cables
CO-HC-ESV-3P×7/0.2 Hirakawa Hewtech Corp.
• Recommended ferrules
Manufacturer Model numbers Applicable wire
Phoenix Contact AI-0.25-12 AWG24
Note Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals.
z Terminal Wiring
When wiring the RS-485 terminal block, treat either solid or stranded wires directly.
2-conductor shielded
twisted-pair cable
Release button
• To make the connection, press the release button in with a small flat blade screwdriver and push
the line in while the lock is released. Remove the screwdriver and lock it inside.
• To disconnect the wiring, press the release button in with a small flat blade screwdriver and pull
the line out while the lock is released.
Note 1 Note 1 Ferrules with/without plastic sleeve cannot be used.
2 When using stranded wire, twist the core so that the barbed wires cannot protrude.
3 Do not solder-plate the end of cable.

Appendices
The screwdriver shown below is recommended for wiring.

SZS 0.4×2.5 Phoenix Contact
Side Front
0.4mm 2.5mm

Using the Built-in RS-485 Port or CP1W-CIF11 RS-422A/485 Option Board (Not Isolated)
Use the Built-in RS-485 Port or CP1W-CIF11 only when there is no difference in electrical poten-
tial between devices. Connect the shield on the communications cable at both ends to the FG
terminals on the RS-422A/485 terminal blocks to ground it. Do not allow the communications dis-
tance to exceed 50m.
Using the CP1W-CIF12-V1 RS-422A/485 Option Board or CP2W-CIFD2/3 RS-485 Option Board
(Isolated)
Use the CP1W-CIF12-V1 or CP2W-CIFD2/3 if there is a difference in electrical potential between

devices or for long distance communications (500 m max.).
Connect the shield on the communications cable only at the Option Board to ground it. If the
shield is connected at both ends of the cable when there is a difference in electrical potential, the
devices may be damaged.
Connection Examples
z 2-Wire and 4-Wire Transmission Circuits
The transmission circuits for 2-wire and 4-wire connections are different, as shown in the following
diagram.
App
• CP1W-CIF11/CIF12-V1
Example of 4-Wire Connections Example of 2-Wire Connections A-3-2 Recommended RS-422A/485 Wiring
2/4-wire switch 2/4-wire switch

(DPDT) Other Unit Other Unit (DPDT) Other Unit Other Unit
Option Board Option Board Not connected

Appendices
• Built-in RS-485 port (CP2E-SD-) or CP2W-CIFD2/3
Example of 2-Wire Connections
2-wire switch
(DPDT) Other Unit Other Unit
Built-in RS-485 Port
CP2W-CIFD2/3 Option Board

Use the same type of transmission circuit (2-wire or 4-wire) for all nodes.
Do not use 4-wire connections when the 2/4-wire switch on the Board is set to 2-wire.
z Wiring Example: 1:1 Connections

• Two-wire Connections

CP1W-CIF11/CIF12-V1 Option Board Remote device
Pin Signal Signal
3 SDA- A(–)
4 SDB+ B(+)
1 RDA- FG
2 RDB+ Ground the shield at one end
5 FG Shield when using CP1W-CIF12-V1.
CP2E S-type CPU Unit

Built-in RS-485 Port
CP2W-CIFD2/3 Option Board Remote device
Signal Signal
A- A(–)
B+ B(+)
FG FG
Shield
• Four-wire Connections
CP1W-CIF11/CIF12-V1 Option Board Remote device
Pin Signal Signal

3 SDA- RDA
4 SDB+ RDB
1 RDA- SDA
2 RDB+ SDB
5 FG FG
Shield Ground the shield at one end
when using CP1W-CIF12-V1.

Appendices
A-3-3 Reducing Electrical Noise for External Wiring

Observe the following precautions when wiring communications cables.
• When multi-conductor signal cable is being used, avoid combining I/O wires and other control wires
in the same cable.
• If wiring racks are parallel, allow at least 300 mm between them.
Low-current cables
Communications
cables
300 mm min.
Control cables
PLC power supply
and general control
circuit wiring 300 mm min.
Power cables
Power lines
• If the I/O wiring and power cables must be placed in the same duct, they must be shielded from each
other using grounded steel sheet metal.
PLC power supply
and general control
Communications circuit wiring Power lines Steel sheet metal
cables

200 mm min.
App
A-3-3 Reducing Electrical Noise for External
Wiring

Appendices
A-4 Network Installation
Basic Installation Precautions
• Take the greatest care when installing the Ethernet System, being sure to follow ISO 802-3 specifica-
tions. You must obtain a copy of these specifications and be sure you understand them before
attempting to install an Ethernet System. Unless you are already experienced in installing communi-
cations systems, we strongly recommend that you employ a professional to install your system.
• Do not install Ethernet equipment near sources of noise. If noise-prone environments are unavoid-
able, be sure to take adequate measures against noise interference, such as installing network com-
ponents in grounded metal cases, using optical links in the system, etc.
Recommended products
The following products are recommended for use with the CP2E series PLC.
Part Maker Model number Specifications Inquires
Hub 100BASE-TX
OMRON W4S1-03B 10/100 Mbit/s 3-port hub
OMRON W4S1-05B 10/100 Mbit/s 5-port hub
(C)
PHOENIX SWITCH 5TX 10/100 Mbit/s 5-port hub
CONTACT
10BASE-T
Allied Telesis MR820TLX 9-port hub with 10Base-5 back- Allied Telesis
bone port (0120) 86-0442
(in Japan only)
Twisted-pair cable 100BASE-TX
Fujikura F-LINK-E 0.5mm STP (shielded twisted-pair) cable: ---
x 4P Category 5, 5e
Note: Impedance is limited to 100
Ω.
Fujikura CTP-LAN5 UTP (unshielded twisted-pair)
0.5mm x 4P cable: Category 5, 5e
10BASE-T
Fujikura F-LINK-E 0.5mm STP (shielded twisted-pair) cable:
x 4P Category 3, 4, 5, 5e
Note: Impedance is limited to 100
Ω.
Fujikura CTP-LAN5 UTP (unshielded twisted-pair)
0.5mm x 4P cable: Category 3, 4, 5, 5e
Connectors STP Plug
(Modular plug) Panduit Corp MPS588 ---
UTP Plug
Panduit Corp MP588-C ---

Appendices
Precautions on Laying Twisted-pair Cable

z Basic Precautions
• Press the cable connector in firmly until it locks into place at both the hub and the PLC.
• After laying the twisted-pair cable, check the connection with a 10Base-T cable tester.
z Environment Precautions
• The UTP cable is not shielded, and the hub is designed for use in OA environments. In environ-
ments subject to noise, construct a system with shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable and hubs suit-
able for an FA environment.
• Do not lay the twisted-pair cable together with high-voltage lines.
• Do not lay the twisted-pair cable near devices that generate noise.
• Do not lay the twisted-pair cable in locations subject to high temperature or high humidity.
• Do not lay the twisted-pair cable in locations subject to excessive dirt and dust or to oil mist or
other contaminants.
z Hub Installation Environment Precautions

• Do not install the hub near devices that generate noise.
• Do not install the hub in locations subject to high temperature or high humidity.
• Do not install the hub in locations subject to excessive dirt and dust or to oil mist or other contam-
inants.
z Hub Connection Methods

If more hub ports are required, they can be added by connecting more than one hub. There are two
possible connection methods for hubs: Cascade and stacked.
A-4 Network Installation

Ethernet Connectors
The following standards and specifications apply to the connectors for the Ethernet twisted-pair cable.
• Electrical specifications: Conforming to IEEE802.3 standards
• Connector structure: RJ45 8-pin Modular Connector
(conforming to ISO8877)
App
Connector Pin Signal Name Abbr. Signal Direction
1 Transmission data + TD+ Output
2 Transmission data - TD- Output
3 Reception data + RD+ Input

4 Not used --- ---
Wiring
5 Not used --- ---

6 Reception data - RD- Input
7 Not used --- ---
8 Not used --- ---
Hood Frame ground FG ---

Appendices
Connecting the Cable

Turn OFF the PLC’s power supply before connection or disconnecting twisted-pair cable.
Allow enough space for the bending radius of the twisted-pair cable.
1 Lay the twisted-pair cable.
2 Connect the cable to the hub. Be sure to press in the cable until it locks into place.
Request cable installation from a qualified professional.
3 Connect the cable to the connector on the PLC. Be sure to press in the cable until it locks into
place.
Precautions on Installing Ethernet System

When installing the Ethernet System between the CP2E N30/40/60 CPU Unit and swtiching hub, do
not connect the two ports at the same time. Otherwise Ethernet communications may not be estab-
lished.
CP2E N30/40/60 CPU Unit
Switching hub
PORT1A PORT1B

Appendices
A-5 Comparison between CP1E and CP2E

z Functional Specifications
CP1E E/NS-type CPU
Item CP2E E/S-type CPU Units CP1E N-type CPU Units CP2E N-type CPU Units
Units
Power supply AC power supply 100 to 240 VAC
DC power supply 24VDC
Operation temperature 0°C~55°C -20°C~60°C 0°C~55°C -20°C~60°C
Power supply to external Only AC power supply Only AC power supply Only AC power supply Only AC power supply
devices (service power) N30/40/60S CPU Unit: 300mA 30/40/60 CPU Unit: 300mA N30/40/60 CPU Unit: 300mA N30/40/60 CPU Unit: 300mA
E14/20 CPU Unit: None N14/20 CPU Unit: None N14/20 CPU Unit: None
High-speed counter inputs ES-type: Up/down inputs: Up/down inputs: N14/20 CPU Unit:
Up/down or pulse plus 100kHz × 1 counter 100kHz × 1 counter Up/down inputs:
direction inputs: 10kHz × 1 counter 10kHz × 1 counter 100kHz × 1 counter
10kHz × 2 counters Or Or 10kHz × 1 counter
Or Pulse plus direction inputs: Pulse plus direction inputs: Or
Differential phases (4x): 100 kHz × 2 counters 100 kHz × 2 counters Pulse plus direction inputs:
5kHz × 2 counters Or Or 100 kHz × 2 counters
Or Differential phase inputs (4x) Differential phase inputs (4x) Or
Increment inputs: 50 kHz × 1 counter 50 kHz × 1 counter Differential phase inputs
10kHz × 6 counters 5 kHz × 1 counter 5 kHz × 1 counter 50 kHz × 1 counter
10kHz × 5 counters (Only for Or Or 5 kHz × 1 counter
10 I/O Points) Incremental pulse inputs Incremental pulse inputs Or
100 kHz × 2 counters 100 kHz × 2 counters Incremental pulse inputs
NS-type: 10 kHz × 4 counters 10 kHz × 4 counters 100 kHz × 2 counters
Up/down inputs: 10 kHz × 4 counters
100kHz × 1 counter
10kHz × 1 counter N30/40/60 CPU Unit:
Or Up/down or pulse plus
A-5 Comparison between CP1E and CP2E

Pulse plus direction inputs: direction inputs:
100 kHz × 2 counters 100 kHz × 2 counters,
Or Or
Differential phase inputs (4x) Differential phase inputs
50 kHz × 1 counter 50 kHz × 2 counters
5 kHz × 1 counter Or
Or Incremental pulse inputs
Incremental pulse inputs 100 kHz × 3 counters
100 kHz × 2 counters 10 kHz × 3 counters
10 kHz × 4 counters
Quick-response / 6 inputs 6 inputs 6 inputs 8 inputs
Interrupt inputs (6 inputs only for 14 I/O points)
Pulse Pulse output ES-type: Not supported E-type: Not supported Pulse plus direction only Pulse plus direction only
outputs method NS-type: Pulse plus S-type: Pulse plus 2 axes max. 4 axes max.
(Models direction only direction only, 2 axes max.
with Speed control ES-type: Not supported E-type: Not supported Supported Supported
transistor NS-type: Supported S-type: Supported
outputs
Positioning ES-type: Not supported E-type: Not supported Supported Supported
only)
NS-type: Supported S-type: Supported
Origin searches ES-type: Not supported E-type: Not supported Supported Supported
App
PWM outputs (Models with ES-type: Not supported E-type: Not supported 1 output 1 output
transistor outputs only) NS-type: 1 output S-type: 1 output
Analog I/O Not supported Not supported Supported (Only for NA20) Not supported
Analog volume Not supported Not supported Supported Not supported
USB port Provided. Not provided

USB2.0 Full-speed (12M)
Wiring
Ethernet port Not provided Provided

With switch function
* N14/20 is not supported.
Built-in serial ES-type: Not provided Provided. Provided. Not provided
communication port NS-type: RS-232C E-type: RS-232C N-type: RS-232C Provided by installing Option
NS1-type: RS-232C and S-type: RS-232C and RS- Board.
RS-485 485
Serial option port Not provided N14/20 CPU Unit: None N14/20 CPU Unit: 2 ports
N30/40/60 CPU Unit: 1 port N30/40/60 CPU Unit: 3 ports
Serial Baud rate 1200/2400/4800/9600/19.2k/38.4k/57.6k/115.2k
communic
Supported • Host Link • Host Link • Host Link • Host Link*
ation
protocol • 1:N NT Link • 1:N NT Link • 1:N NT Link • 1:N NT Link*
protocols
• No-protocol mode • No-protocol mode • No-protocol mode • No-protocol mode
• Serial PLC Links (master, • Serial PLC Links (master, • Serial PLC Links (master, • Serial PLC Links (master,
slave) slave) slave) slave)
• Modbus-RTU easy master • Modbus-RTU Easy Master • Modbus-RTU easy master • Modbus-RTU Easy Master
• Modbus-RTU Slave • Modbus-RTU Slave
* PORT1(EX) is not supported.

Appendices
CP1E E/NS-type CPU

Item CP2E E/S-type CPU Units CP1E N-type CPU Units CP2E N-type CPU Units
Units
Option Boards that can be Cannot be mounted. • RS232C Option Board Serial Communication Option
mounted CP1W-CIF01 Board with one port
• RS422A/485 Option Board • RS232C Option Board
CP1W-CIF11/CIF12-V1 CP1W-CIF01
• Ethernet Option Board • RS-422A/485 Option Board
CP1W-CIF41 CP1W-CIF11/CIF12-V1
• Analog Option Board Serial Communication Option
CP1W-MAB221/ADB21/DAB21V Board with two ports*1
• RS232C Option Board
CP2W-CIFD1
• RS232C & RS-485 Option
Board CP2W-CIFD2
• RS-485 Option Board
CP2W-CIFD3
Analog Option Board
CP1W-MAB221/ADB21/
DAB21V
*1 CP2W-CIFD can only be
mounted on option slot 1.
*2 Maximum one Analog
Option Board can be mounted
on an N-type CPU Unit.
Memory backup Built-in EEPROM: Built-in Flash Memory: Built-in EEPROM: Built-in Flash Memory:
Contains the user programs, Contains the user programs, Contains the user programs, Contains the user programs,
parameters, DM Area initial parameters, DM Area initial parameters, DM Area initial parameters, DM Area initial
values and comment files values and comment files values and comment files values and comment files
Built-in SRAM (Battery Built-in non-volatile memory Built-in SRAM (Battery Built-in non-volatile memory
backup): (Batteryless backup): backup): (Batteryless backup):
DM/HR/CNT/AR Data memory DM/HR/CNT/AR Data memory DM/HR/CNT/AR Data memory DM/HR/CNT/AR Data memory
area area area area
Clock ES-type: Not supported E-type: Not supported Supported Supported
Item CP1E CPU Units CP2E CPU Units

Program capacity E-type: 2K steps E-type: 4K steps
N-type: 8K steps S-type: 8K steps
N-type: 10K steps
FB capacity Not provided E-type: 4K steps
S-type: 8K steps
N-type: 10K steps
Program language Ladder diagram Ladder diagram
Function blocks Not provided Maximum number of function block definitions: 64
Maximum number of instances: 128
Languages usable in function block definitions: Ladder
diagrams, structured text (ST)
Instructions Approximately 200 Approximately 220
Instruction execution times LD: 1.19μs LD: 0.23μs
MOV: 7.9μs MOV: 1.76μs
Number of tasks 17 17
• 1 cyclic task • 1 cyclic task
• 16 interrupt tasks • 16 interrupt tasks
Maximum subroutine number 128 128
Maximum jump number 128 128
Scheduled interrupt tasks 1 1
CIO Area 4,640 bits (290 words) 4,640 bits (290 words)
CIO 0.00 to CIO 289.15 (CIO 0 to CIO 289) CIO 0.00 to CIO 289.15 (CIO 0 to CIO 289)
Work Area (W) 1,600 bits (100 words) 2,048 bits (128 words)
W0.00 to W99.15 (W0 to W99) W0.00 to W127.15 (W0 to W127)
Holding Area (H) 800 bits (50 words) 2048 bits (128 words)
H0.00 to H49.15 (H0 to H49CH) H0.00 to H127.15 (H0 to H127CH)
Auxiliary Area (A) Read-only: 7,168 bits (448 words) Read-only: 7,168 bits (448 words)
A0.00 to A447.15 (A0 to A447) A0.00 to A447.15 (A0 to A447)
Read/write: 4,896 bits (306 words) Read/write: 8,192 bits (512 words)
A448.00 to A753.15 (A448 to A753) A448.00 to A959.15 (A448 to A959)
Temporary Area (TR) 16 bits: TR0 to TR15 16 bits: TR0 to TR15
Counter Area (C) 256 timer numbers: T0 to T255 256 timer numbers: T0 to T255
Timer Area (T) 256 counter numbers: C0 to C255 256 counter numbers: C0 to C255
Data Memory Area (D) E-type: 2K words D0 to D2047 E-type: 4K words D0 to D4095
N-type: 8K words D0 to D8191 S-type: 8K words D0 to D8191
N-type: 16K words D0 to D16383
Data Registers (DR) Not provided 16 registers: DR0 to DR15
Index Registers (IR) Not provided 16 registers: IR0 to IR15

Index
A CX-Programmer ............................................................. 4-2
Analog adjuster .......................................................3-3, 3-7 CX-Programmer connection error ................................ 6-23
Analog I/O Unit....................................................2-13, 8-27 Cycle time exceeded error ....................................6-5, 6-12
Dimensions ........................................................... A-10 D
DIP Switch settings ................................................ 8-35
Wiring ...............................8-35, 8-49, A-28, A-30, A-31 Dimensions .................................................................... 5-7
Words allocation............................................8-37, 8-51 CPU Unit ................................................................. A-2
Analog Input Unit ..................................................2-13, 8-2 Expansion I/O Unit .................................................. A-8
Dimensions ........................................................... A-10 Expansion Unit ...................................................... A-10
Part names and functions ........................................ 8-2 Option Boards ......................................................... A-5
Specifications ........................................................... 8-3 DIN Track ................................................................2-9, 5-9
Wiring ............................................................. 8-8, A-25 DIN Track installation ..................................................... 5-8
Words allocation..................................................... 8-10 DIP switch
Analog Output Unit..............................................2-13, 8-15 Analog I/O Units .....................................................8-35
Dimensions ........................................................... A-10 RS-422A/485 Option Board...........................3-17, 3-20
Part names and functions ...................................... 8-15 Temperature Sensor Unit ....................................... 8-59
Specifications ......................................................... 8-16 DM Area capacity............................................ 2-5, 2-6, 2-7
Wiring ..................................................8-22, A-26, A-27
E
Words allocation............................................8-22, 8-23
EMC Directive ................................................................ -22
B End Plate ..............................................................2-9, 5-10
Backup memory error ...........................................6-6, 6-15 Error log information ......................................................6-3
Battery ....................................................................2-9, 7-2 Error processing flowchart ............................................. 6-7
Replacing ................................................................. 7-7 E-type CPU Unit
Service life................................................................ 7-5 Basic system configuration....................................... 2-2
Battery error..........................................................6-6, 6-16 E14/20 or N14/20 CPU Units ................................... 3-2
Built-in Ethernet port ...............................................3-3, 3-7 E30/40, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Units ............ 3-6
Built-in RS-232C port .................................... 3-3, 3-7, 3-17 Maximum number of I/O Points .............................. 2-11
Built-in RS-485 Port ..............................................3-7, 3-17 Expansion I/O Unit ..............................................3-28, 3-31
Common I/O specifications .................................... 3-33
C Dimensions.............................................................. A-8
Checking errors.............................................................. 6-2 Models.................................................................... 2-12
Communications error Part names and functions....................................... 3-31
Built-in RS-232C port ............................................... 6-5 Terminal arrangements........................................... 3-32
Peripheral USB port ................................................. 6-5 Wiring .................................................................... A-18
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit Expansion Input Unit
Dimensions ........................................................... A-11 Part names and functions....................................... 3-28
Connecting Expansion (I/O) Units................................ 5-12 Terminal arrangements........................................... 3-28
connectors Expansion Output Unit
recommended models........................................... A-50 Part names and functions....................................... 3-29
CPU error..............................................................6-5, 6-14 Terminal arrangements........................................... 3-30
CPU Unit Expansion system configuration .................................. 2-11
Common I/O specifications .................................... 3-12 Expansion Unit
Dimensions ............................................................. A-2 Dimensions............................................................ A-10
E14/20 or N14/20 CPU Units ................................... 3-2 Models.................................................................... 2-13
E30/40, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Units ............ 3-6 Wiring .................................................................... A-25
Model numbers......................................................... 2-4 External power supply capacity ..........................2-14, 2-16
Models...................................................................... 2-4 F
Part names and functions .................................3-2, 3-6
Terminal arrangements .....................................3-5, 3-9 Fail-safe circuits ............................................................. 5-2
Unit version ............................................................ 2-10 FAL error ...............................................................6-6, 6-15
Wiring .................................................................... A-12 FALS error.............................................................6-5, 6-13
Current consumption Fatal errors
Analog I/O Unit ....................................................... 8-29 Cycle time exceeded error ..............................6-5, 6-12
Analog Input Unit...................................................... 8-3 FALS error .......................................................6-5, 6-13
Analog Output Unit ................................................. 8-17 I/O bus error ......................................................6-5, 6-9
CPU Unit .......................................... 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, 2-18 Memory error.....................................................6-5, 6-8
Expansion I/O Unit ................................................. 2-19 Program error ..................................................6-5, 6-10
Expansion Unit ....................................................... 2-19 Too many I/O points error................................6-5, 6-10
Temperature Sensor Unit ....................................... 8-57
CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613) Index-1

G Number of simultaneously ON points .......................... 2-15
Grounding........................................................... 5-15, 5-16 O
H Option Board ............................................................... 3-18
High-speed counter ..................................................... 3-12 Option Board error................................................ 6-6, 6-16
Option Boards
I Dimensions .............................................................. A-5
I/O bus error ........................................................... 6-5, 6-9 Optional Products
I/O Connecting Cable .................................................... 2-9 Models ..................................................................... 2-8
I/O wiring ..................................................................... 5-17 Output errors ............................................................... 6-22
Indicator.................................................................. 3-4, 3-8 Output wiring ............................................................... 5-20
Checking errors ....................................................... 6-2 P
Communications errors.......................................... 6-19
CPU errors............................................................. 6-14 Part names and functions
Errors ....................................................................... 6-5 Analog Input Unit ..................................................... 8-2
Fatal errors .............................................................. 6-8 Analog Output Unit ................................................ 8-15
Non-fatal errors...................................................... 6-15 E14/20 or N14/20 CPU Units................................... 3-2
Inductive loads ............................................................ 5-21 E30/40, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Units ........... 3-6
Input errors .................................................................. 6-21 Expansion I/O Unit................................................. 3-31
Inspection and maintenance ......................................... 7-3 Expansion Input Unit.............................................. 3-28
Installation and Wiring Products Expansion Output Unit........................................... 3-29
Models ..................................................................... 2-9 Periodic inspection ........................................................ 7-2
Installation height .......................................................... 5-7 Peripheral USB port ............ 3-3, 3-7, 4-4, 6-12, 6-23, 6-24
Interrupt inputs ............................................................ 3-12 PLC Setup error ................................................... 6-6, 6-16
Power consumption ..................................................... 1-11
L Power supply error ........................................................ 6-5
Low Voltage Directive .................................................... -22 Precautions
Precautions on Connecting Units .......................... 5-13
M Precautions when connecting a
Maximum number of I/O Points ................................... 2-11 two-wire DC sensor............................................. 5-19
Memory error.......................................................... 6-5, 6-8 Restrictions of CPU Unit with 16 or 32 I/O Points.. 3-34
Modbus-RTU Easy Master function............................. A-39 Restrictions on system configuration ..................... 2-14
Modbus-RTU Slave Function....................................... A-39 Unit replacement precautions .................................. 7-4
Model numbers.............................................................. 2-4 Program capacity ............................................ 2-5, 2-6, 2-7
Models Program error ....................................................... 6-5, 6-10
CPU Unit.................................................................. 2-4 Pulse outputs............................................................... 3-16
Expansion I/O Unit................................................. 2-12 PWM output................................................................. 3-16
Expansion Unit ...................................................... 2-13 R
Installation and Wiring Products .............................. 2-9
Optional Products .................................................... 2-8 Rotary switch............................................................... 8-59
Mounting hole pitch ..................................................... 5-10 RS-232C Option Board ........................................ 2-8, 3-19
Dimensions .............................................................. A-5
N RS-232C&RS-232C Option Board ....................... 2-8, 3-21
N/NA-type CPU Unit Dimensions .............................................................. A-5
Basic system configuration ...................................... 2-3 RS-232C&RS-485 Option Board .......................... 2-8, 3-22
E14/20 or N14/20 CPU Units................................... 3-2 Dimensions .............................................................. A-6
E30/40, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Units ........... 3-6 RS-422A/485 Option Board.................................. 2-8, 3-20
Models ..................................................................... 2-7 Dimensions ...................................................... A-5, A-6
Noise control ............................................................... 5-21 RS-485&RS-485 Option Board ............................ 2-8, 3-23
External wiring ..............................................5-22, A-49 Dimensions .............................................................. A-6
Relay output........................................................... 5-22 S
Non-fatal errors
Backup memory error ..................................... 6-6, 6-15 Serial communications ................................................ A-36
Battery error.................................................... 6-6, 6-16 Serial Communications Port ............................... 3-17, 3-24
FAL error......................................................... 6-6, 6-15 Serial PLC Links.......................................................... A-39
Option Board error .......................................... 6-6, 6-16 Service life of relays
PLC Setup error.............................................. 6-6, 6-16 CPU Unit................................................................ 3-14
No-protocol communications....................................... A-38 Expansion I/O Unit................................................. 3-34
Normal inputs .............................................................. 3-12 Specifications
Normal Outputs ........................................................... 3-15 Analog Input Unit ..................................................... 8-3
NT Link ........................................................................ A-36 Analog Output Unit ................................................ 8-16
Number of connected Units......................................... 5-13 Characteristics ....................................................... 1-12
Number of Expansion (I/O) Functional specifications........................................ 1-15
Units connected...................................... 2-11, 2-14, 5-13 General specifications ........................................... 1-11
Surface installation ........................................................ 5-8
Index-2 CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613)

System configuration
E/S-type CPU Unit ................................................... 2-2
Expansion system configuration............................. 2-11
N-type CPU Unit....................................................... 2-3
Restrictions on system configuration ..................... 2-14
T
Temperature Sensor Unit .......................... 2-13, 2-14, 8-56
Dimensions ........................................................... A-11
DIP Switch Settings................................................ 8-59
Rotary Switch Setting............................................. 8-59
Wiring ................................................. A-32, A-34, A-35
Words allocation..................................................... 8-62
Terminal arrangements
E14/20 or N14/20 CPU Units ................................... 3-2
E30/40, S30/40/60 or N30/40/60 CPU Units ............ 3-6
Expansion I/O Unit ................................................. 3-32
Expansion Input Unit .............................................. 3-28
Expansion Output Unit ........................................... 3-30
Too many I/O points error .....................................6-5, 6-10
twisted-pair cables
recommended models........................................... A-50
Two-decimal-place Mode ............................................. 8-66
Types of errors ............................................................... 6-5
U
Unit replacement............................................................ 7-4
Unit version .................................................................. 2-10
W
WDT error ...................................................................... 6-5
Weight
CPU Unit .......................................... 1-11, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7
Expansion I/O Unit ................................................. 2-12
Expansion Unit ....................................................... 2-13
Wiring
AC Power Supply ................................................... 5-14
Analog I/O Unit ..............................................8-35, 8-49
Analog Input Unit...................................................... 8-8
Analog Output Unit ................................................. 8-22
CPU Unit ............................................................... A-12
DC Power Supply ................................................... 5-16
Expansion I/O Unit ................................................ A-18
Expansion Unit ...................................................... A-25
Ground lines ..................................................5-15, 5-16
I/O .......................................................................... 5-17
Noise control ......................................................... A-49
Output .................................................................... 5-20
Serial communications ................................. A-36, A-41
Wiring connectors ........................................ A-43, A-45
Wiring Diagrams ......................................................... A-12
Wiring ducts ................................................................. 5-11
Wiring for PTs ............................................................. A-36
Wiring power supply............................................5-14, 5-16
CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613) Index-3

Index-4 CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613)
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W613-E1-01
Revision code
Revision code Date Revised content

01 September 2019 Original production
CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613) Revision-1

Revision-2 CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613)
OMRON Corporation Industrial Automation Company Authorized Distributor:
Kyoto, JAPAN
Contact: www.ia.omron.com
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V. OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
Wegalaan 67-69, 2132 JD Hoofddorp 2895 Greenspoint Parkway, Suite 200
The Netherlands Hoffman Estates, IL 60169 U.S.A.
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388 Tel: (1) 847-843-7900/Fax: (1) 847-843-7787
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD. OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD. © OMRON Corporation 2019 All Rights Reserved.
No. 438A Alexandra Road # 05-05/08 (Lobby 2), Room 2211, Bank of China Tower, In the interest of product improvement,
Alexandra Technopark, 200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road, specifications are subject to change without notice.
Singapore 119967 PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China
Tel: (65) 6835-3011/Fax: (65) 6835-2711 Tel: (86) 21-5037-2222/Fax: (86) 21-5037-2200 Cat. No. W613-E1-01 0919

User'S Manual: CP2E CPU Unit Hardware

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User'S Manual: CP2E CPU Unit Hardware

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

User'S Manual: CP2E CPU Unit Hardware

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cat. No.

CP2E CPU Unit Hardware

z CP-series CP2E CPU Units

CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613) 1

· Wiring methods for the power supply

Connecting Cables for CX-Programmer Procedures for connecting the

5 Creating the Program

Error codes and remedies if a problem occurs

2 CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613)

CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual (Cat. No. W613)

CP2E CPU Unit Software User’s Manual (Cat. No. W614)

CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613) 3

CP1E/CP2E CPU Unit Instructions Reference Manual (Cat. No. W483)

4 CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613)

Page Structure and Icons

5 Installation and wiring

DIN Track Installation

5-2-1 Installation Location

Precautions for Correct Use

Manual name CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613) 5-3

Precautions for Correct Use

CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613) 5

6 CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613)

2 Basic System Configuration and Devices

3 Part Names and Functions

8 Using Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units

CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613) 7

CP2E CPU Unit Manuals ........................................................................................... 2

Manual Structure ....................................................................................................... 5

Terms and Conditions Agreement......................................................................... 11

Safety Precautions .................................................................................................. 13

Precautions for Safe Use........................................................................................ 17

Operating Environment Precautions ..................................................................... 21

Regulations and Standards.................................................................................... 22

Software Licenses and Copyrights ....................................................................... 23

Related Manuals ...................................................................................................... 24

Section 1 Overview and Specifications

Section 2 Basic System Configuration and Devices

8 CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613)

Section 4 Programming Device

Section 5 Installation and Wiring

CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613) 9

Section 8 Using Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units

10 CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613)

Warranty, Limitations of Liability

See http://www.omron.com/global/ or contact your Omron representative for published information.

Limitation on Liability; Etc

CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613) 11

Errors and Omissions

12 CP2E CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual(W613)

Definition of Precautionary Information

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which,

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,

Precautions for Safe Use

Precautions for Correct Use

The circle and slash symbol indicates operations that you

The filled circle symbol indicates operations that you

The triangle symbol indicates precautions (including

The triangle symbol indicates precautions (including

Built-in RS-232C Port for E/S-type CPU Units

Built-in RS-485 Port for S-type CPU Units

Mounting Serial Option Boards to N-type CPU Units